JP2020108657A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize a desired stereoscopic vision.SOLUTION: Display means displays an image related to a game, and can display a portion of the image in a three-dimensional display mode in which the image can be stereoscopically viewed by a player, and display other portions of the image in the normal display mode. When generating the image displayed on the display means, N original images are generated by combining each of N material images for stereoscopic vision becoming materials of the portion that can be displayed in the three-dimensional display mode of the image displayed on the display means and a material image for background and a specific material image becoming the materials of the portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode of the image displayed on the display means. The N material images for stereoscopic vision correspond to N view points assumed in the stereoscopic vision. The image to be displayed on the display means is generated by performing scaling to each of the N original images respectively, and combining the respective images obtained by the scaling.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 196

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Gaming machines such as pachinko and pachislot machines are generally equipped with a display device, and by displaying a wide variety of images on the display device according to the situation of the game, the progress of the game can be enhanced or the development of the game can be prevented. It also improves the player's expectations.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to cause stereoscopic vision by causing binocular parallax by displaying different images to the left and right eyes of the player (for example, , Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-19666, A

The present inventor realizes a desired stereoscopic vision by devising a method for generating an image to be stereoscopically visualized in the process of earnestly studying a game machine capable of stereoscopic vision as described above. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a desired stereoscopic vision.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) An image related to a game is displayed, and a part of the image is displayed in a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image, while the other part of the image is different from the three-dimensional display mode. A display unit (for example, a display device 8000) capable of displaying in a display mode,
Image generation means capable of generating an image displayed on the display means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that execute the processing of FIG. 186),
The image generation means,
Of the images displayed on the display means, the images that are the material of the portion that can be displayed in the three-dimensional display mode, and are each viewed in N (N is an integer of 2 or more) viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing. Corresponding N stereoscopic material images (for example, a left foreground material image and a right foreground material image), and a material of a portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode among the images displayed on the display unit. By combining the background material image and the specific material image (for example, the error material image), the N original images (for example, the pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image) can be generated. Possible first image generation means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of steps S5702 to S5705 of FIG. 196),
An image to be displayed on the display unit may be generated by performing scaling on each of the N original images generated by the first image generation unit and synthesizing each image obtained by the scaling. Possible second image generation means (for example, a display control circuit 7230 that executes the processing of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), the display means displays an image relating to the game and displays a part of the image in a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image, while the other part of the image is displayed. Can be displayed in a normal display mode. In generating an image displayed on such a display unit, each of N material images for stereoscopic vision, which is a material of a portion that can be displayed in a three-dimensional display mode among the images displayed on the display unit, is displayed. N original images are generated by synthesizing the background material image and the specific material image, which are the materials of the portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode among the images displayed on the means. Each of the N stereoscopic material images corresponds to N viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing. When the N original images are generated, scaling is performed on each of the N original images, and the images obtained by the scaling are combined to generate an image to be displayed on the display means. It By generating the image to be displayed on the display unit in this way, the present inventor can set a part of the display mode of the image displayed on the display unit to a display mode suitable for stereoscopic viewing. As a result, it was found that the player can recognize a desired stereoscopic image. Thus, according to the invention of (1), it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

According to the present invention, desired stereoscopic vision can be realized.

It is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a diagram showing an operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from diagonally right above. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of the big hit of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power-on processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. 4A is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of backup clear processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of abnormalities. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a system timer interruption processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting mouth winning detection processing by the main CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of setting check processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time reduction processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern table setting processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing by a sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing by a sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of message setting processing by a sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of direct table registration processing by a sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of message transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a table showing an example of a selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 for each set value. In the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate. In the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hole menu task performed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when a hole menu screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device, when a hole menu redisplay process is performed. It is an example of a screen in which the content of the error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, (b) a start mouth abnormal winning error has occurred. Screen showing that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed, and (c) the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed and the start mouth abnormal winning error has both occurred. Is a screen after the notification period indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed in the state where the backup clear process is performed. It is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes the setting judgment processing for judging the suitability of the setting value information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hole menu process performed by the sub CPU. It is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. FIG. 61 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can update a page in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen in which each history data was cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device and showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “display setting” is selected. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen capable of performing page update. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming a set value is displayed on the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flow chart which shows an example of maintenance processing performed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when a maintenance screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a guide initial image is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a password request screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. 9 is a flowchart showing a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of authentication processing in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. In the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, a diagram showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. is there. 14 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the entered password is improper in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. On the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, the setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming the set value is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of an authentication process in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, a diagram showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. is there. 14 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process performed by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the game system concerning the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history process in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system and the server apparatus which concern on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen containing a two-dimensional code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-dimensional code display screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub-control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a voice/LED control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining an example of an output signal of a voice and LED control circuit in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the built-in relay board and the speaker of the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a display control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NOR type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NAND type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the AND circuit provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number determination table (at the time of a 1st starting mouth winning a prize) in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number determination table (at the time of a 2nd starting mouth winning) in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table (at the time of 1st starting opening winning a prize) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table (at the time of 2nd starting opening winning a prize) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the jackpot type determination table (the 1) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the jackpot type determination table (the 2) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the jackpot type determination table (the 3) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the jackpot type determination table (the 4) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a winning effect information determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect table in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining an outline of drawing processing in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the main control main processing which is executed by the main CPU. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design control processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design memory check processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol display time management processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit ending interval processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the system timer interruption processing which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of switch input detection processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting mouth winning detection processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the sub control main processing which is executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing performed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example for demonstrating the subdevice input discrimination information produced in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub device input processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 136. It is a figure for notionally explaining the backlight control processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the back light control processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing with a modification of backlight control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing which shows the back light control processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the first embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs. .. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the second embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs. .. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, it is a sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the third embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs. .. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RTC acquisition processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of animation control main processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of amplifier check processing for deep bass in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the sound amplifier check processing which does the normal amplifier/the deep bass amplifier (collective) check processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a more preferable form of sound amplifier check processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the amplifier check process for normal use/amplitude for bass in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable mode of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and the flowchart continued from FIG. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the sound request control processing when there are plural sound requests for the same channel. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a first example of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a second example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing a third example of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a fourth example of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a fifth example of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, it is an attenuation table showing an example of the brightness attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the high, medium, and low LED. In the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, it is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state of an LED port, an LED and a solenoid. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the data loading processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by the host control circuit. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the random number initialization processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by the host control circuit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the random number regular update processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 1 acquisition process, (b) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 2 acquisition process, (c) an example of a random number 3 acquisition process. It is a flow chart and a flow chart which shows an example of (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used. In a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, is a sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining a modification of the sub-random number processing. In the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention, it is the flowchart which shows one example of the reception interruption processing which is executed by the host control circuit. (A) is a perspective view of a lenticular sheet. (B) is a schematic diagram for explaining a left-eye pixel and a right-eye pixel. It is a flow chart showing an example of drawing processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of drawing processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of drawing processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of drawing processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of drawing processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of drawing control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of animation control main processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of scaling & synthetic processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of scaling & synthetic|combination processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows each image produced or used in the process of scaling & synthetic|combination processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|generation process of the synthetic image in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|generation process of the synthetic image in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|generation process of the synthetic image in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|generation process of the synthetic image in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart showing an example of drawing control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 3D switching judgment processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a drawing request generation process in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 3D switching judgment processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing in the pachinko game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 3D switching judgment processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of 3D switching pending process in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the display mode decision processing in the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 3D display initial setting processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing an example of drawing control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 3D display initial setting processing in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the case where four viewpoints are assumed in stereoscopic vision. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of a pachi-slot.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the outer appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the outer appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7: is an example which shows the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the front right diagonally upper direction. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including the first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are the directions in front view. Therefore, for example, “left” described in the right direction of the drawing is a rear view, and thus “right” in the drawing is “left” in a front view. Similarly, what is described as “right” in the left direction of the drawing is “right” when viewed from the front, for the same reason.

In the following description, the front and back sides are defined as the front side and the back side as the front side as viewed from the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface visible when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a payout unit 18, and a board unit 19 are provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame body when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with the opening 22 and the operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged above the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a device that gives a voice notification, effects, and error notification. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting unit for performing notification by light or performing an effect, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 includes a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 includes an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when referred to as the select button 664, it means the generic name of the up/down/left/right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hole menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13 and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is arranged below the glass door 13 at the lower front portion of the base door 12.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are shot from the launching device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls that are lent out and the game balls that are paid out as prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout opening 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout opening 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launching device 15 is arranged in the lower right front part of the base door 12 and in the lower right part of the dish unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). Thus, in the launching device 15, when the player operates the launching handle 32, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of special jackpot determination (hereinafter, the jackpot determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, effect identification patterns (decorative patterns), effect images according to the result of the big hit determination, effect images during the big hit, and demonstration effect images. Includes the number of pending display of variable display (variable display) of special symbols. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub control board 40 having, a payout/launch control board 50 having a payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 for supplying power (will be described later). 9)), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data relating to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value decreases, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

In the main board case that accommodates the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing a set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both of which are shown in FIG. 9 described later) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data and set values, which will be described later, for example. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case, in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “game machine manager”). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the above) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The term "inside the main board case" means that the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding positions of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are cut. When there is a gap and the backside is exposed by rotating the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine management manager, the gaming machine management is performed. It also includes one that allows the responsible person to access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can roll down is formed.

As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in the transparent panel 172 in which the game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed, and approximately in the center of the game area 20. The center unit 174, the normal electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, the passage gate 49, and the back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes each accessory such as the upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these prizes 1000 functions as a performance prize that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display region of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward toward the lower side of the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 26. The inner rail 26b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26a. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) and is formed in an arc shape in a front view. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into right and left of the center rail 1742.

The game balls launched by the launching device 15 are divided into right and left of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to the collision with the provided game nail or the like, it flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down area of the game ball that has been fired is sorted according to the amount of operation of the firing handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the firing handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region of the center rail 1742. The hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible to be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. The special electric auditors product 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620 to allow (or easily) the winning of a game ball into the special winning opening 540 and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination made when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later. If it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is a special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74. Is displayed by the stop display mode.

In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first start opening 420 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display portion 73 described later. Is to give. A first starting port switch 421 is arranged at the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the discharge port 63. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is performed by left-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower left portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 420, for example. However, in recent years, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and it is difficult to dispose the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower left part of the game area 20.

The second starting opening 440 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display portion 74 described later. Is to give. A second starting port switch 441 is provided at the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are paid out 61. Is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate or from the discharge port 63 to the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning a prize in the second starting opening 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In addition, as a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is performed by right-handing.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that is rotatable to the right, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ) Is provided. The normal electric auditors product 460 can be moved (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the starting opening solenoid 4630. Is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 or discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric auditors product 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 71 has a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball. The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The game ball passes through the passage gate 49 by right-handing.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20. In order to arrange the attacker unit 500 in the lower right part of the game area 20, it has been required in recent years to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. The special electric auditors product 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620 to allow (or easily) the winning of a game ball into the special winning opening 540 and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). When the opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the jackpot gaming state is entered. To be done.

The general winning openings 53, 54, 55 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When gaming balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of gaming balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27). (Is discharged).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440 is 3, the number of prize balls of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is 10 and that of the large winning opening 540. The number of prize balls is set to 15 each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The outlet 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flown in when the launched game ball does not win in any of the starting port and the winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, the first special It is provided with a symbol hold display section 75 and a second special symbol hold display section 76.

The normal symbol display portion 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric auditors product 460 to be in the open state according to the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is normally displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary symbol”), the combination of turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting opening The difficulty of winning a game ball in 440 is changed.

The normal symbol hold display section 72 is for displaying the number of executions of the variable display of the held normal symbols (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number of the variable display of the normal symbols"). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the game state is determined by the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 440. That is, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which it is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols that have been held (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of holding of variable display of special symbols") It is something to display. The first special symbol reserved display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The 1st special symbol reservation display section 75 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display section 76 display the number of reservations of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a/72b of the normal symbol holding display section 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which the information of the special symbol game is stored as start memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the upper limit of the first four times The first special symbol starting storage area (4) from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the starting memory, is provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a starting memory, is provided.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I/O port 105 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and sends output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 during power interruption (power OFF).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, in the main control circuit 100, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, The second special symbol hold display section 76, a starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a special winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. In addition, in the main control circuit 100, in order to send data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and the like, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 used is connected.

In addition, the main control circuit 100 includes a first starting opening switch 421, a second starting opening switch 441, a passage gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, a general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Are connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that triggers the execution of a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is used for changing the set value that has been set in the setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal according to a player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game balls. Further, the payout/launch control circuit 300 has a firing solenoid (not shown) according to a turning angle (amount of turning) when the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates the handle 32 in a clockwise direction. No.) is supplied with power to control the game ball to be launched.

Further, the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 24, control regarding light from the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200 while the sub control circuit 200 does not supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and a command input port 208. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on/off by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on/off by operating the main button 662, and select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned on/off by operation are connected. Note that actually, the select button switches 664a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively shown as a select button switch 6641 for convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having control means is provided. If it is, another mode may be adopted. For example, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage means. Further, the programs, tables, and the like are not necessarily recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs and tables may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. Although the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. A D/A converter or the like for converting as.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing a decorative pattern, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to a game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various types of voice data, an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as AMP) that amplifies a voice signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 24 to generate audio.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 stores, for each accessory, a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an operation pattern and a lighting pattern for storing an operation pattern and a lighting pattern. And so on.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory.

The command input port 208 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout/launch control circuit 300 has a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a game. A launching device 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330, etc. for clearing backup data at the time of power interruption according to an operation of an administrator of the game arcade are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

The power switch 35 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but instead of this, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338. Even in this case, it is preferable that the game machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed without opening the case, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the case correspond to each other. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by using a key managed by the gaming machine management officer, the back surface is exposed , The setting manager 332 can also access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the big hit game state with respect to the launch of a predetermined number (eg, 60000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 totals the base values based on the past game history, and stores the totalized result in a specific work area, which will be described later, of the work areas of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. The base values may be totaled based on a predetermined operation, or the base values may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by totaling. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 300 is a total history totalizing means for totalizing all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko game machine 1 is manufactured) to the present, It is provided with a set value-based history totalizing means for executing a total of set value-based base values based on a past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the gaming machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means performs the totalization of all the base values. All the base values totaled by the total history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history totalizing means executes the totalization of the set value-based base values. The base value-based base value totaled by the set-value-based history totalizing means is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The set value-based history totalizing means can also total only the base values for arbitrary set values in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base values for the set setting values but also the base values for other setting values other than the set setting values can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting changing process described later.

In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in accordance with an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totaled by all history totaling means and the set value base value totaled by setting value history totaling means Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list, or when displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means are used. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totalizing means and set value-based history totaling means, but in addition to these or instead of the set value-based history totaling means, from the time when the setting change processing described below is executed to the present A post-setting-change history totaling means for totaling the base values after the setting change based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by displaying all or a part of all the base values and the base value for each set value or/and the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game It is possible to easily confirm the information based on the past game history in the machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the payout is made by entering a special electric winning object (large winning hole) or a normal electric winning object with respect to the total payout amount of game balls. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by a prize). Further, it may be a display for the total number of shots, and may further be a display for the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors product (large winning hole). Moreover, you may display them according to setting.

Further, the error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may also display a setting change code indicating that the setting change processing described later is being performed, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, the special symbol display device may display a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball receives various prizes. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol game, or when it becomes a "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, in various prizes, a special symbol starting prize which is one condition for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol game It also includes a normal symbol starting prize.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random number values (for example, a big hit determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) from various counters (for example, a big hit determination counter or a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, referring to whether or not various data such as a random number value is stored due to a special symbol starting winning, one condition that various data such as a random number value is stored is a variable display of the special symbol. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "jackpot" is performed. Then, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described jackpot determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Then, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the above-described jackpot determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern ) Is determined.

Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, The effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

Then, as a result of the determined jackpot, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” will occur. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" is reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot gaming state, the above-mentioned various winning possibilities increase. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" is not reached, or when the big hit game state control process is finished, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed.

As the game state at the time of normal operation, for example, in the above-described big hit determination, a game state determined to be a “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as “normal game state”) or a probability determined to be a “big hit” A gaming state that increases more than the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state"), or a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning is easily obtained as a result of an ordinary hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state") ) And the like. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data extracted at the time of winning the start (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for symbol determination, etc.) ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a big hit determination random number value) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is called "holding", and the various data held is called starting storage.

That is, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and is suspended after the end of the variable display of the currently executed special symbol. The variable display of the special symbols being displayed is sequentially started. In the following, various types of data regarding special symbols that are being held are also referred to as “holding balls”.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. Until the execution of variable display of special symbols can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, up to a total of 8 of the first special symbols and the second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the pending ball is a win (whether or not a “big hit” is won) based on the information on the pending ball described above, and further It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a prefetch effect function.

(2) If there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). Refer to the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. To determine.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination of whether or not the "normal hit" is performed is performed. After that, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Then, the result of the determined normal hit determination, and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "normal hit", the normal hit game control process for playing the normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the various prizes described above, particularly the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not achieved, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the "normal hit" occurs in the ordinary symbol game The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the present embodiment, as a method for extracting various random number values, a soft random number method that generates a random number value within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a random number generator in which random numbers are updated in a predetermined cycle, a random number value from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting the above may be adopted as the above-mentioned various random number value extraction method.

In the case of using the hard random number method, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 12 is a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as "main symbol") FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of selection rates, and FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of special symbols stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms main CPU 101 and main RAM 103, which are not shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, are used, but these terms are shown in FIG.

In explaining the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 11, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), it extracts a big hit judging random number of the first special symbol from the big hit judging counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination for the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol big hit determination"). Incidentally, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, the main CPU 101, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination about the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit determination of the second special symbol") is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, like the big hit determination of the first special symbol, it is determined to be either “big hit” or “miss”. The jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”). ), the relationship between the range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination that is determined to be "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data" and "miss determination value data") Is specified.

In the present embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random numbers are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "high-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when it is "non-time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the number of times saved is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the number of times saved is reduced by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being judged as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (ordinary hit probability) is increased as compared with the non-time saving game state. Therefore, in the time saving game state, as compared with the non-time saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric auditors object 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is increased. However, in the time saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability compared to the non-time saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the variation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency of the object 46 changing from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric auditors product 46 may be changed in the opening mode to facilitate winning the ordinary electric auditors product 46. Moreover, you may combine 2 aspects or 3 aspects among said 3 aspects.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the normal gaming state, the probability variation flag ON and the time variation flag ON are the probability variation short time gaming state, and the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag ON is the time saving game. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to one of the game states among the states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random number of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random of the second special symbol. The numerical value is retained as a starting memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value being set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low and the gaming state is low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/300 in setting 1, approximately 1/290 in setting 2, and approximately 3 in setting 3. The value is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 260/, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the high-probability game state in which the jackpot probability is relatively high (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/30 in setting 1, approximately 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3 Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of big hit determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value. Depending on the set value, the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. For example, in the low probability game state in the first special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, the number of jackpot determination value data in the high probability game state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6. Has become.

Further, also in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value that is set. When the probability of jackpot is relatively low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/190 in setting 2, and 280 in setting 3 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. When the high-probability game state is relatively high in probability of jackpot (probability change flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. 1/27, setting 4/27, setting 5/26, and setting 6/25.

That is, as for the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability game state in the second special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot determination value data in the high-probability game state, 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6 It is an individual.

In addition, the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the setting values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the setting value has six levels of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be 6 levels, and can be arbitrarily set as long as it has a plurality of levels.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of set values may have a common big hit probability. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 The setting 6 may have a common jackpot probability (a third probability higher than the second probability).

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of this big hit determination random number that is a fixed value is set. By changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value, the big hit probability is made different for each set value, but the method for making the big hit probability different for each set value is not limited to this. The number of data may be common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as a total random number may be changed according to the set value, so that the big hit probability may be changed according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, which is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2. Range 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), setting 3 is 0 to 61039 range (big hit probability is 1/280), setting 4 is range 0 to 58859 (big hit probability is 1/270) The setting 5 is a range of 0 to 56679 (the big hit probability is 1/260), the setting 6 is a range of 0 to 54499 (the big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 judges the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of the jackpot determination random number) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data). It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value, as compared with a method in which the number of pieces of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value with the range fixed.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value. Commonality is not always essential. For example, in setting 1, the number of big hit judgment value data is 218, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (big hit probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, big hit judgment value data 219, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the big hit probability is about 1/290), and in the setting 3, the number of big hit determination value data 220 pieces and the big hit determination random number The range (width) is set to a range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is a range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270), in setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260) In setting 6, the number of big hit judgment value data is 223, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (big hit probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value while setting the range of the big hit judgment random number as a fixed value In comparison, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 31) in step S72 and step S82 described later. In addition to or instead of determining whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set as the set value. It may be possible to check whether or not the range is in accordance with the above, and/or whether or not the number of pieces of big hit determination value data is the number defined by the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number or/and the number of the big hit determination value data is outside the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) In the case of NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the distribution of the main symbols is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 25.0%), special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 25.0%), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 25.0%), and special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 25.0%) ) One of the above. Toku-zu 1-1 is a big hit with four rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 shortened times. Special figure 1-2, round number 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started) It's a big hit. Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. Special figures 1-4 are big hits in which the number of rounds is 10, probability variation flag is ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the first special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 13 described later, and then the main symbol determined above. Execute the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability variation flag is ON as in special figures 1-2 and 1-4). It is a so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the high-probability game state continues until the next big-hit game state is started after the big-hit game state ends. In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends again and the next big hit game state starts again. The high probability game state continues until it is played. And the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in special figures 1-1 and 1-3). If it is a big hit that does not turn on), after the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to a low probability game state without being controlled to a high probability game state.

When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or special figure 2-2 (sorting probability 50.0%). Toku-zu 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which time saving continues until the number of rounds 10, the probability variation flag ON, and the next big hit game state are executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the second special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 13 described later, and then the main symbol determined above. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes the control to stop the special symbol with the determined lost symbol.

Further, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. Also, if the probability variation flag is ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to a high-probability game state (a gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON), and if the probability variation flag is OFF, the jackpot gaming state. The game state after the end is controlled to a low-probability game state (a game state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the big hit of 100 times of shortening times (for example, the big hit of special figure 1-1) is called "4R normal big hit", the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the next big hit game A big hit that continues to save time until it is executed (for example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation big hit", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and a big hit of 100 times in shortening time (for example, 3, the special jackpot 2-1 jackpot) is called "10R normal jackpot", the number of rounds 10, probability variation flag ON, jackpot that continues to save time until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, bonus jackpot 1-4, The big hit of Toku-zu 2-2) is called "10R probability variation big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. It may be determined whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF according to the main symbol to be performed.

[3-3. Special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a flow until the variation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 will determine the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. The variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect contents (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined is configured so as to be different according to the set value (that is, also regarding fluctuation time and effect contents). The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the main ROM 102. Also, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may become shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 13. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol. Decide the variation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined by using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variable time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and the production selection It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probability variation short time gaming state and short time gaming state are not distinguished. Further, for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the variation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

The reach determination random number range is a random number provided for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for reach determination from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit judgment using the big hit judgment random number value when starting the variable display of the special symbol, but when the result of this big hit judgment is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be appropriately changed.

For example, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is executed is 0 in the setting 1.2. -25, the settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0 to 26, and the settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0 to 27. Further, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. 2 is specified as 0-10, settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0-11, and settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0-12.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is lost, the reach effect is more likely to be executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3・Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the reach effect is executed, the reach determination random number range is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is the case where the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is loss, but when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is the big hit, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number provided for determining the variation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and extracts the selected effect. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101, in accordance with the game state and the result of determining whether to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss), the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103. Use to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be appropriately changed. When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect, It is decided as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2, and is set to 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, is as follows. Is decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and is set to 51 to 99 in the setting 3 and 4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the probability of the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is missing and the reach effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach in time saving) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2 and 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A for shortening of working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in setting 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super reach B for time saving) is defined as 90 to 99 in common for the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the probability that the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a loss and that the reach effect is not executed The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2, and is defined as 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

Since the main symbol is decided when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is lost, what is the determination of the variation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big symbol determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 1 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in the settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and to 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a big hit, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during saving time), is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A in time saving) is defined as 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 45000 msec (super reach B for shortening of working hours) is defined as 50 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the game state, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, and the result of the decision whether to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol As for the time, the setting 3 and 4 are more likely to be determined as shorter variation times than the settings 1 and 2, and the setting 5 and 6 are more likely to be determined as shorter variation times than the settings 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol is, and the variation number of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the lottery number) is increased. As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of times the big hit game state is executed when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. It becomes possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the present embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all setting values.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit judgment is a big hit is set to be common to all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured such that the fluctuation times of the above are different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents the normal medium super reach B having a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing variation time and effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, the fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an example of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selection rate shown in FIG. 12 when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

When the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) receives the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, regardless of the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the sub CPU 201, all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) Since the distribution probability of the mode is 0%, all the decorative patterns (three decorative patterns in this embodiment) are the same even number pattern (distribution probability 30.0%), or all the decorations It is determined that the odd numbers are the same (the distribution probability is 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is the “7” symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with a high degree of profit, another symbol (for example, “V” symbol) will be the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 14 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 14, and when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, FIG. Designs other than the design shown in are determined as the stop design of the decorative design. The design other than the design shown in FIG. 14 corresponds to, for example, a design in which at least one decorative design of all decorative designs is different from other decorative designs.

Thus, according to FIG. 14, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Whether or not the result is that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 12 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3 or special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols always stop in the same even number pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first mode").

In addition, when the main symbol is special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, the first mode, or all the decorative symbols are the same odd symbol (other than the special symbol "7" symbol) (An odd number pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "second mode").

In addition, when the main design is special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, all the decorative designs are the same odd design, or all the decorative designs are the same specific design. It stops in the following manner (hereinafter referred to as "specific aspect").

Furthermore, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), it stops in the specific mode regardless of the set value. Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are both 10R probability variation big hit, but Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, so it is a big hit in the normal game state. It is highly likely that you have won. Moreover, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, it is highly possible that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time saving game state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R certainty variation jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is settled, and when stopped in such a manner that all decorative symbols are the same odd number symbol, the certain variation jackpot (4R probability variation jackpot or 10R Definite variation jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when it is stopped in the first mode, it is confirmed that the 10R certainty variation jackpot is not the largest profit degree for the player, but the possibility of the 4R certainty variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or a jackpot game. It may be notified during execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the big-hit gaming state is a big jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. You may make it control to what is called a "latent latency change state" which does not clearly show to the player that it is controlled to.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications for pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, but the specification is not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. Hereinafter, an example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described. However, it goes without saying that the following description is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
[4-1. Variation of special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a variation of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of the variable time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of special symbols to be held, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of special symbols to be held is increased. Is omitted.

In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol variation special symbol described with reference to FIG. 15, the number of lottery times that counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol (that is, the number of lottery times of the special symbol). It is provided with counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means, for example, is reset at the start of the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state ends, the counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 15, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination of whether to execute the reach effect is made. It is performed according to both the set number and the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the time when the big hit game state ends.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time point when the jackpot gaming state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect Is set to 0 to 25 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in the settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. The settings 3 and 4 are defined as 0 to 5, and the settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, the probability of executing the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as in the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of reach production is as high as 5 times (the probability of execution of reach production is as high as 10 in setting 1 and 2 as compared to setting 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the number of times the special symbol changes from the time when the big hit game state ends to 0 to 1000 times Compared with, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the variation time of the special symbol is also a big hit game. The setting difference is significant between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal reach) Is defined as 0 to 57 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation). No. 4 to No. 4 and setting Nos. 5 and 6 are 0 to 99. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normal super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in the settings 1 to 4 and not defined in the settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is defined in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-hammered situation in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach effect to be executed suggests the set value to the player. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the time point when the big hit game state ends is the starting point. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. In addition, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach effect will be executed in which the variation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol per unit, and the unit The number of fluctuations of the special symbol per time (that is, the number of lottery) is further increased. As a result, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game per unit time will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed within the unit time will be higher.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value that has been set from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect remarkably differs according to the set value, so when the so-called large summary is set, the set value set is inferred. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called large summarization occurs, the set value set for the player can be set without directly giving a loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). By giving a speculative opportunity, it becomes possible to give the player enjoyment. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect if it should be, but in the present embodiment, the expectation is that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value will be when the so-called large summary is reached. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce a decrease in willingness to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed less frequently.

In the present embodiment, the starting point where the number of times the special symbols are changed is counted as the point when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high probability gaming state becomes It is possible to start at an arbitrary time point, such as when the high-probability game state ends in a so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time saving game state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time becomes 1001 times or more, the reach production execution probability and the variation time of the special symbol remarkably differ depending on the set value, but not necessarily 1001. It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as it is a feeling that the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific point of time becomes equal to or more than a specified number, the execution probability of the reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value, but the set value It is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect or the variation time of the special symbol depending on the above. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when it is determined that the result of the special symbol big hit lottery is a big hit and the actual big hit game state is controlled. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 is provided with a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") between the end of the big hit game state and the start of variable display of special symbols. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening performance, for example, an effect indicating that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, an effect that celebrates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a game technique in a big hit game state (for example, right hitting) Teaching effects are performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, an effect indicating the number of times the big hit game state is continued (number of consecutive games), and a high probability probability that the game state after the big hit game state ends Production that shows that the state is controlled, production that teaches the game technique in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished (for example, returning to the left), production that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And so on.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value becomes higher, the time required for the jackpot gaming state becomes higher as the set value becomes higher. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates per unit time (that is, the number of times of lottery), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected payout value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, etc.), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. Considering that there is a possibility that the set value will increase, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be set longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the expected payout value is, the higher or higher the set value, the longer the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time become, or at least one of the ending times becomes longer. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 wins the game ball into the starting opening (the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time and the big hit game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 31) in step S74 and step S82 described later is executed. When it is determined that the setting value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" in this setting check process (NO in step S721 described later), even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[4-2. Modified example of stop design of jackpot distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, a first modification example and a second modification example of the jackpot distribution (selection rate of the main symbol) when the jackpot determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these The stop design of the decorative design in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 17 shows the result of the special symbol big hit determination when it is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol. 18 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 18 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 responds to the set value with the main symbol based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R certainty variation big hits", the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. 18, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7. When the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are set, regardless of the set value, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%). ) Control to stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75). Control to stop at 0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%). Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the stop mode of the decorative symbol may be different depending on the set value even if the big hit types are the same. Become. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

[4-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is determined according to the main symbol that is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is not immediately determined depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol large hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, unlike the first modification, the second modification includes a positive variation attacker (not shown) inside the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, when the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is detected, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability variation attacker is detected. When the big hit game state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to a low-probability game state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability game state based on the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is a so-called "probability variation loop machine".

As shown in FIG. 17, in the second modified example, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker differs depending on the main symbol that is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is easy in which the game ball enters the probability variation attacker. Controlled by. In the present embodiment, the short-time count is 100 times when it is a big hit in the "problem in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probability variation attacker" is 100 times. When it is a big hit, time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker" is almost unlikely to enter the probability variation attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). Is controlled to a low probability game state with a probability close to. In addition, "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker" is a big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probability variation attacker (eg, the special winning opening 540 (see, eg, FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probability variation attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker". The big hit is called "probable variation big hit".

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker," it is controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%. Instead of being controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, it is "difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker when it is a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker". The mode may be controlled to a high-probability game state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode”.

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult and easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) having the probability variation attacker inside, the probability variation attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2 -4) is a big hit game state that opens the special winning opening 540, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1 -5, the special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-1, the special figure 2-3) When the special winning opening 540 is not opened and the other big winning openings are opened, the big hit game state is controlled, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and a mode in which the game ball does not easily enter the probability variation attacker. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and an easy mode for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker.

Further, as described above, in the case where the special winning opening 540 having the probability variation attacker inside and the other special winning opening (not shown) not having the probability variation attacker are provided, the big winning opening in the jackpot gaming state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easy to select a jackpot gaming state in which the other big winning opening is opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is more likely than other big winning opening. As the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened is easy to select, the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened can be easily selected as the setting value becomes higher.

As shown in FIG. 17, in such a second modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the set value based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of Special Figures 1-8. However, in this second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. 18, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7. When the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are set, regardless of the set value, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%). ) Control to stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75). Control to stop at 0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%). Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, also in the second modified example, as in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, even if the big hit types are the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It is feasible that the stop mode of the symbols can be different. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

In each of the above-described first modified example and second modified example, by changing the selection rate of the main symbol depending on the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value. doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the set value. The stop design of the can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control of the sub CPU 201.

According to the first modified example and the second modified example described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the shortened time inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[5-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a hall-related person turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). And S30) are sequentially executed. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to a power failure or an OFF operation of the power switch 35, Processing at the time of power failure occurrence described later is performed.

[5-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). Then, after that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices with a built-in CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process of step S20, and includes, for example, a setting key 328 for starting and ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the set value, and the like. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the setting (step S15), then performs a process of reading each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 20), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag for identifying the status when the previous power failure occurred. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change processing described later, etc., there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change processing is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure is identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process to be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON before the power is cut off. On the other hand, when power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power failure occurs. In addition, the power failure status identification flag is also set to OFF when power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S722 to S727 described below. It should be noted that the power-off state identification flag is OFF when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on in the initial state or the power has not been turned on for a long time. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game during which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 if the power interruption status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and moves the game permission flag if the power interruption status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is turned off (step S1750), and the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. This check of the work area also includes a check of whether the set value data that has been set is within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”).

Note that the work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed and a data that is not cleared in principle even if a backup clear process described below is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set set value data, and the like are stored. It is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" of six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740. If not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If so, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760) and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is ON. Is determined. On the other hand, when the power failure occurs during the setting change process or the abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission processing is ended. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power interruptions that occur during normal games, the power interruptions that occur during the setting confirmation processing, and the power interruptions that occur during the setting change processing are referred to as normal power interruptions, and steps S722 to S727 to be described later. The power cut that occurs in is referred to as an abnormal power cut.

In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (the power switch 35 is turned on) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether the setting key switch signal is turned on. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 has been performed, that is, whether the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the last power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key 328 being turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the processing of step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission processing. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall-related person confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF. Can be understood. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key switch 328 being ON, the game permission flag Can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is temporarily stopped to stop the power supply, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process described below is executed. In the above description, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed, but instead of this, after performing the process of step S1810, the process returns to step S1740 to turn on the game permission flag. The process of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped until the above condition is satisfied (until YES is determined in step S1780 in FIG. 21).

[5-1-2. Setting process]
22A is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and the other processing (step) The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22, and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process ( The setting process ends without performing any of step S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting changing process (step S24), and the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and the setting change process (step S28). The setting process is ended without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed either.

That is, if the previous power failure was a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or during the setting confirmation processing described later, and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, then YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 changes the setting (step S24) and confirms the setting (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). Without executing any of the above, the process returns to the game return process (step S30), and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, if the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, or if the power failure occurred during the setting change process even if the last power failure was normal power failure, NO is determined in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. The setting process is terminated without performing any of the backup clear flag ON (step S28). Therefore, if an electric power interruption occurs during the setting change process or the previous power interruption is an abnormal electric power interruption, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Is determined (that is, the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are both pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and the setting is changed to a controlled state), and the set value is confirmed. Only, the setting change process (step S24) is executed and the process returns to the game return process of step S30. After the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated or only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26). ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed and the process returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return processing (step S30), abnormal time processing (see step S38 of FIG. 26 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22A, the power is turned on when the power cut occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power cut is an abnormal power cut. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 at any time, any of the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26) and the backup clear flag ON (step S28) The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22B, when an electric power interruption occurs during the setting change process and/or the previous electric power interruption is abnormal. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operating status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. You may do it. If the power is cut off during the setting change process or the previous power cut was abnormal, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on are displayed. Regardless of this, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on while forgetting to operate the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a disconnection.

Note that in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. It's finished. Similarly, also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22B, if NO is determined in step S21, setting is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. The changing process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 or/and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 is discriminated, and the setting processing is ended or the setting change processing (step S24) regardless of the discrimination result. May be executed.

[5-1-2-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be ended with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 moves to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

After executing the backup clear processing of step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing between the start and end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the setting change security signal. The setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting change security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the setting value data stored in the register is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays the setting value “4” corresponding to the setting value data “3”. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set therein correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are associated with “A” to “F” respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the corresponding “D” is stored. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the setting display data stored in the register is converted into the setting value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, since the previous data is discarded, it is determined in advance. The displayed initial value (eg, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8") on the performance display monitor. You may control so that it may be displayed on 334. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the person related to the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, and the setting value stored in the register. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in step S2450. ..

In addition, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5" each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. ”(When the setting value data is “5”, the setting switch 332 is pressed to return to “0”). As a result, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically reduced from “5” to “0”, or the cyclic increase and the circulation may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. Both reduction and reduction may be performed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2480. After shifting to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is confirmed. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is fixed based on that the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is executed (YES is determined in step S2470), and the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is simply updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected to be ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 sets the settings stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal turns off.

By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup when the power is turned on after that (when the power is restored) When the setting change processing (see FIG. 23) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 22(b)) , The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed without turning the setting key 328 ON, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 sends the setting key in step S2470. Without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then OFF. The process moves to S2480 (set value is confirmed). In this case, the main CPU 101 may determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is ON and further detecting that the setting key switch signal is OFF. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal is turned ON, it is possible to determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF. In addition, in the above, when power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at power failure recovery. Although it has been described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the states of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of restoration from power failure. Also, regardless of the status of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal when power is restored, power is restored in the setting change state when power is interrupted (that is, when the power is interrupted, that state is retained and When the power is restored, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power restoration, the process of returning to the held state may be performed).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The process ends.

It is to be noted that when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the command indicating that the setting key switch signal is turned OFF, that is, the command indicating that the setting change process has ended The initialization command will be transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

In addition, when the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or the game is started. At a predetermined timing after the start of, information indicating that the setting change process may have been executed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value, or the setting value has been changed in multiple steps or more (eg, setting 6 to setting 4 or more in two or more steps). Information relating to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like can be made different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or a higher setting value is set by the setting change process. It can be different when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, and it can be different when the setting value is changed in multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed in multiple steps. May be.

The above-mentioned setting change security signal output period and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. A command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, each time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and the process of step S2480 is executed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may be informed that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, and that the setting change has been completed. ..

[5-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process of step S2420 (see FIG. 23). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear processing, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

The main CPU 101 first determines in step S2421 whether the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred, In this backup clear processing, you may only partially clear it.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. It If it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. It should be noted that when the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission is turned off unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (see, eg, FIG. 23) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 as a command, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (see FIG. 23, for example), the main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display the setting value information in step S2450 of the setting change process. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be performed so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[5-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value that has been set is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the processing without executing the setting confirmation processing.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can confirm that the setting confirmation process is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the process proceeds to step S2660. Upon proceeding to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processing of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), the power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and the setting confirmation process. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process of step S26 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

[5-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return processing. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), a process of returning to a state where the game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. The game return processing will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process of step S38. This abnormal time process will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32 and performs a process of validating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON. If the situation identification flag at the time of power failure is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during normal game (playing in which neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is performed) or the setting confirmation processing, and is set. It is set to OFF when power interruption occurs during the change process. Therefore, the process of step S35 is performed when the last power failure occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power interruption is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that it is the high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for restoration from power failure (power restoration command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information about the set setting value. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure is being recovered, or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clear processing is the same as the backup clear processing of step S2420 shown in FIG. 23 (backup clear processing shown in FIG. 24), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear processing of step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and initializes the work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) for RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is used as a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (the backup clear processing is also being executed) or a command indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed. Function.

In addition, the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal output period and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

[5-1-3-1. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal time processing. As described above, the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 26) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process of step S31 (see FIG. 26). Processing.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, that the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the sub CPU 201 receives the abnormal command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send the abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when a normal command cannot be received from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may do so.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can understand that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns on when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and the power failure occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processes of steps S382 to S384 are repeated).

[5-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage has dropped to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs processing when a power failure occurs.

The main CPU 101 first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the main RAM 103 before the power failure is properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to hold various game data stored in the main RAM 103 even if the power supply is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 discriminates the status during power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change process, it is set to OFF.

After finishing the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop in preparation for stopping the power supply.

In this way, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and the setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process at the time of power failure occurs, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but is not updated when the power-off occurrence processing is started. As a result, the power-off occurrence process is started due to an instantaneous power failure, and even if the infinite loop of FIG. 28 is entered, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the main CPU 101 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

A rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to constantly supply power to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is shut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processings can be reduced.

[5-1-4. Power-on process flow seen from operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process viewed from the person performing the operation (for example, a person related to the hall) will be briefly described.

[5-1-4-1. Flow of setting change processing]
First, the setting changing process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value that has been set, it is first necessary to perform a power-off operation (power switch 35 OFF operation). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled, and the setting is changed. The processing is started, and the setting can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for RWM initialization When (transmission) is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display that the backup clear process has been performed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup clear process has been performed. It may be displayed in the area.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased. That is, the information indicating the set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but is set when the set value is "6". When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state is terminated and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all the switches is validated.

Thus, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[5-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation processing]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process executed on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, and is not executed internally when the game permission flag is turned off.

In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear clear switch 330 is set. The power switch 35 is turned on without pressing.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. Becomes

When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display monitor 334 displays the performance display (base value). Is displayed and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[5-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal process]

As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, an operation for executing the setting change process (the setting key 328 is turned ON and the backup clear/clear switch 330 is pressed while the power is not turned on). If the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35), the backup process (details will be described later) without the setting change process is performed, or When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal time process is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal time process will be described.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled (internal). When abnormal, processing is started). The reason that the operation related to the setting is validated is that the game permission flag can be turned on by executing the setting change process.

When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. This allows the operator to confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

Further, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, any operation will not react, and unless the above-mentioned setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off, the pachinko game can be executed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. It should be noted that the operation of all the switches being invalid means a situation in which each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, and each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) also include those in a controllable state.

[5-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information relating to the game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700. It

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[5-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting mouth winning detection process (step S61). The starting mouth winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc. is set at the time of winning the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning the special winning opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sphere passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, based on the fact that the passage detection of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passage detector (not shown), the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game ( Random number). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[5-2-1-1. Starting mouth winning detection processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting mouth winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start opening switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the first special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start winning a prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held first start winning awards (the number of held first special symbols) is less than 4 (step S74). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S75. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of retained first start winning awards.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S76). Thereby, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination By referring to the table, the symbol designating command, the hit selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S78). The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process. In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), and selects a variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15, since the variation pattern is stored in association with the variation display time of the decorative pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern designation command is information that can substantially represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved first winning opening winning numbers (step S79). The command for increasing the reserved number of the first starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78 and the like. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a reserved number overflow command for the first starting opening winning a prize, and then proceeds to step S81. The reserved number overflow command of the first starting opening winning a prize is a command indicating that the first starting opening winning has been made when the reserved number of the first special symbols is the upper limit (for example, 4), and to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 31, the reason why the first start opening winning number hold number overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S72 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the second special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting winning a prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held second winning opening winnings (the number of held second special symbols) is less than 4 (step S84). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S85. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second start opening winning a prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S86). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Also in the second special stop symbol determination process, similar to the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, the second special symbol For the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designating command, the jackpot selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Then, based on the result of the big hit determination, the process of selecting the variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved second winning opening winning numbers (step S89). The command for increasing the reserved number of the second starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the starting mouth winning detection processing.

When the game ball winning in the first starting opening 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 440 are detected at the same time, whichever of the setting checking process of step S72 and the setting checking process of step S82 is performed? Only one of them may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of the second starting port winnings held is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 and does not start the second starting opening winning number hold command overflow command to the sub control circuit 200 to start. The oral winning detection process has been completed. This is because it is in the non-time saving game state that the set value suggesting effect described later can be effectively performed.

[5-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU 101, and this setting check processing is the same processing in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31 for both). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 21) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set value set is The focus is on checking for normality.

As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S721 whether the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a prescribed range). As described above, in the present embodiment, since “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”, here, the setting value data is “ It is determined whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5". When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is ended. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. When determining that the special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S724, and when determining that the special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO in step S723), proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol that is being variably displayed. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (see FIG. 31) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), The variable display of the special symbol is continued and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. And after that, it moves to step S726.

For example, when a game ball is won in the starting openings 5442, 440 while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the variable display of the special symbol (before the variable display of the special symbol is finished). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When determining that the main CPU 101 is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), even if the special symbols are being displayed in variation, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols in the variation display is not displayed. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. In this case, the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off once and the setting change process is executed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol that is being displayed is cleared in the backup clear process, including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched. That is, the payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) is controlled so that electric power is not supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and turns the handle 32 in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not shot and the player cannot play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched in step S726, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S727 for abnormal time processing.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or even if the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. After finishing the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 26). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 27 is performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence processing of step S385, that is, the figure The processing of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in FIG. 28 is performed.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and the main RAM 103 is checked. If the stored set value data is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even when the game is being executed, it becomes impossible to continue the game when the set value data is not normal, unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. Unable to play the game. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, even if the variable display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, the power is once turned off and then turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is thrown in and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, a big hit determination random number) stored in the main RAM 103 for holding are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the held various data are based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 or the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed on the basis of setting values that are not normal for the various types of pending data, and it is possible to improve security.

As described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 in step S724. , Prohibits the stop of the second special symbol in the variable display when the special symbol in the variable display is not only the first special symbol but also the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S724, The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display, not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also in the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S725, The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 21) and at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. Not limited, for example, during setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 22), during setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 22), during backup clear processing (see FIG. 24), variable display of special symbols starts When, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, when the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9) detects passage, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, etc., the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing. You may do it. It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined timings are examples. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only with a specific timing as a trigger, but also with a plurality of timings (for example, all or some of the above timings) as a trigger. Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process, it is impossible to immediately turn off the game permission flag to proceed with the game regardless of whether it is in the big hit game state or not. Although it is made possible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is not normal in the setting check processing and the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may be caused by the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (eg, big hit determination process) be performed in a state where the set value data is not normal, various determination processes are not performed, and after the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time, It is preferable to stop the special pattern by losing.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the normal symbol is also prohibited if the normal symbol is being variably displayed. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[5-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number updating processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101, in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in step S93 and step S94, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. Thereby, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) and normal symbol display portion 71, and the special symbol display portion (first special symbol). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform the variable display and the stop display for the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage/game state data generation process (step S97). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates storage/gaming state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/gaming state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values ("00" to "08") written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each process of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the respective processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, checks the number of pending displays of the variable display of the special symbol, and if the pending number is not “0” (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the starting mouth winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets it to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting mouth winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is “0” (when there is no held ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process (“01”), when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag, the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the post-determination waiting time is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the big hit when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed. Determine whether the result is a "big hit". When the jackpot determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105), which will be described later, in the control state flag to set the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the latency timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S110) described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has passed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described special winning opening opening process (step S106) in the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the special winning opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the after-mentioned special winning opening opening processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S106). In this processing, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing for opening the special winning opening, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the opening It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the control state flag, a value (“05”) indicating a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets a special winning opening residual ball monitoring time in a waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time set in step S107 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process described later. Immediately before the end of the processing for opening the special winning opening, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, when the control state flag has a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing, and the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the main winning opening counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times of opening the special winning opening (that is, the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management processing in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval). Time) to the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit ending interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit ending interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening times, the main CPU 101 performs the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S108). In this processing, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time before opening processing for special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The value of the frequency counter is stored and updated so as to be increased by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this processing, the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106) is set to be executed again. In addition, immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit ending interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“ 08") in the control status flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set to be executed after the processing of step S109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of the special figure 1-2, the special figure 1-8, and the special figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control for shifting the game state to the high-probability game state. , If the above-mentioned main symbol is any of special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, and special figure 2-1, the control to make the game state a low probability game state (probability variation flag OFF) To do.

Next, the main CPU 101, if the jackpot gaming state is over, or if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss", performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of reserved pieces (starting storage information) by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the special symbol storage check process (step S102) described above is set to be executed. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot determination result is “miss”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the special symbol game end process (step S110). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, “03” when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”. To do. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the shift control to the big hit game state is executed. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening processing (step S106), the special winning opening remaining ball monitoring processing (step S107), and the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot gaming state is executed.

When the termination condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S106), the special winning hole remaining ball monitoring process (step S107), the big hit ending interval process (step S109), and the special symbol game ending process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order to end the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. The normal symbol control process of step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 33 (see FIG. 40 described later) also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched depending on the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the present embodiment as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[5-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second start winnings (variable display of the second special symbol) (second startup memory number) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held second starting mouth prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of held second starting mouth winnings is not "0". If determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first starting winnings (variable display of the first special symbol) (first starting memory number) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S115 and determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is "0". If determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first stored memory number corresponding to the number of reserved first startup opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed or is being held. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable display is stored as the starting memory information. Then, in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the four first special symbols that are held. Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area is, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the first start opening 420, a random number value for symbol determination, data indicating a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the first starting opening winning a prize. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning the starting mouth, and the jackpot determination random number value previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on the jackpot determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening, the determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “miss” (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 31) in the waiting time timer. .. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs demo display processing for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In addition, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the reserved number of second starting opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed or is being held. In the second special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable display is stored as the starting memory information. Then, in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area is, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the second start opening 440, a random number value for symbol determination, data indicating a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second starting opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117, executes the processing of steps S118 and S119, and then ends the special symbol storage check processing.

[5-3-2. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (fluctuation display start waiting time) set by the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the hour/hour counter, the hour/hour flag, and the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17) and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) round number upper limit value (big winning opening number upper limit value) ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving count subtraction process. This time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[5-3-2-1. Time reduction processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the time saving count subtraction processing by the main CPU 101. The time reduction processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management processing described above or the big hit ending interval processing described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S151). The hour/hour counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set hour/hour count reaches zero. When the value of the hour/hour counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour subtraction process. Note that, although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter is 100 times or 10000 times in this embodiment.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the hour/hour counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving count subtraction process.

[5-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit ending interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The number-of-rounds distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. When the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a probability variation big hit (step S168). When it is a probability variation big hit (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. When it is not the probability variation big hit (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability variation flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a prescribed number of hour-shortening times in the hour-hour reduction counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 12, FIG. 16, or FIG. 17) is referred to, and a jackpot of 100 times in a short working time (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-ho 1-3, Toku-zu 2-1. Etc.), the time saving counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (eg, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), the time reduction counter is set to 10,000 times. However, the time saving counter that is set when the jackpot continues to save time until the next jackpot gaming state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall. The number of times is not realistic. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not realistically occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall in the hour saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when it is a big hit of 100 times of short-time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set to the number of times of short-time reduction), and flag processing is performed when it is a big hit in which time reduction continues until the next big-hit gaming state is executed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S173). The fluctuation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the big hit flag, that is, processing for setting the big hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction processing (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

[5-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not being turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern in the case where both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15) (both big hit and loss). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

[5-4. Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. Normally, the symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 indicate a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 40, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol storage check processing (step S192). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control status flag is a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process, checks the variable number of the regular symbols held in the variable display, and the number held is "0". If not, processing such as big hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) described later to the ordinary symbol control state flag, and the variation time determined in this process. Set the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol elapses, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 normally performs a symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process (“01”), and when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. Normally, the value (“02”) indicating the symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after confirmation elapses, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101, if the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, a big hit. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating a later-described normal electric auditors product releasing process (step S195). "03") is set. That is, this processing is set to execute the later-described normal electric auditors product opening processing. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit” in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the normal electric auditors product opening process, the main CPU 101 says that a predetermined number of prizes have been won during the opening of the normal electric auditors product 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electricity supplier opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, decreases the data indicating the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the normal symbol by “1”. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the variable display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the normal symbol storage check process (step S192) described above is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 normally ends the symbol control process.

[6. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer at the time of activation, and the power interruption process is executed when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation unit input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to the first example and the second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) has been performed beyond the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first starting winning opening overflow point, and when the reserved number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the first starting winning opening overflow point. To do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect mode determination process. In the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as the normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and therefore, if the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's discouragement cannot be measured. .. Therefore, by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state, it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player without directly giving a loss to the hole. It will be possible. Further, some of the players suspend the firing of the game ball when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is the upper limit. In this respect, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball of the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggesting effect is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the reserved number overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to infer the setting only once. For example, it is difficult to infer the setting only with information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to infer the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is possible to do so.

In addition, as described above, the reason why the first start winning combination hold number overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process of step S72. is there. Therefore, when the setting value data is not determined to be normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. The sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point) when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is performed over the holding upper limit. At 49 points against 50 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 31) If it is determined not to be normal in (see), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 to be described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game. ..

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit. (See FIG. 31 ), on the condition that the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is made in the same manner as when the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make it suggestive production.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific winning opening of the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 5), for example. It is randomly determined by lottery. Then, while the reach effect is being executed, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, among players, there is a player who interrupts the firing of a game ball when a reach effect with a long variation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. In addition, in the reach production, it may be immediately understood that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, for the player, the variable display is not started next until the reach effect is finished, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. Moreover, if the game machine administrator can set the set value, the player may be suspicious that the set value of the pachinko machine on which he/she is playing is low, but this second According to the example, it is possible to reduce such a fear and suppress a decrease in interest.

In the case where the specific winning opening is randomly determined from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all see, for example, FIG. 5), for example, by a lottery, It is preferable to keep secret without disclosing which is the specific winning opening. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). Among them, for example, it is determined randomly by lottery, but it is not necessarily limited to randomly determining the specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as the specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the main CPU 101 may make the decision.

In addition, when a game ball is won in a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is the starting opening, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (see FIG. 31) is performed. Be seen. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), not only the setting suggestion effect is not performed, but also the special symbol that is being variably displayed is prohibited from being stopped by the process of step S734. To do. Further, also with respect to the sub CPU 201, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is continued even when the variation effect of the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect is being performed. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes a voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output a voice based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes a control process for the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[6-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no error or missing.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, and only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process which is separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, effect contents executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by effect mode determination processing described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31) while the game is being executed, and in the setting check process, the set value data is "0" to "5". 32 is not within the range (NO in step S721 of FIG. 32), the processes of steps S722 to S726 are executed, and then the abnormal condition process of step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting value data is "0" when the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. It is assumed that the sub CPU 201 is in the range of "5" (for example, if YES is determined in step S721), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the setting value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101, a specific timing (for example, at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420/second starting opening 440, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the variable display of the special symbol is started. Command) indicating the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “current set value”) indicated by the command received this time is appropriate. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the present set value.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value is normal if the previous setting value and the current setting value match, and the setting value is abnormal if the previous setting value and the current setting value do not match. To determine.

Further, when the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes processing when the setting value is abnormal. This abnormal-time execution processing displays, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, or instead of or in addition to this, a message that the set value is abnormal is displayed. This is a process of outputting a voice to be notified.

The above-mentioned determination of suitability of the set value information is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the present set value are the same. For example, all the set value information received three or more times are the same. It may be determined whether or not there is a match between some of the set value information received multiple times (for example, the set value indicated by the command received two times before and the set value information this time). It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 22) has been executed, the setting value is stored in the work RAM 203 this time. However, it is not determined whether or not the past setting value including the previous setting value and the current setting value match.

Further, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of suitability of setting value information) is preferably performed not only during execution of a game but also when power is turned on after power is cut off unless setting change processing is performed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[6-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message and the effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading a message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[6-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the presence/absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence/absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[6-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering, as a slave table, the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer (step S274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[6-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if the message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[7. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the set value that has been set, jackpot probability, reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, probability variation plunge rate, time saving) Although the rush rate) is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of them may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal symbol display portion 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of “normal hit”), the normal electric accessory 46 is predetermined. The state changes from closed to open only during the period. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing at which the normal electric auditors product 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing of launching the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the firing timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed. Therefore, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is surely written. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared is set by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot gaming state has ended, until a predetermined number of games have been executed (until a special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times), a high-probability game state is set, and after the execution of a predetermined number of games has been finished, a low In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the stochastic gaming state (a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine), when it is controlled to a high-probability gaming state (before execution of a predetermined number of games ends), setting change processing The probability variation flag is set to OFF when the backup clear processing is performed without accompanying, and the ON setting of the probability variation flag is continued when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing (remaining high probability game state). The memory of the number of games is retained). Further, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the probability variation flag ON setting is continued, and when the setting value different from the previous time is set. The probability variation flag may be set to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the special winning opening 540 is in the open state when the number of game balls winning the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When either one of the conditions when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from an open state to a closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can win a game ball in the special winning opening 540 in one round are different). A condition may be prepared) and such a condition may be changed according to the set value so that a condition having a higher expected value as the higher set value may be easily selected. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 tends to be longer as the setting value becomes higher. To be In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the special winning opening 540 tends to increase. It is also possible to

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in the mode of normal hit, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. By setting the time for which the accessory 46 is in the open state (opening time) to be different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the normal electric accessory 46 may be likely to be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is a big hit that the probability variation flag is ON as in special figures 1-2 and 1-4, the next big hit game is executed after the big hit game state ends. The high-probability game state continues until it is done, but is not necessarily limited to this, at a specific timing (for example, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. When it is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery of whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of continuation of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). Lowering the transition probability). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transfer lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability variation flag is also OFF). Set).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation plunge rate, the shorter hour plunge rate) are changed according to the set value that is set. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above has been described, the provision of the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the configuration may be partially changed. Hereinafter, another extended example in which a part of the configuration is changed will be described. It should be noted that configurations that are not particularly referred to in the description of other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but hereinafter, except for step numbers, for example, respective members such as the main CPU are designated by reference numerals. I haven't.

[7-1. Expansion example 1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 is a high-probability game until the next big-hit gaming state is started after the big-hit gaming state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the special symbol big-hit determination is a big hit. A so-called “probability variation loop machine” in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the loop count reaches this upper limit, the big hit game state ends. After that, the game state is controlled to a low-probability game state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to the set value (such a game machine has a “limiter”). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 47 is a table showing an example of the selection ratio of the limiter count in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the extended example 1 has a loop number check means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limiter number lottery when the number of loops is 0 The lottery means, the loop number counting means for incrementing the loop number when the loop number is within the specified range (in the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the loop number is a specified value (the limiter upper limit is 5 in this example). Then, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state is finished to a low probability state, and the loop number resetting means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a prescribed value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when the big hit determination result is a big hit, at the start of the big hit game state, during the big hit game state, and at the end of the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the setting 1, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 30%, and 3 times with a probability of 25%, for example. There is a 15% chance of being decided 4 times and a 5% chance of being decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And 5 times with 5% probability. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 10%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that a larger limiter count will be determined.

In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the higher-probability gaming state can be repeated more, one chance ( It is possible to change the prize ball amount given to the player in accordance with the set value in the opportunity until the low probability game state is controlled when the player wins once. Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters is changed according to the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value due to the number of limiters. Has become.

In the extended example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always necessary. For example, there is a concern that the player may guess the set value, but the setting The number of times of limiter may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1.2, 4 times for setting 3 and 4 and 5 times for setting 5 and 6.

The number of limiters may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, if the above limiter number is separately defined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first limiter number for the first special symbol Is determined and is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit judgment of the second special symbol during the loop is controlled, without incrementing the loop number for the first special symbol, the second limiter number for the second special symbol To decide. In this case, the loop may be ended (controlled to a low probability game state) when either the first limiter number or the second limiter number reaches the limiter number, or the first limiter number and the second limiter number. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of the limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is determined when the number of big hits is a big hit, during the loop, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the number of times. When the loop count reaches the limiter count, the loop is ended.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called probability variation loop machine, but it is not necessarily a probability variation loop machine, and for example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also do it. The "ST machine" means to control the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and set the high-probability gaming state to a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number"). It is a pachinko game machine that continues until variable display of special symbols is performed, and ends the high-probability game state and controls to a low-probability game state when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that there is one chance (the opportunity until the low-probability gaming state is controlled when the jackpot is won once. ), it is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST number” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be set to be different depending on the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery, and make the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 6 times in setting 5. By setting the number of times to 75, the expected value of the number of STs can be increased as the set value becomes higher. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. In addition, when the number of STs is set to be different depending on the set value, it is preferable to make the number of time reductions common to all the set values. For example, when the ST count or the expected value of the ST count is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. It is conceivable that the number of time saving is common to all settings, for example, 60 times. Then, the sub CPU performs, on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, an effect that allows the user to know that the game is in the high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. It is preferable that, for example, a liquid crystal display device is used to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp that the game is in the high-probability game state regardless of whether or not it is in the high-probability game state. This makes it possible to change the ST number and the expected value of the ST number according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, the setting check processing (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening and the second starting opening. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even in a loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the limiter number, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability variation flag is also set to OFF).

[7-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2 has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

In addition, in this extended example 2, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation time saving game state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is lost, the small hit may or may not be determined.

In addition, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. From the small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which makes the opening mode from, and the fact that the game ball wins in the specific territory which becomes the opening mode by the execution of the small hitting game, through the payout/firing control circuit A payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls is provided.

In addition, in this extended example 2, the number of time saving is set to, for example, 5 times, and the specific opening is provided in the specific region. Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the starting opening as a normal hit in the time saving game state of 5 times, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece operates and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, when the normal winning does not occur in the time saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time saving game state and controls to the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the game is played by hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time saving game state, by hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area by left hitting. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the second special symbol game is mainly performed by making the small hit probability in the second special symbol game different according to the set value, for example, a time saving game state. In the above, it is possible to vary the opening frequency of the specific area and thus the payout according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and 6 for setting. And make it 1/4. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of winning the game balls in the specific area is, and it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed depending on the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability variation flag may be set to ON in the time saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability variation flag to ON.

In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. When the main CPU determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear processing, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[7-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2-2 is provided with a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. Based on the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery").

Further, the main CPU, in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, the first game state (for example, probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special lottery”) is mainly performed. And the normal game state in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF), and the second game state (for example, the probability variation flag is ON) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed. And an advantage game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) and a game state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to the second gaming state.

Further, a public figure gate is provided on the right side of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. When the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, normal win), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. To be done. Therefore, when the game ball is fired toward the right side region of the game region and the game is performed, the second starting opening is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side region of the game region and the game is performed. The winning frequency of the game ball to is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the predetermined jackpot is a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game that is released over a number.

Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, performs a big hit determination of the second special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, when the result of this big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined big winning opening A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, it makes a win determination of a small hit, when the result of the win determination of this small hit is a small hit It also has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. The setting 5 is 1/260, and the setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 in setting 4. No. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU executes a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery. When it is a big hit, it has a second big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds. Even if the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, Good or different big prize holes.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to the settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in the setting 1, 1/8 in the setting 2, and 1/7 in the setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. The setting 4 is 1/6, and the setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery, regardless of the set value, although it varies depending on the set value.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit. When a game ball wins the special winning opening, the payout/launch control circuit operates the payout device and controls so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination with a small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, based on the winning display of the game ball to the second starting opening, and the first special symbol fluctuation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variable display control means for performing variable display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means, after the first special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the first special symbol is stopped so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined time, the second special symbol is stopped so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, when the game ball is won in the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, the first special symbol is being variably displayed. Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, when the game ball wins at the first starting port while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, even if the second special symbol is being variable displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Moreover, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF. For example, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds in the first game state, 10 seconds in the second game state, while the average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is 1000 seconds in the first game state, It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. Special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of special symbols has stopped. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable time until the result of the second special lottery is displayed. Becomes

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is launched toward the second starting port by firing the game ball toward the right side region of the game region, for example, the second special symbol It will take some time before the variable display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns with different variation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit. Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out so-called aiming, such as winning a game ball in the big winning opening with the aim of determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area, for example, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by shooting a game ball toward, for example, the left side region of the game region. On the other hand, in the second game state, by passing the game ball through the universal figure gate, it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting opening through the ordinary lottery, and the variation time of the second special symbol is also increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in any of the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 no matter which setting value is set. Done.

The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the variation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the variation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. However, it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

In addition, the sub CPU, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the decorative symbol variable display control means for controlling the variable display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, for example. Equipped with. However, the decorative symbol variable display control means does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner in the first gaming state, even if the game ball wins the second starting opening. The variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the game ball wins the 1 start opening is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above “conspicuous aspect”, the liquid crystal display device has, for example, in the approximate center of the display area, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol) and a right symbol (third symbol). It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by variably displaying. Further, in a small area, for example, one corner of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ◯ or Δ) that can be variably displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Such a shape) can be displayed. The proportion of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the proportion of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, so the player's gaze is to the first symbol to the third symbol rather than the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, the sub CPU, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, does not variably display the first to third symbols but variably displays only the fourth symbol, while When the game ball wins the 1 start opening, the first to third symbols are variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also variably displayed. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball is won in the second starting port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a conspicuous manner, and the game ball is in the first starting port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins is performed in a conspicuous manner.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball wins the second starting opening, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening, the probability of the result of the second special lottery being a small hit (one ninth to one fourth depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability (1/3 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the big winning opening by the small hit game is performed with a high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as a prize without increasing the execution frequency of. Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit varies depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is given according to the set value set. Can be different.

In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. Therefore, the main CPU also performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball is won in the first starting opening during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second game state, for example. When the main CPU determines that the setting check processing is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time processing. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit judgment for the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is a small hit, when it is determined that it is not normal in the setting check process, the main CPU causes the above small hit. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variation in the second game state is a small hit, it also includes information indicating that it is the second game state and information indicating that it is a small hit. Unless the various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[7-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in this extended example 3, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation time saving game state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is lost, the small hit may or may not be determined.

Further, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece, and the inside of the specific area. The small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which permits the entry of the game ball to is provided. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area by the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way, and the game ball entering the inside of the specific area is detected (entered) in the specific mouth, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a big hit, the first big hit game in which a round game for opening the big winning opening is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and the game ball entering the specific opening when the small hit game is executed, a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece over a plurality of rounds. The second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state is provided.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, the main CPU is the result of the normal symbol determination based on the detection of the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player makes a right hit, is a normal hit. At times, the ordinary electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it is easy to win the game ball to the starting opening. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hit game depending on the set value, for example, if the probability of a normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the variation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value, It can be realized by making it happen.

As a method of varying the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening according to the set value, a method of varying the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 in setting 1, 1/50 in setting 2, 1/40 in setting 3, 1/30 in setting 4, 1/20 in setting 5, and 6/setting 6. And reduce it to 1/10. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the more frequently the small hit game is executed, which in turn promotes the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

In addition, also in this extended example 3, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit judgment about the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear processing, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[7-5. Expansion example 4]
Even if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4 is not immediately controlled to the big hit game state, but the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. The condition device operates based on the condition device, and the accessory continuous operation device operates based on the fact that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the assumption that the condition device has operated. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the role continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passing through the role continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the expanded example 4 is provided with a character continuously operating left gate 1100 and a character continuously operating right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, the distribution device 1120 that can distribute the game ball flowing down the game area to one of the left side continuous operation gate 1100 and the right side continuous operation gate 1110 is a role continuous operation gate 1100. It is arranged above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are respectively provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled for detection of passage of the game ball, and are enabled based on activation of the condition device. In addition, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the condition device having been activated, and then the game ball is operated to either one of the continuous character left operation gate 1100 and the continuous right object gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection of passing.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls the 8R big hit game state in which a round game of, for example, 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU executes a 2 round round game in which a 2R big hit game state (selection rate 50%) and 16 rounds. Which of the 16R big hit game states (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is decided by a lottery, and the big hit game state decided by the lottery is controlled.

In addition, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation left gate 1100, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation right gate 1110, a big hit The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the game state is the same.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the role continuously operating left gate 1100 or the role continuously operating right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine through the outlet. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball, which has reached above the distribution device 1120, to one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 (see FIG. 48), and in the second posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball plays a role. It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 49).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing a game ball is different between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3 in the setting 2. Second setting, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.3 seconds and second attitude of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.5 seconds and the second attitude of 0.5 second. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

In this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big-hit game state is the same as when the game is played. That is, although the aspect of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is detected in the jackpot gaming state, when the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating left gate 1100 is detected and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, whichever of the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) When the right gate sensor detects passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, it is determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by a lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the amount of game balls that are expected to be paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility that

Further, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through either of the two gates (role continuous operation right gate 1100, role continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device operates, the role continuous operation The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. However, even if the condition device operates based on the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol made based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the game ball has both of the above two gates. A game ball may win the starting opening before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition ball has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the two gates, the main CPU 101 executes the setting check process based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, 31 (see step S72 in FIG. 31) is executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 32). In this case, even if the condition device operates, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and cannot proceed with the game.

In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates under which the condition device is operating below the sorting device 1120, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the accessory continuous operating device operates (the continuous operation of the accessory). The right gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) are provided, but it is not necessarily limited to the accessory continuous operation gate to be provided below the sorting device 1120. For example, a starting opening and a general winning opening may be provided. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120, by a regular operation, the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120, the starting opening that is the big hit determination trigger of the special symbol, and the general winning that does not become the big hit determination trigger. Divide into either mouth or mouth. Then, the operation of the sorting apparatus 1120 is, for example, the operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. 3 seconds, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture of 0.9 seconds. And the setting 5 repeats the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and the setting 6 repeats the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value, no matter what the set value is, it is possible for the player to shoot the game ball. It will be possible to have the fun of aiming for a prize at the starting opening.

[7-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not change the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value, but allows the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine to be changed according to the set value. .. In addition, in the extended example 5, the setting value can be set to any one of the five levels of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five levels, and may be a plurality of levels. It can be set arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to the setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the big hit game state. That is, when the setting value is set to the setting 1, the jackpot probability is less than 1/100, which is relatively high, but the prize ball amount paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with a game property.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished to the high-probability gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is finished and becomes the low-probability gaming state after a lapse of a predetermined period. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it becomes possible to execute a game having a game property called a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a big hit judgment of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop number”), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The gaming state is controlled to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-mentioned game property, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is finished when a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, the main CPU, when the jackpot gaming state ends, always or with a certain probability, turns on the probability variation flag, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends , Control to high probability game state. Further, in the high-probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the game state is transitioned in the game state transition lottery, sets the probability variation flag to OFF. , Control for shifting from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property in which a transition lottery to a low probability game state is performed in the high probability game state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability. It becomes possible to execute the game by one unit.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called amu-digi game characteristic, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine game characteristic, and in setting 3, it is so-called. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probability variation loop machine, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine in the setting 4, and low in a high probability game state in the setting 5. Although it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery for shifting to the probability game state is performed, it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game properties according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch and execute the game property called a so-called ST machine and the game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine game characteristic and the so-called probability variation loop machine game characteristic are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability game state after the jackpot game state ends, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends midway. In this way, by allowing two game features that are similar in appearance but are substantially different from each other to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine, etc., to use the pachinko machine differently. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest while also.

[7-7. Other extended examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, the main control circuit 100 itself is not limited to a form in which a game medium is shot or thrown in by a physical player's action to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface with a medium handling device, and provides a necessary game medium for lending a game medium (that is, for a player to insert a game medium). Operation) or a combination relating to the payout of a game medium (a winning combination is achieved), a payout operation of a game medium (that is, a game medium is paid out to a player, and a necessary game medium is obtained. It is sufficient to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and the game is managed. In addition to the case where a person directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the capability of not transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by the image pickup means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine is described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has a game medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, an upper plate and a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game sphere is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game sphere does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game sphere does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has got a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Furthermore, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that consumption, lending and payout of balls are performed. Further, "increasing or decreasing the number of game media" indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. In addition, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media accompanying lending and payout" is data relating to decrease in balls held due to firing of game balls and increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball through each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball due to that is added to the number of balls owned. Also, when a game ball is launched, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of balls to the game medium management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a ball (ball lending) or counting (returning) the ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit the data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the gaming media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted possessed balls can be used for prize exchange or the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

[8. Hall menu task]
First, the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The hole menu task is a task that controls the hole menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process is being performed or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hole menu display process in step S302. The hole menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying a hole menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. Although the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 even when the process of step S310 described below is executed, the hole menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S310 are displayed. There is a difference from the menu screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. 52 and 53 are diagrams showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, when the hole menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the hole menu screen has a hole menu item display area 1610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 at the lower left and right of the screen in the substantially horizontal center, and a preview arranged substantially in the center of the screen. A display area 1630.

In the hole menu item display area 1610, each item of the hole menu is displayed. 51 to 53, only the time setting, the prize ball information, the setting history/setting confirmation history, the error information history, the monitoring history, and the warning display setting are shown as the hall menu items for convenience. In addition to the above, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is processing during setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, it is not possible to finish the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items for the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, images corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d are displayed. The hole menu screen is displayed so that the activated operation buttons and the inactivated operation buttons of the operation button group 66 can be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 51 to 53, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and the inactivated operation buttons are shown. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are invalidated).

The operator can select any one of the items in the plurality of hole menus by operating the activated select buttons (up/down select buttons 664a and 664b). In FIGS. 51 and 52, the hole menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hole menu item. For example, FIG. 51 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 53, it is shown that the “setting change/confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, it is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily understand the selected item. The screen in which the item of time setting is selected (see FIGS. 51 and 52) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for the selected item among the items of the plurality of hole menus is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 51 and 52), and when the "setting change/confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is performed. A preview of the change/confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 53). However, it is preferable that the setting value is not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Note that the operation cannot be performed within the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is being previewed, it is not possible to set the time on the time setting screen being previewed, and the time setting displayed as the hall menu item has been selected and determined. An operation for setting the time can be performed on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the sub-CPU 201, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, in addition to the hole menu screen, for example, in the extremely small area at the lower right so as not to disturb the operation on the hole menu screen, "setting is being changed" or "setting confirmation". It displays a character such as "It's inside." At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9) so that a voice such as “setting change” or “setting confirmation” is output from the speaker 24. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is allowed to know whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 executes hole menu processing in step S303. Details of the hole menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hole menu process (step S303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, a command (initialization command) or a setting confirmation indicating that the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the processing has been completed (power interruption recovery command) is received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command has been received (NO in step S304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hole menu process of step S303.

When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed set value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

Note that the changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 when transmitting the power interruption recovery command because the setting value has not been changed, but the setting value information is also transmitted to the sub CPU 201. You may

In step S304, the sub CPU 201 completes the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the history number stored in the work RAM 203 is changed. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (step S305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data in the empty area according to the number of the history stored in the work RAM 203. This is to prevent the situation that the data cannot be recorded sometimes. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to, for example, 500 in this embodiment.

If the number of histories of history information stored in work RAM 203 is not less than the predetermined number N (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and history information overwrite processing (step S306) is executed. In the history information overwrite processing in step S306, the history stored first in the history stored in the work RAM 203 (oldest history information) is sequentially overwritten.

In the history information overwrite processing in step S306, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 with new history information. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received, if there is a possibility that the predetermined upper limit will be exceeded, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203. The history information may be stored after deleting the. Even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, if more history information is stored in the work RAM 203 and the upper limit may be exceeded, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 is It is also possible to delete the copy.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S307 to record history information in a free area of the work RAM 203 (step of history information recording) (step Execute S307).

In this specification, the history information overwrite processing of step S306 and the history information recording processing of step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording processing.

The history information is time information counted by the RTC 209 when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, or the setting confirmation). Information indicating that the process has been executed), and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101. Information associated with and is the history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the setting determination processing described above. It is preferable that the history information includes the current setting value information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the history information, and if the setting change/confirmation history is browsed in the hole menu processing (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the empty area of the work RAM 203.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) will be immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the sub CPU 201 is activated. If the command from the main CPU 101 is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is an abnormality, and brings the sub control circuit 200 into a game stopped state. Each mode of display output, voice output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, is not only the information of the date and time but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

After executing the processing of step S306 or step S307, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S308.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting is changed in step S308, that is, whether or not the initialization command is received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power interruption recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. In the process of step S308, the sub CPU 201 only needs to be able to determine that the setting has been changed. Therefore, instead of determining whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, the changed setting is used. It may be possible to determine that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, the sub CPU 201 executes hole menu redisplay processing. At this time, unlike the hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the hole menu screen that is re-displayed ends the setting change process and the game is played. This is a screen that is displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing of step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 54, one of the items in the hole menu displays the item for ending the hole menu. To be done. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the intention of the operator, but the setting change process The hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S310) that is re-displayed after is finished is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended by the intention of the operator. The hole menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 52) and the hole menu screen displayed in step S310 (see FIG. 54) can be operated by selecting and deciding any one of the items. Such a functional aspect (for example, a functional aspect of being able to browse the setting change/confirmation history screen) is common.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S308 that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310. , In order not to obstruct the operation on the hall menu screen, for example, a character such as "the setting has been changed" is displayed in the extremely small area at the lower right. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) is displayed, for example, in the minimum area at the bottom right of the screen, “Change settings Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9) so that the voice such as “setting changed. RAM initialized” is output from the speaker 24. This allows the operator to know that the settings have been changed (also the backup clear processing has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. Becomes Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red through the LED control circuit 206 (see, FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting has been confirmed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S309. -The game screen restoration process of step S315 is performed, without performing the process of step S314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hole menu redisplay process (step S310) is not executed. Further, no character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 both when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed, the game cannot be executed because the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. On the other hand, when the process of step S310 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of character display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 between when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). ), the mode of sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the hole menu item It is possible to easily understand from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state capable of executing a game or in an impossible state without interfering with an operation for selecting a page, an operation for updating a page, etc.). It is possible to do.

After executing the process of step S310, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S311 and executes the hall menu process. The hole menu process of step S311 is basically the same as the process of step S303, but the process at the time of YES in step S3072 of FIG. 60 described later is different and will be described later.

In step S312, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “end hole menu” is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. If it is determined that "hole menu end" is selected (YES in step S312), the sub CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (step S315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the image for effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when playing a game or the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period. The initial image displayed when Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen returning process of step S315, and then proceeds to step S316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S312 that "Hole menu end" is not selected (NO in step S312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 50, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304), the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S311). In the process of step S313, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed has been started in the processing of step S313 when the operator performs some operation such as when any of the hall menu items is selected in. This is a process for determining whether or not, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or more, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without any operation (YES in step S313), the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is ended, and the game screen return display processing of step S315 is performed. Execute.

If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating the effect control object has been received (step S314). .. The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, a jackpot game. Is a command indicating the number of rounds in a big hit game, a round interval command in a big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S314 that one of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen, and the game screen return display of step S315. Execute the process. As a result, a game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image unrelated to the game is displayed although the game by the main CPU 101 is proceeding. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the process returns to step S311.

After executing the game screen return display processing (step S315), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process of prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed, the hole menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned on again, and the power supply is turned off to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hole menu screen is basically a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing is completed, for example, the operator himself does not select the item “end hole menu” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S312), and Under certain conditions such that the operation time does not elapse the predetermined time (NO in step S313) and the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the processes of steps S311 to S314 are repeatedly executed. Then, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs some operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen), the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item will be displayed. It will continue to be displayed without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "end hole menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen restoration process (step S315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. Therefore, it is possible to ensure security.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S314 that the command for generating the effect control object is received, the game screen restoration process (step S315) and the hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) are performed. The game screen is not limited to this, but is based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, for example, the command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated is received. You may make it perform a return process (step S315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S316).

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, a notification mode when an error occurs, including the backup clear process without the setting change process, will be described. FIG. 55 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and includes (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start port. A screen showing that an abnormal winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing has been executed without the setting change processing. (c) The backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed It is a figure which shows the screen after the alerting|reporting period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was performed in the state which both have occurred.

As shown in FIG. 55, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents occurring in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the audio control circuit 205( Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When no other error occurs when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is within the display area as shown in FIG. Is controlled so that a character such as “RAM cleared” is displayed on the screen, and a voice such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 24. Further, the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. The control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the control (see) is executed. The character "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using a larger area than the above-described minimum area (see Fig. 54) in which the character "Setting changed" is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the backup clear process is always executed when the setting change process is performed (see FIG. 23), and in the hole menu redisplay process of step S310 executed after the setting change process ends, as described above, Although the message “Settings have been changed” is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed and “Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized. A voice such as “it was lost” is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 54) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The character "RAM cleared" is controlled to be displayed and the voice "RAM cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 55(a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing accompanied by the setting change processing is to change the setting value (not the backup clear processing), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear processing is the backup clear processing without the setting change processing. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear processing accompanied by the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is conservatively reported in a mode that does not hinder the operation of the hole menu screen to be displayed again. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the backup clear processing from being illegally executed.

After the backup clear process is executed, if another error, for example, an abnormal start opening prize is generated, it is determined that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred, as shown in FIG. 55(b), for example. Both that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear processing is executed has a higher priority than the start opening abnormal winning error, a character indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is displayed in the upper order regardless of the order of occurrence. .. Further, the speaker 24 outputs a sound notifying that the backup clear processing having the higher priority has been executed, and the LED 25 emits light in a mode indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed.

Further, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) about the execution of the backup clear process is executed in a state where both the backup clear process is executed and the starting mouth abnormal winning error is occurring, the backup clear process is executed. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormal winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It In addition, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear processing has been executed to a sound notifying that the start mouth abnormal winning error has occurred, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 also clears the backup. The mode indicating that the processing has been executed is changed to the mode indicating that the starting opening abnormal winning a prize error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is preferable to execute the backup clear process without the setting change process. In the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, when the power is not turned on and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning ON the setting key 328. It is executed (see FIG. 22). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201, which receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command, performs the backup clear process without the setting change process. It is possible to determine that the process has been executed, and the hole menu display process (step S302) and the hole menu process (step S303) can be executed.

[9. Another example of hole menu task]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 20). (See step S1730 in FIG. 21) For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal ( (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, the setting value is set when the work area check processing is not executed in step S1720 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, if YES is determined in step S1730), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information is appropriate (step 317 and step 317). The processing of step S318) may be executed. FIG. 56 shows the hole menu task in this case. FIG. 56 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes the setting judgment processing for judging the suitability of the setting value information. Another example of the hole menu task will be described below. However, description of the processing common to FIG. 50 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 uses the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current set value used for the progress of the game, even when transmitting the power failure return command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the sub CPU 201 executes a set value check process. This set value check processing (step S317) is performed by setting the current set value information (the set value information stored in the work RAM 203 transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power interruption) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 ( This is a process of confirming the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power is cut off. When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S314 are not executed.

After confirming the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the setting value check processing (step S317), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value is appropriate, that is, whether or not the setting value is appropriate. (Step S318). At this time, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S315. The processing after step S315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined to be unsuitable (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S319, and the sub CPU 201 determines when the setting value is abnormal. Execute the process.

The above-mentioned abnormal setting value process is a process of displaying an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, in this set value abnormal process (step S319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a sound notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. You may make it perform a process.

As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power interruption return command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination processing (the processing of step 317 and step S318) to set the set value. When it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate (NO in step S318), the abnormal setting value process (step S319) is executed, thereby making it possible to notify the gaming machine administrator that the setting value is not appropriate.

Although the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S317 and step S318) is executed when the setting confirmation processing ends, neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed, and the setting change processing is executed. When the backup process without the power supply (the power is not turned on and the setting key 328 is not turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on), or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information is appropriate by executing the determination as to whether the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure. This is because it is possible to determine

[10. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 50 and 56) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hall menu item for which various information/settings are confirmed or various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 or/and the main button 662 by the operator. Selection processing is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 57, the hall menu items are time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, The case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “time setting” (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 performs time setting processing (step S3003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". (Step S3004). When determining that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize sphere information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize sphere information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize sphere information. The prize ball information is, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, the number of prize balls paid out every day in the past few days. Information, difference information (every day) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past several days, and the like.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “prize ball information” (NO in step S3004), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “setting change/confirmation history” is determined. It is determined (step S3006). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is “setting change/confirmation history” (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change/confirmation history process, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later), which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and the “setting change/confirmation history” has been selected, the sub CPU 201 sets in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) is displayed, and the operator changes history of the setting (setting value), confirmation history of the setting (setting value), browsing history, confirmed setting (setting value) Also, it is possible to confirm the changed setting (setting value). The details of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “setting change/confirmation history” (NO in step S3006), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “error information history” is determined. It is determined (step S3008). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S3008), it performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 58) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm or change the error information history. To do.

The error history displayed in the error information history process is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective, when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is transmitted without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ), the normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 58, an error information history table is arranged in the approximate center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date/time column in which the date/time when the error code is recorded, and a release date/time column in which the date/time when the error is released are displayed. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that a cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It shows that you can do it.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S3008), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “monitoring history” ( Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the monitoring history.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “monitor history” (NO in step S3010), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “warning display setting” (step S3001). Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is “warning display setting” (YES in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 performs warning display setting processing (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S3012), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “notification setting” ( Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 performs notification setting processing (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “power saving mode” ( Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode process, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. ..

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the “power saving mode” (NO in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “maintenance” (step). S3018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "confirm accessory operation" ( Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is "confirm accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 performs accessory operation confirmation processing (step S3021). In the accessory motion confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays a character motion confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to allow the operator to confirm the motion of the accessory.

When determining in step S3001 that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “confirm accessory operation” (NO in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting”. Yes (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “liquid crystal brightness setting” (YES in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 performs liquid crystal brightness setting processing (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “volume adjustment setting”. (Step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is “volume adjustment setting” (YES in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. And

After the processing of step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "volume. When it is determined that it is not the “adjustment setting” (NO in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hole menu process and returns the process to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 50).

[11. Aspects of various devices when changing or confirming settings]
The modes of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) at the time of changing the settings and confirming the settings are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

First, at the time of changing the setting, it will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power, but even if the setting key 328 is turned on, unless the power is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are turned on. The LED 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and displays a message such as "Setting is being changed". Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice such as “setting is being changed” from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the set value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a hall menu screen is displayed and the characters "settings are being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, the sound "the setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is stored in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is confirmed. However, even if the set value is not confirmed, the updated set value is It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating another operation means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do it.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sends an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, as long as the execution of the game is not started (for example, unless a command for generating the effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 displays the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to displaying a hole menu screen or a screen of a selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the screen 204, the characters such as “setting changed” are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) and the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. The display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the output from the speaker 24, and the full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. , When the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or the execution of the game is started, it ends. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 additionally displays the display "RAM was cleared" in addition to the display "Setting changed". You may do so.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "Setting changed", voice output such as "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." By turning on the light for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as browsing of the setting change/confirmation history screen from being performed by an unauthorized third party. Become. In addition, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state being ended, it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is the mode of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like when the setting is changed.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. Even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are turned on as long as the power is not turned on. The LED 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned on), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and says "setting confirmation in progress". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice “setting confirmation” from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits the power interruption recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state is completed based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. In addition, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display processing (step S316) based on the reception of the power failure return command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LEDs 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and when the execution of the game is started, completes the red lighting of the LEDs 25. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, all the red lights of the LED 25 are turned on for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), so that a fraud such as a setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed. It is possible to suppress the operation performed by a third party who does not have. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, so that it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state when no command is received from the main CPU 101 and it is abnormal even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the game stopped state, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output and voice output "Please determine the set value", and the LED control circuit 206 outputs the LED 25 (for example, as shown in FIG. (Refer to 1) is made to blink all in white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is the mode of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like at the time of confirming the settings.

[12. Setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process (see step S303 in FIG. 50) will be described. In the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change/confirmation history information (to be described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as a setting change history, a setting value confirmation history, and a browsing history of the setting change and confirmation. “Setting change history information” and “Setting confirmation history information”). In the following, before explaining the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation and browsing will be described first.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting change process is started. Then, for example, by depressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased within the range of "1" to "6", and when the setting value reaches a desired setting value, the setting key switch signal is output. When it is operated so as to be turned off, one setting value provided for the progress of the game is determined from among the plurality of setting values, and the setting change process is ended.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting changing process, and thereafter, the initialization command indicating that the setting changing process is completed, and the changed setting value information, It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has ended, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 3” and “No. 4” columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later. To do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the setting value, the setting confirming process needs to be executed by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation processing is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting confirmation process is started. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is turned on again after the setting key switch signal is turned off. As I did.

Further, in order to display the history of setting confirmation, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits the power interruption recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed after executing the setting confirmation processing. To do. At this time, although the setting value has not been changed, the setting value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S317 and step S318, see FIG. 56). Preferably.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the date and time data currently counted by the RTC 209. That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later. In addition, as shown in the column of "No. 1" in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed together.

The work RAM 203 according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operator or is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed in the state where “setting change/confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53 ), and the work RAM 203 is displayed. This means that a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) showing the stored setting change/confirmation history information is displayed.

In order to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following processing. That is, during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S301). Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 highlights "setting change/confirmation history" (see FIG. 53). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and displays the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) on the liquid crystal display. Displayed in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information (information indicating that browsing has been performed) indicating that browsing has been performed, and date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, when browsing ( The data is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed). This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording process (steps S306 and S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed. When storing the browsing history in the work RAM 203, for example, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change/confirmation history information and stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 2” and “No. 5” columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later.

Here, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. , The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. If the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting change history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting change history is performed. Further, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 determines Of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting confirmation history is performed. Therefore, in the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is the initialization command or the power failure recovery command, in the hall menu process (step S303), “setting change/confirmation” is performed. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

Note that the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. When step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, which also serves as fraudulent monitoring of a game shop clerk. That is, in order to perform the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, a dedicated key (a key which is notched only in the corresponding portion of the setting key 328 and which is managed by the gaming machine administrator) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a backup can not be browsed, but a backup clear process that does not involve setting change processing can be browsed by a general game store clerk who does not have a dedicated key or an unauthorized player performing a backup process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by allowing the sub CPU 201 to perform the browsing record even when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to the time (a security camera normally installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

In the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or an interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the browsing record is performed, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Although both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting are performed, “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the settings that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator, but Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed. When the setting is confirmed, at least the browsing history is browsed if it is browsed. It was recorded. This is because it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, there is a low possibility of fraud if there is no browsing history but only the setting confirmation history, but it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud if the number of history of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large. .. It should be noted that regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure return command, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step S303). (YES in step S3006), the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The browsing history may be displayed together when the operation type information indicates that the browsing history is displayed, and the browsing history may not be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been performed.

In addition, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 is browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hole menu display processing in step S302 and the execution of the game screen return display processing in step S315. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53) (YES in step S3046), the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed. However, when "Return" is selected on this setting change/confirmation history screen to make a decision, the screen returns to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed multiple times during Steps S302 to S315, the browsing record is once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of times of the browsing record performed between step S302 and step S315 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes the setting, confirms the setting, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records and increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during step S301 to step S312, these histories are recorded only once, and the power is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from unnecessarily increasing by turning off and turning off the history so that the history is not recorded.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed after the setting change processing, and the hall menu redisplay processing is not executed after the setting confirmation processing. The screen restoration process (step S315) is executed. For example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off and the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall menu is displayed. If the specifications are such that the screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the user selects and confirms “setting change/confirmation history” on the hall menu screen displayed again, or repeatedly executes the ON/OFF operation of the setting key 328, he/she browses, but in such a case Even if there is, it is preferable to keep the browsing record once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operation means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine manager.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 61) capable of confirming the setting value is displayed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting change in which the setting value is not displayed is stored. The display of the confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 66 described later) may be stored as the browsing history.

59, 60 and 61 to 65, the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. The description will be made in comparison with the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 60 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change/confirmation history screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change/confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

When "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 57) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 57), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the initial screen of this setting change/confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted.

The setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, and a first selection area 1660a. And a second selection area 1660b. FIG. 61 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, time information, operation type information, and setting value information are associated and displayed in a list. The date and time column displays the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, the setting value after the change is displayed when the setting is changed, and the setting value at that time is displayed when the setting is confirmed. In the operation type column, “change” is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and “confirm” is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the operation type is setting confirmation, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3052). This time counting process is a process for starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timing of the timer is started after the setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 61). This is because the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after (see) is displayed).

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3053 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3053), the flow advances to step S3071 to be described later, and it is determined whether "return" has been determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “return” is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, “return” is determined. To be done.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, if the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which “Return” is highlighted, the highlighted display moves from “Return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 62).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again by performing any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (for example, refer to FIG. 52) when it is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3056 whether it has been determined to be “Page”. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Page” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ Page” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 executes page update screen display processing (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, an image simulating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the “Page” description. Thus, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the lower select button 664d is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, the first page is displayed. Circular display such that eyes are displayed can improve convenience.

On the other hand, if "Page" has not been determined (NO in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065, which will be described later, and determines whether or not "clear" is determined on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

After executing the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3058). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3055 and restarting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63) is displayed). ), so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S3059, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process advances to step S3062 described below.

When determining that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the sub CPU 201 executes page update processing (step S3060). When the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update process has been performed. The setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change/confirmation history screen when the setting change/confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is not shown.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to operate the page. Although the update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b, it is possible to select any of “No. 1” to “No. 5” in the setting change/confirmation history screen, and the down select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modification of the setting change/confirmation history process described later.

After executing the page updating process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3061). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3058 and then starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update process (step S3060) is executed (after the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed), and the predetermined time ( This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

After executing the time counting process in step S3061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3059 and determines whether a page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3062 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3062), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process shifts to step S3072 instead of step S3071 because "return" is highlighted (selected) like the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen on the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Because it does not exist.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63), the highlighted display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 64).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063), and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. To clear the timer timing and start timing again, no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen was highlighted. This is because the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed at this time.

After executing the time counting process of step S3064, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ It is determined that “clear” has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3065), the sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066). The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 65). When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process of step S3065 is executed, the item "return" is highlighted.

In the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are erased, but all the data are not necessarily stored. Is not limited to erasing, but only some data may be erased. As a mode of erasing some data, for example, No. 1 in FIG. 1-No. 5, time (date and time) information corresponding to a specific No., operation type information and setting value information are deleted, a setting change/confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change) , Setting confirmation, browsing) of deleting the date and time (time) information, the operation type information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, among the time (date and time) information, the operation type information, and the setting value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is erased can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change/confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the depression of the main button 662. In this case, when the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is input. You can Thereby, it is possible to prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his/her own fraud. Therefore, for example, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to perform the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the sub CPU 201 executes the clocking process (step S3067). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 is This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data has been erased.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3068 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3071 instead of step S3072 because "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the time counting process (step S3070). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3067 and then starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again by performing any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) when not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3071 whether “return” is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Return” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ It is determined that “back” has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. This hole menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to be “return” in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the process moves to step S3073, the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is terminated, and the hall menu is displayed. The initial screen of the screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting change/confirmation history screen will end and the hall menu screen initial screen will be displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing from step S3053.

As described above, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change/confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation. However, the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the hall menu screen continues to be displayed without ending the hall menu screen as long as the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed even if no operation is performed. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

When it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has passed (YES in step S3072), the process of moving to step S3073 is the hole menu process of step S303 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56) described above (that is, during setting change or This is a process during setting confirmation), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S311 (see FIG. 50, FIG. 56) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process of step S311, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 of the hole menu process of step S311 (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S315 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56), finishes displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S315) and the hall. The menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the hall menu screen is returned (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be browsed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, the setting change/confirmation history screen will be browsed again if no operation time has continued for the specified time. Can't do it.

Also, regarding the processing that returns to step S3053 when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the hole menu processing (that is, the setting in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above). This is the process in the process of changing or confirming the setting), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S311 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S311, even if the non-operation period has not reached the predetermined period (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen restoration process (step S315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) are executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, it will only return to the hall menu screen (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be browsed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, the setting change/confirmation history will be displayed again even if the no-operation time has not reached the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period does not continue for a predetermined period, and Unless the above condition is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

As described above, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator may view the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation while waiting for a predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed and the game screen restoration process (step S315) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S316) are executed, so that the person who does not have the authority (For example, a hall staff member or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history, and security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, in the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing), time information, operation type information, and set values A list screen is displayed that shows all of the information. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) displaying the time information and the setting value information when the setting is changed, and the time information and the setting value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 61) and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information when viewed are displayed. 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen on which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed in a list (for example, see FIG. 61), the first information, the second information, and the third information. It is preferable that the narrowing-down screen narrowed down to only specific information among them can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is useful not only for fraud detection, but also for information on how many days the business has been performed with the set value, and so on, which is highly convenient in business. The narrowing-down screen may display the target by narrowing down the target to the specific operation type information, and thus information (for example, current time information) not related to the operation type may be displayed.

[13. Another example of display screen displayed in setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. However, since the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that in FIGS. 59 and 60, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. A description of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the CPU 201 is omitted.

FIG. 66 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 67 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when “display setting” is selected. FIG. 68 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 69 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 70 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen in which page updating can be performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the setting change/confirmation history screen has a setting change/confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66, the confirmation setting change/confirmation history display area 1670 displays time information and operation type information, but does not display setting value information. That is, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed. The date and time column in which the time information is displayed shows the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed, and the operation type column in which the operation type information was displayed showed the operation type Confirmation and browsing) is displayed.

Further, in the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 1690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history, “Return” is selected and displayed (highlighted). In other examples as well, by operating the select button 664, the highlighted item can be selected.

When the select button 664 is operated to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 67). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed with the “setting display” selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the set value information is displayed. The setting change/confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen that is not displayed (see FIG. 68). ). Thus, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, by selecting “setting display” and deciding, it is possible to correlate with the date and time and the operation type. The set values will be newly displayed in a list. When the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

On the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 68) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, select page by operating the select button 664, and “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 69). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 70) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d can be operated to update to the next page or the previous page.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 66) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed, Also, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the set value information is not displayed although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is displayed. In this page update screen, by operating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

Note that in this other example, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 66, and the time information and the operation type information are displayed as shown in FIG. 68, for example. Although it is possible to selectively display a screen displaying a list of the setting value information and the setting value information, the screen of FIG. 66 displays one or two of time information, operation type information, and setting value information. It may be a screen that displays only information.

Moreover, the setting change/confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who inputs a proper password). However, this will be described later.

FIG. 71 is a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, in which a setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming setting values is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is performed. As shown in FIG. 71, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting changing process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the setting operation is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when at least one of the change processing and the setting confirmation processing is executed. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the hall menu screen (see FIG. 53) displayed in the second procedure, with the “setting change/confirmation history” highlighted, the main button 662 is pressed. When pressed, the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change/confirmation history screen, date/time data, operation types (corresponding operation types among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set values are associated.

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has the authority) can change the setting on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to third steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the above, and the sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the control unit changes or confirms the set value (for example, the settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the data transmission, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit receives the various data from the data transmission unit, and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even in a state, and an RTC 209 that clocks the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203. The liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a setting display function for displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the main RAM 203 as the change/confirmation history information, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may also be configured to acquire the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time at which the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209 and the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time is displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and is browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information, the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history regarding the setting value can be stored. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that controls the game. A certain main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided, and the control unit sets a setting value (for example, settings 1 to 6) that can be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a unit, and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the date and time is displayed when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data of the setting change/confirmation history information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured to.

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time is displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, an unnatural operation regarding the setting value It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it has been performed, and can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[14. Maintenance process]
Next, referring to FIGS. 72 to 74, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by sub CPU 201 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed will be described. Explanations will be given in comparison. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 74 is an example of the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices such as effect button switches 621 and effect parts such as the upper part 1000 that are connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various operating parts etc.) are targeted for the maintenance process. The operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the approximate center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74). This operation status display table includes, for example, a name string in which names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1-28) given to the various devices displayed in the name strings are displayed. And an operating state string indicating operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operating state column is changed from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. For example, when the production button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the production button 1 from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. Further, each of the effect products has a sensor for detecting that it is present at least at the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON, the display is turned OFF and the sensor for detecting the normal position is provided. When it is OFF, that is, when the effect character moves, the display is turned ON.

The sub CPU 201 also displays the operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen is returned (redisplayed), Further below that, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 74, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 72), the sub CPU 201 first acquires sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating states of the various devices with serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the above-mentioned various devices are in an ON state where there is an input or an OFF state where there is no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S3082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance screen display processing for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3083). ). In this process, the maintenance screen is displayed and the display is updated (for example, "OFF" display is changed to "ON" display).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (YES in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 57), and the process is performed. The process returns to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when determining that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, recent pachinko game machines and pachislot machines may have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, this is a case where the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" with the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "production button 2" having the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 causes the production button 62 to move upward so as to perform maintenance for the production function. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the sub CPU 201 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). For the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the "main button 2" being selected and decided, for example, when normal determination is made, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time to end the maintenance mode, the sub CPU 201 controls to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). It

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachi-slots, there are some which are provided with a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means. In such a game machine, a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be performed, the maintenance may be performed by activating each of the plurality of directing actors having different driving means at different timings, or may be independently activated to perform the maintenance. For example, in the gaming machine in which the driving means includes the different effect products 1 to 3, when the "production effect product 1+2" with the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 causes the effect combination. The article 1 and the performance accessory 2 are simultaneously operated to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “production effect product 1→2” having the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and decided, the sub CPU 201 first activates the effect effect product 1 and then operates the effect effect product 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the "production effect product 1" having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the effect operation product 1 independently to perform maintenance. Note that, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time and they interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, the “production product 1+3” with serial number 15 in FIG. 74 cannot be selected or cannot be determined even if selected. (Operation of the main button 662 is not validated). In FIG. 74, the serial number 15 “Production accessory 1+3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, first, the production accessory 1 is activated, and then If it does not interfere with the case where the effect character object 3 is operated), for example, “effect character object 1→3” with the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 74 may be selected and determined. As described above, it is possible to operate a plurality of stage effects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently. By disabling the operation, it becomes possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

Although not shown in FIG. 74, a payout sensor for gaming balls and medals, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachi-slot settlement button, and an enclosed button are included. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables a game by circulating the game ball, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game ball and the like be also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the device (various sensors, various accessory, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 has been described as the target of the maintenance process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the device connected to the main CPU 101. (For example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, etc.) may be the target of the maintenance process. In addition, in the CR machine, the pseudo-play between the ball lending machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of the CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot) is performed based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (“OFF” display is changed to “ON” display).

[15. Mobile device cooperation function]
Next, a mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of cooperating the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to record detailed information about the game played by the player, and customize functions that do not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by satisfying predetermined conditions. You can

As the predetermined condition, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol may be determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect may be executed. Further, as customization of the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state is changed to a special song, or the liquid crystal display device. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed on 16.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. If the main button 662 is pressed while the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not performed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The initial image of the guide includes the characters "UniMemo (registered trademark)", the character "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 75, the items of the guide menu include “start uni-memo”, “big hit symbol/round number”, “model site”, and “return to game”. In the initial image of the guide, "Begin uni-memo" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 75, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "start uni-memo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "start uni-memo" is selected in the guide menu, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "big hit symbol/round number" is selected, the big hit symbol/round number is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image displayed when a game is played, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or either the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. Also, a demo video displayed when the player does not win the prize for a predetermined period is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the effect image to be displayed when playing the game and the demo image described above. Is displayed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the uni-memo initial image, the characters "uni-memo", "let's customize your favorite character", and the uni-memo menu are displayed. Items of the uni-memo menu include “password input”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial image of UniMemo, "Enter Password" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of items of the uni-memo menu, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 76, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when “INPUT PASSWORD” is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Please enter password" and the password input menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of items of the password input menu are displayed. The items on the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "return to game", and "return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item among "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , The highlighted number or alphabet is determined. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When “OK” is selected in the password input menu and the password is determined, the plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected in the password input menu, the last input character is deleted one by one from the password display image.

When "Return to game" is selected in the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is used to display an effect image displayed when playing a game, or the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. Demonstration images that are displayed when a prize has not been won for a predetermined period are displayed in both the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When “Return” in the password input menu is selected, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[16. Modification of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described below.
[16-1. Modification 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
First, a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83.

The setting change/confirmation history process in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, except that the setting change/confirmation history process has an authentication function for browsing the set value. .. In the following, differences from the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 will be described in detail. In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the timing process (see step S3052 in FIG. 59 and the like) is performed in order to display. Also in this modification 1, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The hall menu screen may be displayed on the screen, but in the following description, the description of the timing process will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this setting change/confirmation history processing, "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53) being displayed in step S3006 of FIG. The process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, for example. The password request screen to be displayed is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 80 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 81 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

In the first modification, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. 80), the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes password input processing (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the input password is correct, and if the input password is correct (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is not correct (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display processing is executed, for example, the screen shown in FIG. 82 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 82 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is improper in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process of step S3100, if it determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), it determines authentication OK (YES in step S3110), and It moves to S3120. On the other hand, when determining that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the input password is appropriate when the main button 662 is pressed after the password is input on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the above-described authentication NG process of step S3103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, the setting change/confirmation history screen displaying the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information is displayed. You can As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information of the set values from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display processing. At this time, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which date and time data, an operation type, and a set value are shown in association with each other is displayed.

After the setting change/confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3130). If it is determined that the page update operation is performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process advances to step S3150.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3150 whether "clear" is determined. The operator depresses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 64) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3150), it executes the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3160), and proceeds to step S3180. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed, all history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see, for example, FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3170 whether “return” is determined. On the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operator presses the main button 662 with “return” selected (highlighted state). Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3170), it executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3180) and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of transition to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 83 is a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, in which the setting value can be confirmed/confirmed. It is a flow figure showing an example of an operation procedure until a history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a password (see FIGS. 80 and 81) and determines the adequacy of the input password.

As a fourth procedure, if the password entered in the third procedure is correct, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the value information, more specifically, date/time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, the person who has the authority to use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) changes the setting on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the above, and the sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the control unit changes or confirms the set value (for example, the settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the data transmission, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit receives the various data from the data transmission unit, and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even in a state, and an RTC 209 that clocks the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203. The liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a setting display function for displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the main RAM 203 as the change/confirmation history information, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may also be configured to acquire the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time at which the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209 and the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time is displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and is browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information, the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history regarding the setting value can be stored. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that controls the game. A certain main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided, and the control unit sets a setting value (for example, settings 1 to 6) that can be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a unit, and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the date and time is displayed when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data of the setting change/confirmation history information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured to.

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time is displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, an unnatural operation regarding the setting value It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it has been performed, and can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[16-2. Modification 2 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88.

The setting change/confirmation history process according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is basically the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “high”. It is configured to perform switching operation to any of the three volume positions corresponding to "," "medium", and "small", and to perform switching operation to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is preset. When they match the order, the user is authenticated as an administrator. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by rotating the jog dial and pressing the jog dial to determine the volume.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice control circuit 204, and the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 85) in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and is capable of performing a slide operation for setting an initial setting value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to any one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "high". The switching operation is performed, and the switching operation is sequentially performed to the plurality of volume positions 1, 2, 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large”→“medium”→“small”→“medium”. That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The pattern is operated, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set values, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set values.

As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern indicating a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “small”) in FIG. 84, or volume position 2 to volume position 3 ( An operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”) can be held in advance.

Thereby, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating the respective volume positions of the volume switch 108, and determines whether the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern or not from the management authority. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. Like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330, the volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, “setting change/confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 52) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57 (YES in step S3006), and “setting change/confirmation” is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while "History" is highlighted (see FIG. 53).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs a volume password request display process (step S3201) for displaying a screen prompting the user to input a volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed. Execute.

FIG. 86 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 87 is an example of the volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the volume password request display process of step S3201 of FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* operate the volume switch to input the password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information.

In the second modification, when the setting change/confirmation history processing is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. 86), the volume password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). May be displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed with this setting change/confirmation history screen being displayed, or the volume password may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes an operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with a preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation is performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that the correct operation is performed (YES in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S3120 and subsequent steps in FIG. 78.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process that displays that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Perform (step S3204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and proceeds to the process of step S3110 in FIG. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The volume password is wrong. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Although FIG. 84 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be at least three or more arbitrary ones. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and position information (volume position information acquired by this position detection function is acquired, and the acquired order and work RAM 203 are stored in advance). The setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on the condition that the stored predetermined operation sequence matches.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 88, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process, as the first procedure of confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall is opened when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a volume password (see FIGS. 86 and 87), takes in the input volume password, and determines the propriety of the taken-in volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by comparing the imported volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both are matched and authentication OK is obtained, it is determined that the volume password is correct. to decide.

As the fourth procedure, if the volume password entered in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the set value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, and browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are at least the operation unit that receives the operation of the player. A non-gaming operation unit that is not operated by a player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that allows a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 is provided with a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time. The setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201 by means, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 changes the setting to the work RAM 203 or confirms the setting. Setting values and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change/confirmation history information, and a setting display function for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided, and a non-game operation unit is provided. It is configured to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the operation is performed in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-gaming operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation sequence can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. In addition, it becomes possible to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the data. The browsing history may be displayed.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, since it is possible to authenticate in the operation order known only to the authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. It should be noted that this operation sequence is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it for setting change and setting confirmation.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. Further, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the condition that the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance is set. Alternatively, the configuration change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the person having the authority is informed of the operation order in advance to identify the person having the authority. Without adding an operation switch, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to authorized persons.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates the setting change/confirmation history information by operating the volume switch 108 so that only the person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display it. Although the configuration has been described, when the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history processing described below, from the input unit of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be configured to perform authentication using a password that is input.

[16-3. Modification 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game system 210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. This gaming system 210 is configured to include a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged on a network 230. As will be described later, in the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 cooperate with each other to perform an authentication process related to setting change/confirmation of confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change/confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 92). The setting change/confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, and includes a setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generating means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display/operation unit 222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a (registered trademark) or the like (see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display/operation unit 222 and the camera unit respectively configure an operation display unit and an image pickup unit in the present invention.

The control unit 221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, etc., and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or RAM, for example. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL, and the password input screen for inputting the password to the operation display unit 222 (see a later-described diagram). 95)), an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password input on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. When the acquired authentication result is correct, the history information display control unit that displays the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a mode including the set value is included. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by the CPU that operates according to a dedicated application preinstalled in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the constituent elements of the control unit 221 according to the present embodiment, are respectively the extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, and the authentication result in the present invention. An acquisition unit and a history information display control unit are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for the authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 that accesses the URL, and sets a preset password. It is provided with an authentication service function or the like that determines whether or not the password is correct by comparing with the above, and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A that constitutes the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This setting change/confirmation history process is performed by selecting “setting change” from a plurality of items of the hole menu displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 51) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. -Confirmation history" is selected and determined, and it is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed in a state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53).

In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the timing process (see step S3052 in FIG. 59 and the like) is performed in order to display. Also in this modification 3, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the time counting process is omitted in the description of the third modification.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change/confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 92) is performed (step S3301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in a mode shown in FIG. 92, for example. It is executed (step S3302).

After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 can accept a data clear request, a cursor move (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operations of the main button 662 and the select button 664, in an acceptable state. Move to. The main button 662 is a button for making a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Also, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of steps S3303 to S3305. Note that, in FIG. 90, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 59 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, the process of FIG. 59 is performed between steps S3302 and S3303. The process of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 90, after the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3303 whether "clear" is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3303), the process advances to step S3305.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3305 whether or not “return” is determined. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state (highlighted state) in which "Return" is selected in the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3305), the process advances to step S3303 to continue the processes of step S3303 and thereafter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), the setting change/confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 92) is displayed. You may clear it. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change/confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This processing is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and based on the image data, the display operation unit 222 displays the two-dimensional code in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code read display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the URL in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process that is temporarily stored is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 95), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display processing in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 to perform password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors the password display field 222c (see FIG. 95) while checking whether or not a password has been input (step S3404), and from the ten-key pad 222b. Process to accept the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

In the server device 240, the password sent from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 is collated with the registered password registered in advance, and it is determined whether the authentication is OK or the authentication NG depending on whether the two match. The server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 is configured to return only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password accepted in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs the authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 ( (Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when the password is determined to be correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 sets the display operation unit 222 to display the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S3402. Change/confirmation history display processing is performed (step S3406). In this setting change/confirmation history display processing, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the display information in which the setting change/confirmation history information held in step S3402 is embedded according to a preset display format. A process of creating and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 based on this display information (see FIG. 96) is performed.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. And a setting change/confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen 116g is the setting change/confirmation history information being displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Is included.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed in the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302 (see FIG. 90), the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “*two-dimensional code on a mobile terminal in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. It may be configured to display a message prompting a shift to the authentication service, such as "Read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 94 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code read display processing of S1101.

95: is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal 220 of the game system 210 which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. In the password input display processing of step S3403 (see FIG. 91), the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 95 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 95, on the password input screen, a ten key 222b having keys of "0" to "9" and "*" and "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying a password input by the ten key 222b. Then, a message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "*Please enter the password. The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 95, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password has been input by operating the ten keys 222b.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. 96, in the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g, the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is displayed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 133, for example. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 96, the setting change/confirmation history information displays the set value corresponding to the setting change/confirmation date and time.

In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the display format described above, the display format of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 96, the scroll of the setting change/confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supported. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change/confirmation history display process in S1107 after the setting change/confirmation history processing in FIG. The page shifts to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the button 222e and the select button 222f can be received.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3407). When it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page update operation is performed. Update processing is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page update operation is performed (that is, it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), page scrolling is continued. A page update process is performed (step S3408).

If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped and the enter button 222e has not been pressed, the control unit 222 proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in this step S3409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display processing (step S3410), and ends the setting change/confirmation history processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the setting change/confirmation history information on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side is converted into a two-dimensional code with so-called raw data and displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A ( 90 (see steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 90), the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed on the portable wireless communication terminal 220 side to generate setting change/confirmation history information. Processing for returning to data is being performed (see steps S3401 and S3402 in FIG. 91).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and it is possible to display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A side by this dedicated application.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have the dedicated application installed, even if the setting change/confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it must be viewed in the same display format as on the pachinko machine 1A side. However, it is difficult to recognize the setting change/confirmation history information.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only authorized persons can see the setting change/confirmation history information with the setting value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. However, the above data is shown in FIG. 96 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Displayed in. Therefore, if there is no dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read by a general-purpose barcode reader, it is not possible to understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered, and can be acquired only by authorized persons.

In the present embodiment, the authentication of the password is notified from the server device 240 of the authentication result, and it is determined whether the password is correct depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine whether the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. , If you want to further secure the confidentiality, after the setting change/confirmation history information is encrypted on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side, a two-dimensional code is generated and displayed, and the dedicated application to be installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is used. A configuration may be added in which a function for decrypting the setting change/confirmation history information corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, a setting change/confirmation history information setting value confirmation procedure in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93.

As shown in FIG. 93, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes the setting change process or the setting confirmation process as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment. Display the hall menu screen when the user is prompted. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the “setting change/confirmation history” by selecting and determining “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As the third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is main in a state where “setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information (see FIG. 92). ).

As the fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 94). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and confirms the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 95) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210, the individual pachinko gaming machine 1A, or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, compares it with the registered password, and performs password authentication. Here, when the authentication is OK, the server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of that fact.

As a sixth procedure, when the authentication is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change/confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 96). The contents including the set value are displayed on the display operation unit 222 as a reference). As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change/confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that accept various operations, and controls related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and the control unit can change or confirm a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). Setting switch 332, and a data transmission unit for transmitting various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit writes data to the display control unit even if the power is off. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information, and the work RAM 203 The operation unit is provided with a setting display function of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data by the setting display function. When the main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored as the setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, so that the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When the main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 reads the two-dimensional code and permits the display after password authentication, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history. The browsing history may be stored and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment uses the mobile wireless communication based on the information from the predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The configuration may be such that the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the terminal 220.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is used. The setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile radio communication terminal 220 on condition that the password entered in step 3 is matched. Therefore, since only the authorized person can authenticate with the password known, the cost can be reduced without adding the input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. It should be noted that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it when changing settings or confirming settings.

Further, the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 that is connected to the network 230 and manages a site for authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine 1A is a work machine. The server device 240 further has a generation function for generating the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the URL of the site, and the server device 240 compares the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 with a preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change/confirmation history information and URL, and an input screen that displays a password input screen for entering a password. If the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result is correct, A history information display control unit that displays the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is authenticated by the server device 240. Can display setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, it is possible not only to judge whether an unnatural operation related to the setting value has been performed but also to make it illegal. You will be able to judge whether it is the opportunity to investigate the action.

With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, since only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the setting value is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming system 210 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Heretofore, the gaming machine according to each of the embodiments of the present invention has been described, including the effects thereof. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[17. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to a pachi-slot. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the pachi-slot, the setting value can be changed by shifting to the setting changing process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachi-slot confirms that the above-mentioned setting changes were made, the signal generated from the setting switch was input by operating the setting key, and then the start lever was operated. When the signal indicating the above is received, the data indicating that the setting has been changed and the command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU, operation type information indicating that the setting has been changed (information indicating the setting change), and the RTC. Then, the date and time data currently measured, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In the pachi-slot, confirming the set value means operating the setting key (turning to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. As described above, the pachi-slot 1 shifts to the setting confirmation processing on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is ON, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot, together with the main CPU, constitutes a setting means that enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed.

In order to display the history of setting value confirmation, the main CPU confirms the setting value when the setting value is confirmed by the above-described operation and the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key. And the setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, the sub CPU, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating confirmation of the setting value, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received is stored in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The work RAM 203 is capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state.

Upon receiving the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command, the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs the hall menu display process of displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device included in the pachi-slot. The hole menu screen displayed on the pachi-slot is replaced with "prize ball information" displayed on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "total medal information" being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hole menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

On the pachi-slot, browse means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. On condition that the main button is pressed in the state of being displayed, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed, for example, as a setting change/confirmation history screen.

The sub CPU of the pachi-slot should execute the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hole menu processing, setting change/confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. You can When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachi-slot, the hall menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachi-slot or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In the pachi-slot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on when the precursor game of “SBB” or “BB” is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the effect of the aura game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the aura game corresponding to “BB”.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are finished on condition that they have played the games of the number of stay games, respectively. The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of times of navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, or, like “BB”, the number of games added to the number of stay games in “SBB” may be added. The configuration may be such that addition (addition) is performed.

In addition, in the pachi-slot, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional addition A, B, and C are determined, the additional addition game number counter may be set to "2". However, the number of games in which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional-addition game number counter may be changed according to the type of additional-addition effect (additional addition A, B, C).

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to a fixed number of games, for example, “50”. Alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , One set of “50” games) and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not subtracting the value of the ART game number counter for each game. In addition, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push If a stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game from the game following the game for which the irregular press is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotary accessory 123 rotated by the drive of the stepping motor is described as an example of the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the vertical direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[18. Note]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[18-1. First to eighth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, a structural element that influences the entrance rate to the entrance and the tendency toward payout. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the amusement of the game is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest. is there.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-1. First gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
With a display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols (for example, special symbols) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time,
A fluctuation pattern determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S78) that determines the fluctuation pattern performed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
A fluctuation pattern table storage unit (for example, a main ROM 102) that stores a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern,
The symbol display control means (the variable display of the symbol is performed over the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means (for example, the variation display of the special symbol), and the stop display is performed in a mode showing the result of the lottery ( For example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93,
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, the figure The variable time determination table table of the special symbol shown in 13) is stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the variation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of times of lottery per unit time, and eventually the result of the lottery. Expectations are increased, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a lottery number counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that counts the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
Another variation pattern table defined such that the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher (for example, in FIG. 15). The fluctuation time determination table table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored,
The fluctuation pattern determining means,
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the jackpot game state is finished), It is configured such that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the variation pattern can be determined by using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the more the number of times of lottery per unit time is remarkably increased, and the expectation of the player is increased when the number of times of execution of lottery is a specific number of times of execution, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit lottery of a special symbol of a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit game state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determining means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, a lottery for the variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when variable display of symbols (for example, variable display of special symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not. It may be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbols, if it is determined to be unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination of the game information, It is structured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-2. Second game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) by a predetermined symbol is performed, and the result of the lottery can be shown by the stop mode of the symbol,
A stop mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
Stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, the decorative pattern determination table of FIG. 14) that is used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determination means,
A symbol effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination unit,
When the symbols are displayed in a mode (for example, the first mode, the second mode, the specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (For example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certainty big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certainty big hit) Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control in FIG. 10),
Equipped with
The profit giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit that has a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability variation big hit),
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode is It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control means is the same regardless of the setting value, even though the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol will be stopped in the specific stop mode is increased as is higher.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. Since the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased as the set value set by the control means is increased, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the adequacy determining means while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. And even if the stop mode determining means determines that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed. Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, it is determined whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable for determining whether the game information is appropriate or not. If it is determined that the game is not progressed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-3. Third gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118, a big jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery),
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used in the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 16 or FIG. 17 is a jackpot),
At least display means for performing variable display of symbols (for example, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74),
A symbol display control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of the symbols and stops and displays the results of the lottery,
In the mode (for example, special figure 1-1 to special figure 1-8, special figure 2-1 to special figure 2-4) showing that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, big hit), the symbol is When displayed, a profit giving means for giving one of a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R probability big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R probability big hit) (eg, FIG. 10). With the main CPU101) which executes the big hit game control,
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables are stored in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R certainty variation big hits) having a relatively high degree of advantage among the plurality of profits differ according to set values,
The lottery means,
The lottery table is configured to be able to perform the lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed by using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage is different depending on the set value. It is possible to change the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to the player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability of the game state after the special game state is finished are given. And
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability game state differs depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled in the high-probability gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time saving game state) is further given,
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state varies depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is the result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-4. Fourth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting openings including a first starting opening and a second starting opening provided in the game area,
A special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118 that can perform a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (eg, acceptance) of a game ball into each of the plurality of starting openings. CPU 101),
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit),
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game,
Equipped with
The special lottery means,
When performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening, the probability that the particular result will be the specific lottery depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently, and
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, it is more frequent when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening. The specific game is configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, The specific game is executed with a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the starting opening. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value, on the assumption that the specific game is executed with high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed at a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening" When the game ball enters the starting opening, the winning judgment (including the probability 0) for the specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the winning judgment is that the game ball enters the second starting opening. Not only a mode lower than the time, but also a mode in which when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the winning/deciding condition for a specific result is not included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 which makes an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 10) which performs an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the game ball to the second starting port (first starting port 440) Special symbol variable display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry,
A first game state (for example, both probability variation flag and time saving flag are set to OFF) which is long enough to affect the progress of the game by the time (for example, average time 1000 sec) of the variable display of the second special symbol. State), or the second gaming state (eg, average time 1 sec) is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol (eg, average time 10 sec) (eg, average time 10 sec) A gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF,
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second game state, since the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to realize that the execution frequency of the specific game is changed according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the adequacy determination means is inadequate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start opening (for example, the second start opening). When it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the specific game execution means cannot execute the specific game without executing the specific game. And a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722)
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening), a special lottery (for example, a lottery based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting opening) is performed. Before the result of the second special lottery) is displayed (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that it is unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability of the game information, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-5. Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening,
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 which makes an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 10) which performs an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
Based on that the result of the special lottery performed based on the entrance (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result (for example, a small hit), within a specific area where the specific opening is provided. Specific region variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that game balls can easily enter (for example, be received)
Second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the fact that a game ball is received in the specific mouth provided in the specific area,
Equipped with
The specific region variable control means,
It is configured such that the predetermined movable piece can be actuated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area can differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value set. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and thus the opportunity to be given the privilege can be made different according to the set value set, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of a normal hit is different, a normal symbol is By changing the execution frequency of the special lottery according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is carried out in a different manner depending on the situation.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of privilege granted based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by changing the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is performed so that it can be changed according to the set value that has been set.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is carried out, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting opening, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 is performed. Main CPU 101) to execute,
It is characterized by including.

According to the (4) gaming machine, even if the game ball enters the starting opening, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result, it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability of game information. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece operates. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-6. Sixth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (eg, big hit), a special game state control means (eg, big hit game control in FIG. 10) that can be controlled to a special game state (eg, big hit game state) is executed. Main CPU 101),
A game state control means (eg, step S169) that can control the game state after the special game state is finished to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability game state) With the main CPU 101) that advances the game after setting the flag,
Counting means for counting the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
The game state control means,
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, the special game state is controllable,
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a prescribed number, the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the normal game state,
The specified number of times is
It is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to repeat the special game state and the advantageous game state up to a prescribed number of times, and the prescribed number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means, It is possible to improve the interest in playing games.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
The specified number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured such that the expected value for the specified number of times is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the prescribed number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this prescribed number of times is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it depends on the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storing unit is inappropriate, the counting unit counts even if the number of times counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. And a game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed without the number of times counted by the predetermined number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled to the normal gaming state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the prescribed number of times (that is, in the loop). ), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if it is in the loop, if it is determined that the game information is not suitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination, it is configured so that the game cannot proceed without the loop count reaching the specified number. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-7. Seventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118). ,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 10). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening production performed at the start of the special game state and an ending production performed at the end of the special game state,
Equipped with
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode in which the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the degree of advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. It is characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value that is set, the more advantageous the lottery is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is set higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special game state, it is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening,
The adequacy determining means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine whether the game information is appropriate or not,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, the game progress disapproval is performed so that the game cannot be progressed even if the special game state is controlled. It is characterized by having means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S722).

According to the gaming machine of (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined even when the gaming machine is being controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so security is ensured. At the same time, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to solve the above first problem, an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-8. Eighth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., character continuously operating left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., character continuously operating right gate 1110);
An entry permitting means (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances,
Different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different, or if there is a starting entrance below the entrance, a lottery will be conducted). Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of giving the player whether or not it is executed)
Equipped with
The approach permitting means is
Of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means. To do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit to be given to the player will be different depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. In the first entrance and the second entrance, the accessibility of the game ball can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim as to which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while aiming to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be suitably changed.

In addition, "it is possible to give the player different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" is, for example, a game at the first entrance. Other than when the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting opening that triggers the lottery For example, the case where the prize is a general winning opening that is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118)
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game information related to the progress of the game including information on the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of holding storages stored in the holding storage means, a lottery result for the holding storages and variable displays, setting values) A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processes of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is informed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed without giving a profit,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the symbols, when the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit is not yet given, etc., it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate/unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, if it is determined that the player is not profitable in the suitability/unsuitability of the game information despite the possibility of being profitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, at least the first entrance and the second entrance, the entry validating means for validating the entry of the game ball (for example, a main device for activating a condition device). CPU101) is further provided,
The profit giving means is
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, 16R big hit game state) having a profit ratio higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game by aiming at the second entrance where there is a possibility that a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Becomes

According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[18-2. Ninth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game set value or the like, and security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) And game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that performs a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 440).
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 440). ,
When the game information stored in the game information is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determining means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, it is determined that the variable display of the symbols is being performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the variable display of the symbols is displayed, so security is improved. It is possible to improve.

According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[18-3. Tenth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily impose a light design load. It is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while reducing the design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number within a predetermined width (for example, the main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program),
Random number extraction means for extracting random numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73),
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, jackpot random number determination table) that defines total random numbers (for example, a range of jackpot determination random numbers) and specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data) ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extraction means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, jackpot determination value data), a special game state is controlled. Possible special game state control means,
Equipped with
The table storage means,
Stores a lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the setting value set by the setting change control means,
The random number generating means,
The number of total random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data), the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, Since the jackpot probability) is changed, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range of random numbers for jackpot determination fixed. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the appropriateness determining means (step) for determining whether the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not before the variable display of the symbol is started (step A main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82,
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (2), when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is unsuitable, the game cannot proceed, so that the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element in accordance with the setting while reducing the design load.

[18-4. Eleventh and twelfth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, while the player is suspicious of being able to arbitrarily set the payout tendency. , The interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting. Especially.

In order to solve the fourth problem, an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-1. Eleventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning openings provided in the game area and including a starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56),
A privilege giving means (for example, a payout device 350) for giving a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game ball is received in any one of the plurality of winning openings;
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118),
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) for performing at least symbol variation effect based on the result of the lottery,
When a variation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific prize hole of the plurality of prize holes Setting suggesting means (for example, the sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the game ball is accepted
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening when the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since there is a possibility that the setting value information about the setting value set by the means will be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. Further, when the variation effect of the symbols is performed in the specific mode, the player may stop the firing of the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
A specific mode determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether or not to perform the variable effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect),
When it is determined by the specific aspect determination means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific aspect, a specific winning opening determination means that randomly determines any one of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening. (For example, the main CPU 101),
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings instead of a fixed winning opening, so that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that it is preferable to keep the specific winning openings randomly determined secret, without disclosing it. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storing unit is inappropriate, the setting change control unit sets the game ball even if the game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the variation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in the specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested, the game information storage The suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined to be unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination of the game information, the setting value set by the setting change control means It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-2. 12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118)
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 10). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition for accepting the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the overflow point has reached a predetermined point) Setting suggesting means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined condition for receiving the game ball into the starting opening is satisfied. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, the execution of the game is prompted so that the game ball is accepted in the starting opening. It should be noted that "to satisfy the predetermined condition regarding acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening" is, for example, held even though the game ball is accepted into the starting opening, because the holding upper limit has been reached. It is assumed that there is not, or when the game ball is accepted at the starting opening and it is not held because it was the upper limit for holding, and points are accumulated and the point reaches a predetermined point. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The game control means,
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.), a game progress disapproval means (for example, a game progress disapproval means for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means) , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening, in the determination of suitability or unsuitability regarding the game information made by the game ball being received in the starting opening. When it is determined that the game is not suitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the eleventh gaming machine and the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest while changing the states of the gaming elements according to the settings.

[18-5. 13th gaming machine]

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, payout management may not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform payout management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out a game medium based on a winning as a result of the game,
Based on that the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result (for example, a big hit), special game executing means (for example, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased). With the main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control of FIG.
A data totaling unit (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300) capable of totaling data relating to the game media paid out by the payout unit,
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying the data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
Equipped with
The data aggregation means,
All history totaling means for totaling the data based on the entire game history,
And a set value-based history totalizing means for totaling the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine, which is configured to be able to display data aggregated by the all history aggregate means and/or data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregate means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation unit and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation unit. It becomes possible to easily perform ball management.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payout.

[18-6. Fourteenth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed has been disclosed (for example, see JP 2011-010833 A).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect is replaced. Is unnecessary and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and an ON operation of the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game property is set according to the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any of a plurality of setting values different from each other (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6),
Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on the game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means,
Based on the result of the lottery, special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, big hit game control in FIG. 10) in which a privilege according to the set value set by the setting change control means is given,
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it becomes possible for one gaming machine to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to have a wide range of ways of using the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means,
When set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state unless the lottery is won within a predetermined period. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending
When the second setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, in a high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control hand (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a game under a continuous game property (for example, a probability variation loop specification),
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are common in that they are controlled to a high probability game state, but the first game control means. Depending on the game nature, the high-probability game state may end midway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and in the game nature by the second game control means, the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state. The difference is that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by allowing two game features that are similar in appearance but are substantially different from each other to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine to use the pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interests.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[18-7. 15th to 26th gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Seventh task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the player, they must be strictly managed by a person who has the authority, and the management is required to be convenient.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-1. Fifteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a limiting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-2. Sixteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed, and the one setting value. And a transmission unit (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting the setting value information of
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And second setting means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information as history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The display control means,
First screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) showing history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66),
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which history information including at least the setting value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 68).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed.

The transmitting means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means,
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second screen showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed only when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. This prevents the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-3. Seventeenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information,
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating a performance control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. An information screen display limiting unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the hole menu display prohibiting process of step S316) that limits the display of the screen is included.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined condition is met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be viewed easily and security can be ensured. Becomes

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-4. 18th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific screen (for example, game machine manager) A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen showing history information (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on the display unit; Has,
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means has a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager). Only the information screen that can be viewed is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and the power is turned on at least when the setting operation means is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless it is displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above-mentioned normal screen may not be construed as being viewable by an unspecified person, for example, when only the player who has registered as a member can view it. It can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person, because anyone can view it (ie, if there is an intention to view it). On the other hand, the information screen is not a screen that can be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person who has the authority such as a gaming machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301) It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201 which terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a sub CPU 201 which executes the process of step S315 when it is determined as YES in step S314.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-5. 19th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3066 or step S3160) that erases the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received,
The information erasing means,
It is configured such that the specific operation is accepted only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the history information is erased when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item “clear”) is accepted. It can be accepted only when the conditions are satisfied (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to erase the history of changing or confirming or browsing the set value for the purpose of fraud, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the erase cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized history from being intentionally deleted. Further, for the authorized person, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the setting value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The information erasing means,
When erasing the history information from the second storage unit, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit as history information can be erased.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted among the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by the authorized person, so that the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (for example, see FIG. 68). The information erasing unit may erase the associated history information (for example, for each No shown in FIG. 68) or may erase for each item among information of a plurality of items included in the history information ( For example, all of any one of the items of the date and time, the item of the operation type, and the item of the set value shown in FIG. 68 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-6. 20th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The setting operation information is
It is information capable of distinguishing the operation type, which is information indicating that the one setting value has been changed or information indicating that the one setting value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information,
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is characterized by being configured into.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the set value information all correspond to a specific type of setting operation information, and an information screen of a list showing as history information, Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the specific information screen in which the setting value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) is improved. You can

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen in which the set value information is included in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-7. 21st game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen,
Although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314), when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. An information screen display limiting unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314).
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is multiple until the display of the information screen is limited, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to store.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed more than once due to a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is limited, it is recorded as one setting history information. To be done. As a result, it is possible for a person who has changed the setting, confirmed the setting, browsed the information screen, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create many browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or confirming the set value, browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through a process in which the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). It is possible to do so, and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories, so that the effect is great.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-8. 22nd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information capable of distinguishing whether the one setting value is changed or the one setting value is confirmed (for example, A transmission means capable of transmitting a setting operation command (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55),
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as and history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, when a fraud accompanied by a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the setting that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator. Is hard to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Further, it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the setting value is checked and the information screen is browsed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display unit can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of history records from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud.

It should be noted that "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" By storing only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed” and “both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means", but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. From the viewpoint, the former is preferable.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-9. 23rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, a history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means for executing control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means) , A sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S306).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since the history information amount that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, it is stored in the second storage means. When the amount of history information increases, there is a possibility that history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to record it in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased to record new history information. It prevents the occurrence of situations such as being unable to do so.

Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" means The history information may be erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. At this time, if there is a possibility that the amount exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased before storing the history information. Further, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage means, if more history information is stored in the second storage means and the upper limit may be exceeded, the history information is stored in the second storage means. You may make it erase|eliminate at least one part of the historical information which exists.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. A screen limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314) ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-10. 24th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value or the one setting value is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting confirmation state that can be performed,
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting change state or/and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state or/and the setting A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends,
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, even if the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses (for example, step S310, step S311). Process can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that the display of the information screen is not limited as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The processing in steps S311 to S314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to browse at least the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as the history information, so that various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured, for example, that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends, as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the setting value information about the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display unit.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful for sales, and therefore can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, when the receiving unit receives the specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. It has a forced termination means for terminating the display of (for example, the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S315 when YES is determined in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when the receiving device receives the specific information related to the progress of the game. The game is not interrupted because the game ends. Therefore, it is possible to secure the convenience of the operation by the authorized person while suppressing the state in which the game can be executed, and to prevent the fraud by the unauthorized third party.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, it is possible to grasp that the game can be executed without disturbing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, While all the LEDs 25 are lit in white while the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed, all the LEDs 25 are lit in red when the settings have been changed or the settings have been confirmed).

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, a state in which the game can be executed without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to understand that, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed even though the game can be executed and the game cannot be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-11. 25th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen for a hole menu item) on the display unit in which various kinds of information can be displayed in the setting state. Then
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall screen) where the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. A plurality of information screens including at least a menu screen),
The display control means,
A screen updating unit that controls to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display unit (for example, step A sub CPU 201) that executes the processes of S3051, S3057, S3073, etc.;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. If none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, a specific display control unit that controls the display of the history screen to be ended (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S3072).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the history screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information can be browsed, various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value was changed or the setting value was confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, the history screen is browsed to check whether the above-mentioned fraud has been performed. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, non-history screens that do not show history information are continuously displayed even if a predetermined operation is not performed, but history screens that show history information are terminated unless a predetermined operation is performed for a predetermined time or longer. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and being viewed by an unauthorized third party. It should be noted that the above-mentioned “continuously displaying” also includes ending the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the predetermined operation is displayed or not even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When the history screen is displayed on the display unit in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful for sales, and therefore can be used for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-12. The 26th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and information about the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100),
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the first storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed is set. Setting change state control means for controlling (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24),
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the changed setting value information when the setting value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. A transmission unit (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting change information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting change information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
At least an information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means in the setting change state,
Erase execution information informing means capable of informing that the erase process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the voice control circuit 205 for controlling the voice output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And have,
The erasure execution information notification means,
When the erase process (for example, backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, it is possible to know that the erase process is executed (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). A first notification means (sub CPU 201) for displaying a character display such as "RAM cleared", a voice output such as "RAM cleared", and LED 25 (all red lighting).
It is more difficult to understand that the erasing process is executed so that the visibility of the information screen is not hindered when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state. Second notification means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 and outputting a voice such as “setting changed. RAM is initialized” and LED 25 all red lighting) ( And a sub CPU 201).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least the information screen in which the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information are shown as history information can be browsed, so that various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, when there is a possibility that unauthorized persons have changed the setting values for the purpose of fraud, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to trace whether or not the above fraud has been performed. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled to the setting change state and is controlled to the setting change state. It may be executed by When the erasing process is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the first mode that allows the user to know that the erasing process has been executed is notified. For example, the erasing process is executed by an unauthorized third party. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is harder to understand than the first mode. Further, when the erasing process is executed due to the control to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second mode, the visual confirmation of the information screen is not disturbed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, it is possible to ensure convenience.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a voice output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined voice,
The second control means is
It further has a voice control means (for example, a voice control circuit 206) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means,
The first notification means,
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the voice output unit,
The second notification means,
The fact that the erasing process is executed is configured to be informed by using only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, both the display means and the voice output means are used for notification. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of the control being changed to the setting change state, only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means is used to notify, so that the visibility of the information screen is obstructed. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the deletion, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party while improving the convenience.

According to the fifteenth to twenty-sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[18-8. 27th Gaming Machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Eighth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as that the control is changed or the control board is illegally replaced.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, a twenty-seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When at least the setting operation means is operated, a setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting value to change or confirm the one setting value. )When,
Storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information for at least the one setting value,
Transmission means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means and capable of transmitting at least the setting value information for the one setting value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55). And have,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, the propriety of the one setting value is determined by using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information. Setting determination means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that determines whether or not the previously set value and the currently set value match),
An abnormal condition process executing unit that executes an abnormal condition process when the one of the set values is determined to be inappropriate by the setting judgment unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the abnormal set value process). Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of the one set value, the one set value is normal when, for example, the first control means is illegally replaced. Whether the setting value is normal or abnormal, the first control unit determines that the one set value is normal. Therefore, by allowing the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, for example, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, It becomes possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage unit capable of storing history information. Means (eg, work RAM 203),
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information on a predetermined display unit based on a predetermined operation. Is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, when transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting unit capable of transmitting various information to the second control unit may transmit these information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the twenty-seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[18-9. 28th gaming machine]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having one device having a plurality of functions has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-170505, a player is pushed down and, in order to give an impact to the player, pops out to a position that largely protrudes from the main body of the game machine, regardless of the operation of the player. A push button is disclosed.

(9th subject)

By the way, when confirming the operation of the accessory, various sensors, etc., the maintainability of the push button described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-170505, which has a plurality of functions in one device, deteriorates. There is a concern.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. is there.

In order to solve the ninth problem, a twenty-eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
An accessory (eg, an accessory 1000) that can be operated based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means (for example, a production button 62) having one or more functions,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
At least a maintenance item determination unit that determines a maintenance item to be executed out of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex unit, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, the process of step S3084). Executable sub CPU 201),
In deciding the maintenance item, a selection screen that allows selection of any of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex unit, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, in FIG. 74). A maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least a maintenance screen (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083),
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
With respect to the compounding means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, the selection screen is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, an item of "production button 1" in FIG. (Displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), with regard to the compound means having one function, but having a plurality of functions, it is possible to select an item for each function on the selection screen in which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The composite means is
At least, it has an operation function and a production function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determination means,
When the item of the operation function (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, it is determined as the maintenance item for the operation function, and the item of the effect function (for example, effect button 2) is selected. In this case, the maintenance item related to the performance function can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the twenty-eighth gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. [18-10. 29th game machine]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game machine including a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery is known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine provided with a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory each having a different drive source as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See JP-A-2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessory having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessory objects having different drive sources will interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to be able to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessory members having different drive sources are provided. Providing a gaming machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, a twenty-ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
A first accessory and a second accessory that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Maintenance item determining means for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, step A sub CPU 201) capable of executing the process of S3084,
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen capable of selecting any of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, , Maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 74 (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083),
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
Not only the operation confirmation of each of the first accessory and the second accessory, but also the operation confirmation when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated are selected on the selection screen. It is configured so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of “effect product 1+2” in FIG. 74 is displayed).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The operation confirmation when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Production accessory 1→2" in FIG. 74). Items are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since it is possible to select the operation confirmation when the is operated on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A third accessory that is operable based on the result of the lottery and has a driving source different from that of both the first accessory and the second accessory;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that they will interfere with each other when the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory operate, the first or/and the second accessory The selection screen can be displayed in a mode in which neither of the above and the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "effect product 1+3" in FIG. 74 cannot be selected. Become)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory both interfere with each other, the first screen or Since it is not possible to select the mode in which both the first accessory and/or the second accessory and the third accessory are operated, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

According to the twenty-ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[18-11. 30th and 31st game machines]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(11th subject)

By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, the occurrence of power failure.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirty gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-1. 30th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means controls the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S24,
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is performed in the setting change state. Possible or power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, an electric power cutoff occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, if the power is turned on after that, the setting control is performed or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the setting changed state when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is properly maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of unintended power interruption or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value setting means (for example, the set value setting means for setting the one set value to the changed set value). , Further having a main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S2480,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-2. 31st game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means having means (for example, the main control circuit 100),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
According to the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means, the state after the power is turned on is a setting change state and the one setting in which the one set value can be changed. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.) capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state capable of confirming a value. Then
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, the processing of steps S22 to S28 is executed),
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and then the power is turned on, control is possible in the setting change state or the power supply is stopped regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. Power can be restored in the setting change state at that time (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. In other words, the setting confirmation state is a state in which only one set value can be confirmed but the one set value cannot be changed. Is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed, and therefore, for example, if an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is subsequently turned on, one of a plurality of states is set depending on the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. The power is restored so that the convenience of the operator is ensured and the situation in which the set value is not set due to unintentional power interruption or the like is prevented from occurring.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means,
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting change state is controlled.
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, a set value confirming means for confirming the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to the thirtieth and thirty-first gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[18-12. 32nd game machine]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, the generation of noise or illegal acts.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, a thirty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
Setting change state control means for controlling to a setting change state capable of changing the one set value when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24),
An adequacy determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate or not,
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the abnormality control unit (the process of Steps S722 to S727) that controls to an abnormal state (for example, the state in which the processes of Steps S722 to S727 are executed) Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. On the other hand, it is controlled so that it cannot be performed (for example, the processing of step S1790 is not executed when it is determined to be NO in step S1770), while the game is controlled to be executed when it is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on (for example, step It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the processing of step S17) which executes the processing of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or cheating, and the supply of power is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, it is highly possible that the one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal.Therefore, only when the one set value is controlled to the setting change state so that it is changed. The game is allowed to be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

According to the 32nd gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[18-13. 33rd game machine]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a thirty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on (for example, the setting key is turned on), the state control means controls the setting value so that the one set value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.),
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, a game executing means that can be controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 is not yet executed). Although not possible, when the setting process of step S20 ends, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables execution of the game, and the main CPU 101),
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least transmission means (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, operation type information). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be executed in the setting state in which the game cannot be executed (for example, setting operation effect executing unit). , A sub CPU 201) that executes a control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red through the LED control circuit 206,
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed until a predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state is finished and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the fraud when the setting value is changed or the setting value is checked fraudulently, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect execution means,
A mode in which after the setting state is finished and a game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized that the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable with.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually recognize that a game can be executed, It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the setting value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The state control means,
In addition to having setting change state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value,
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display,
The display control means,
When the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received by the receiving unit, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not limited until a predetermined time elapses. It is characterized in that the information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S310 to S314 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the setting state, and the display of the information screen is limited when the setting state ends. Therefore, in the set state, by browsing the information screen showing the history information, it becomes possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall. Further, when the setting operation state information display is limited when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if a fraud is performed, it is possible to easily find such a fraud, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the thirty-third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in this specification are within a range not departing from the spirit of the invention, a pachinko machine, a game machine, and a slot. It can be applied to machines and all other game machines.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Function flow>
First, the function of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 97, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation and the payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. When it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol game, or when it becomes a "hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility of winning the game ball relatively increases, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes are one condition for the special symbol starting prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game. It also includes a normal symbol starting prize.

The "variable display" in the present specification is a concept that is variably displayed. For example, a "variable display" that is actually changed and displayed, and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. And so on. Further, in the "variable display", for example, "deriving display" in which special symbols (identification information) are displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. That is, in this specification, the operation from the start of the “variable display” to the “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”. Further, in the present specification, "identification information" means a "design" used in a pachinko game such as a special design, an ordinary design, a decorative design, an identification design, an identification design or a decoration used in a pachi-slot or slot game. When the player plays a game, such as a pattern, it is meant to include a pattern used when displaying or suggesting the result of the game, and various patterns in the embodiments and various modifications described below are also included. May be included.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

(1) Special symbol game When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (random numbers for jackpot determination and symbol determination) are extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. , The extracted random number values are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 97).

Further, as shown in FIG. 97, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, referring to whether or not a random number value is stored by the special symbol start winning, one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination as to whether or not to be a “jack” is made. Then, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described jackpot determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Then, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, The effect pattern to be executed is determined along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" will occur. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" has been reached, a big hit game control process for playing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various prizes described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed. As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a game state in which the probability of being judged as a "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation game state"), or a special symbol start winning is easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter, referred to as a "time saving game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, again, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data acquired at the time of winning the start (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for symbol determination, etc.) ) Is suspended. That is, when the game ball starts winning during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is suspended, and after the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed ends. The variable display of the special symbols that have been held is started. In the following, the variable display of the special symbols that are being held is also referred to as “holding ball”.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. It is possible to obtain a reserved ball of. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 97, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines the winning or losing of the reserved ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above, and further, the determination result It also has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on this, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) Normal symbol game When there is a normal symbol start winning in the ordinary symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (ordinary in the ordinary symbol game shown in FIG. 97. Refer to the flow of the symbol start winning process).

Further, as shown in FIG. 97, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and a hit determination as to whether or not to make a "hit" is performed. After that, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the result of the determined hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that a "hit" is achieved, a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed. In the winning game control processing, the possibility of the various prizes described above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "hit" is not achieved, the hit game control process is not executed. Then, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is performed depending on conditions such as whether or not a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the "hit" occurs in the normal symbol game. The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, a soft random number method that generates a random number value by executing a program is used as an extraction method of various random number values. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a random number generator in which random numbers are updated in a predetermined cycle, a random number value from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting the above may be adopted as the above-mentioned various random number value extraction method. In the case of using the hard random number method, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

<Structure of pachinko machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 98 is a perspective view showing the outer appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 includes a main body 7002, a base door 7003 attached to the main body 7002 to be openable and closable, and a glass door attached to the base door 7003 to be openable and closable. 7004 and.

[Body]
The main body 7002 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 7002a (see FIG. 99). The main body 7002 is made of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 7003 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the main body 7002. The base door 7003 is arranged in front of the main body 7002 (on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001), and by rotating the base door 7003 about one side end of the main body 7002, The opening 7002a is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 99, the base door 7003 is provided with a rectangular opening 7003a. The opening 7003a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 7003 to an upper region, and has a size that occupies most of the region.

In addition, a speaker 7011, a game board 7012, a display device 7013, a dish unit 7014, a launching device 7015, a payout device 7016, and a board unit 7017 are attached to the base door 7003.

The speaker 7011 is arranged above the base door 7003 (near the upper end). The game board 7012 is arranged in front of the base door 7003 (on the front side of the pachinko game machine 7001) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 7003a of the base door 7003.

The game board 7012 is composed of a light-transmissive plate-shaped resin member. As the light-transmissive resin, for example, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like can be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 7012 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001), a game area 7012a in which a game ball shot from the launching device 7015 rolls is formed. This game area 7012a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 7041 (specifically, an outer rail 7041a shown in FIG. 100 described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular. Further, in the game area 7012a, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 100 described later) are struck. The configuration of the game board 7012 (game area 7012a) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

The display device 7013 is attached to the back side of the game board 7012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001). The display device 7013 has a display area 7013a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 7013a is set so as to occupy the whole or a part of the surface of the game board 7012. In the display area 7013a of the display device 7013, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and an image for decoration (decorative pattern) are displayed based on the result of the lottery process of the special symbol described later. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 7013a of the display device 7013 via the game board 7012.

Note that a liquid crystal display device is used as the display device 7013 in this embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the display device 7013, for example, a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

Further, a spacer 7019 is provided on the back side of the game board 7012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001). This spacer 7019 is provided between the back surface of the game board 7012 (the surface of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001) and the front surface of the display device 7013 (the surface of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 7001), and the game of the game board 7012 A space is formed which serves as a flow path for the game balls rolling in the area 7012a. The spacer 7019 is formed of a light-transmitting material. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 7019 may be partly formed of a material having a light-transmitting property or may be formed of a material having no light-transmitting property, for example. ..

The dish unit 7014 is arranged below the game board 7012. The plate unit 7014 has an upper plate 7021 and a lower plate 7022 arranged below the upper plate 7021. As shown in FIG. 98, a payout opening 7021a and a payout opening 7022a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls) are formed in the upper plate 7021 and the lower plate 7022, respectively. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 7021a and the payout opening 7022a, and are stored in the upper plate 7021 and the lower plate 7022, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 7021 are shot by the launching device 7015 to the game area 7012a.

Further, the dish unit 7014 is provided with an effect button 7023. The effect button 7023 is attached on the upper plate 7021. A dial operation unit (jog dial) 7024 is rotatably attached to the effect button 7023 with respect to the effect button 7023. The pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed using the effect button 7023 and/or the dial operation unit 7024, and when performing a predetermined effect, in the display area 7013a of the display device 7013, An image prompting the user to operate the effect button 7023 and/or the dial operation unit 7024 is displayed.

The firing device 7015 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 7003. The launching device 7015 includes a launching handle 7025 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 7026 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 7014. The firing handle 7025 is disposed on the front surface side of the panel body 7026 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 7026.

Although not shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a solenoid actuator (driving device) that controls the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 7026. Although not shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral portion of the firing handle 7025, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 7025. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 7025, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of this embodiment, when the player's hand touches the touch sensor of the firing handle 7025, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player grips the firing handle 7025, and the solenoid actuator can fire the game ball. When the player grips the firing handle 7025 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the firing volume changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 7025. , The electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 7021 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rails 7041 (see FIG. 100 described later) and discharged to the game area 7012a of the game board 7012.

Although not shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a firing stop button is provided on a side portion of the firing handle 7025. The firing stop button is a button provided to stop the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the firing stop button, the firing of the game ball is stopped even when the firing handle 7025 is held and rotated.

The dispensing device 7016 and the board unit 7017 are arranged on the back side of the base door 7003. The payout device 7016 is supplied with game balls from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 7016 pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 7021 or the lower plate 7022 from the game balls supplied from the storage unit based on the establishment of the payout condition. The board unit 7017 has various control boards. A main control circuit 7070, a sub control circuit 7200, and the like, which will be described later, are provided on various control boards (see FIG. 101, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 7004 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 7004 is arranged on the front side of the game board 7012 and has a size that covers the game board 7012. On the front surface of the glass door 7004, a speaker cover 7029 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 7011.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 7004, an opening 7004a having a size that exposes at least the game area 7012a is formed in an area facing the game area 7012a of the game board 7012. A protective glass 7028 having a light transmitting property is attached to the opening 7004a of the glass door 7004, whereby the opening 7004a is closed. Therefore, when the glass door 7004 is closed with respect to the base door 7003, the protective glass 7028 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 7012a of the game board 7012.

[Game board]
Next, the structure of the game board 7012 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 7012.

On the front surface of the game board 7012, as shown in FIG. 100, a guide rail 7041, a ball passage detector 7043, a first starting port 7044, a second starting port 7045 (starting region), and an ordinary electric accessory 7046. And are provided. In addition, on the front surface of the game board 7012, general winning openings 7051, 52, a first big winning opening 7053 (variable winning device), a second big winning opening 7054 (variable winning device), an outlet 7055, a plurality of Gaming nail 7056 and. Furthermore, on the front surface of the game board 7012, in the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013 arranged substantially in the center thereof, a special symbol display device 7061, an ordinary symbol display device 7062, an ordinary symbol hold display device 7063, A first special symbol hold display device 7064 and a second special symbol hold display device 7065 are provided.

Although not shown in FIG. 100, a production 7-segment counter is also provided on the front surface of the game board 7012. The production 7-segment counter is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. Further, in the present embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, etc. are provided. Good.

[Various components in the game area]
The guide rail 7041 is composed of an outer rail 7041a that extends in an arc shape that defines the game area 7012a, and an inner rail 7041b that extends inside the outer rail 7041a and that extends in an arc shape. To be done. The game area 7012a is formed inside the outer rail 7041a. The outer rail 7041a and the inner rail 7041b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end of the game area 7012a as viewed from the player side, whereby the launch device is provided between the outer rail 7041a and the inner rail 7041b. A guide path 7041c that guides the game ball shot by 7015 to the upper part of the game area 7012a is formed.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 7041b located on the upper left side of the game area 7012a, a ball discharge port 7041d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 7041b and a part of the outer rail 7041a facing the inner rail 7041b. A ball return prevention piece 7042 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 7041b so as to close the ball discharge port 7041d. The ball return prevention piece 7042 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 7041d to the game area 7012a from passing through the ball discharge port 7041d and entering the guide path 7041c again.

The game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 7041d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 7012a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 7012a such as the plurality of game nails 7056, the first starting opening 7044, the second starting opening 7045, and the like, and while changing the traveling direction of the gaming area 7012a. Run down from the top to the bottom.

A display area 7013a of the display device 7013 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 7012a. An obstacle 7013b is provided at the upper end of the display area 7013a. By providing the obstacle 7013b, the game ball does not pass over the area in the game area 7012a that overlaps the display area 7013a.

The ball passage detector 7043 is arranged near the right end of the display area 7013a when viewed from the player side. The sphere passage detector 7043 is provided with a passage sphere sensor 7043a (see FIG. 101 described later) for detecting a game sphere passing through the sphere passage detector 7043. In addition, by passing the game ball through the ball passage detector 7043, a lottery for "winning" or not is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first start port 7044 is arranged below the display area 7013a, and the second start port 7045 is arranged below the first start port 7044. The first starting port 7044 and the second starting port 7045 are composed of members that can receive game balls. Hereinafter, entering or passing of the game ball into the first starting opening 7044 or the second starting opening 7045 is referred to as “winning”. Then, when the game ball wins the first start port 7044 or the second start port 7045, the first predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out. In addition, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 7044, a lottery is made as to whether it is a “big hit” or a “small hit”, and a variation of the special symbol based on the result of the lottery. The display starts. Furthermore, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 7045, a lottery of whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed, and the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 7044 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 7044a (see FIG. 101 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the first starting port 7044. Further, the second starting port 7045 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 7045a (see FIG. 101 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the second starting port 7045. The game balls that have won the first start port 7044 and the second start port 7045 pass through a recovery port (not shown) provided in the game board 7012 and are conveyed to a game ball recovery unit (not shown). ..

The ordinary electric accessory 7046 is provided in the second starting port 7045. The ordinary electric accessory 7046 includes a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 7045, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 7046a (see FIG. 101 described later) for driving the pair of blade members. Have. This ordinary electric accessory 7046 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 7046a to open the pair of blade members to make it easier to enter a game ball into the second starting opening 7045, and to close the pair of blade members. The second start port 7045 is caused to generate one of the closed states in which the game balls cannot be won. In the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 7046 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not made impossible to win the prize, but is made difficult to win the game ball. Good.

The general winning opening 7051 is arranged near the lower left part of the game area 7012a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 7052 is arranged below the ball passage detector 7043, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 7012a as viewed from the player side. The general winning opening 7051 and the general winning opening 7052 are configured by members that can receive game balls. In the following, the entry or passage of the game ball into the general winning opening 7051 or the general winning opening 7052 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball is won at the general winning opening 7051 or the general winning opening 7052, a second predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of the game balls are paid out.

The general winning opening 7051 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 7051a (see FIG. 101 described later) for detecting a game ball winning the general winning opening 7051. Further, the general winning opening 7052 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 7052a (see FIG. 101 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 7052.

The first special winning opening 7053 and the second special winning opening 7054 are arranged below the ball passage detector 7043 and between the first starting opening 7044 and the general winning opening 7052. The first big winning opening 7053 and the second big winning opening 7054 are arranged vertically along the flow path of the game ball, and the first big winning opening 7053 is arranged above the second big winning opening 7054. It Both the first special winning opening 7053 and the second special winning opening 7054 are so-called attacker-type opening/closing devices, and include shutters 7053a and 7054a that can be opened and closed, and a solenoid actuator that drives the shutter (first in FIG. 101 described later). It has a special winning opening solenoid 7053b and a second special winning opening solenoid 7054b).

Each of the first big winning opening 7053 and the second big winning opening 7054 accepts a game ball when the corresponding shutter is opened (opened state), and plays when the shutter is closed (closed state). Do not accept the ball. In the following, the entry or passage of the game ball into the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054 is also referred to as “winning”. When a game ball wins the first big winning opening 7053, a third predetermined number of balls (10 balls in the present embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in the second big winning opening 7054, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 balls in this embodiment) are paid out.

In addition, the first big winning opening 7053 is provided with a count sensor 7053c (see FIG. 101 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first big winning opening 7053. Further, the second special winning opening 7054 is provided with a count sensor 7054c (see FIG. 101, which will be described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second special winning opening 7054.

The outlet 7055 is provided at the bottom of the game area 7012a. This out port 7055 does not win any of the first starting port 7044, the second starting port 7045, the general winning port 7051, the general winning port 7052, the first big winning port 7053, and the second big winning port 7054. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of various components in the game area 7012a of the present embodiment is arranged as shown in FIG. 100, when the player hits a game ball into the area on the right side of the game area 7012a (when right hitting), The game ball is guided to the second starting port 7045 by the game nail 7056 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 7044. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a player who wins in the second starting opening 7045 is more likely to receive a “big hit” lottery, which is advantageous to the player, than when winning in the first starting opening 7044. Therefore, in the later-described "time saving game state" in which winning in the second starting opening 7045 is relatively easy, there is a possibility of winning in the first starting opening 7044 by performing a right hit (a disadvantage for the player). The possibility of becoming a game state) can be reduced.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 100, the special symbol display device 7061 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013.

The special symbol display device 7061 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the special symbol display device 7061 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol with a symbol such as a number or a symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 7061 may be composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on/off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 7061 performs variable display of the special symbol (identification information) in response to the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 7044 or the second starting port 7045 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 7061 performs variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs stop display of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 7044, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 7061 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 7045, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 7061 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display device 7061, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit game state which is a state. That is, in the special symbol display device 7061, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which it shifts to the big-hit gaming state.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 7044 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 7061, the first big winning port 7053 is opened. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 7045 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 7061, the second special winning port 7054 is opened.

The open state of each special winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a certain period (for example, 30 sec) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each special winning opening satisfies any one of these conditions, the big winning opening that has been open is closed.

Hereinafter, a game in which the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054 is in a state (open state) where it is easy to receive a game ball is called a round game. During the round game, the special winning opening is closed. The round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

In the special symbol display device 7061, when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode (a mode of “miss”), the game state does not shift unless a fall lottery is won. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol display device 7061 variably displays the special symbol, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 7044 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable. The display (holding ball) is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable display of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (number of holding balls)”) is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 7045 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is suspended. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbols to be held (holding number) is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable display of special symbols is 8 at maximum.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is executed preferentially to the variable display of the other special symbol. .. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 100, the normal symbol display device 7062 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013. And in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 7062 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device 7061 when viewed from the player side.

The ordinary symbol display device 7062 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the normal symbol display device 7062 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the normal symbol display device 7062, a display pattern configured by turning on/off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 7062 turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 7043, and performs a variable display of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 7062 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display device 7062, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a "hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 7046 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (“miss” mode), the normal electric accessory 7046 maintains the closed state. That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol display device 7062 variably displays the ordinary symbol, and then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric auditors product 7046 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes the ball passage detector 7043 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol which is currently displayed in a variable state is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the held normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the normal symbols to be held (that is, the "holding number") is defined to be a maximum of four times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 100, the normal symbol hold display device 7063 is arranged in the approximate center of the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013. And in this embodiment, the normal symbol suspension display device 7063 is arranged below the special symbol display device 7061 and the normal symbol display device 7062.

The normal symbol hold display device 7063 is a device for displaying the number of held variable displays of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the normal symbol hold display device 7063 is composed of four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, in the normal symbol hold display device 7063, by turning on/off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of held variable display of normal symbols is displayed.

Specifically, if the number of variable display of normal symbols is one, when viewed from the player side, the normal symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side (the first normal symbol hold display LED from the left) Lights up, and other ordinary symbol hold display LEDs go out. When the number of variable displays of the normal symbols is two, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned on from the left, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. If the number of variable display hold of the normal symbols is three, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. Then, when the number of variable display holding of the normal symbols is 4, all the normal symbol holding display LEDs are turned on.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 100, the first special symbol hold display device 7064 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 7061 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013.

The first special symbol hold display device 7064 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the first special symbol that is being held (holding ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the first special symbol reservation display device 7064 is composed of a first special symbol reservation number display unit 7064a and a first special symbol reservation information display unit 7064b. Then, the first special symbol reservation information display unit 7064b is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 7061, and the first special symbol reservation number display unit 7064a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 7064b. ..

The first special symbol reservation number display unit 7064a has four LEDs arranged in the left-right direction (first special symbol reservation display LED). The display mode of the first special symbol reservation number display unit 7064a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display device 7063. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the hold number, as viewed from the player side. Lights up.

Further, the first special symbol reservation information display unit 7064b displays information about the reserved balls of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol reservation information display unit 7064b displays the information (identification information) about the reserved balls of the first special symbol to be variably displayed next in the form of numbers or symbols. The configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 7064 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 100, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold of the first special symbol. ..

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 100, the second special symbol hold display device 7065 is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 7062 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 7013a of the display device 7013.

The second special symbol hold display device 7065 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the second special symbol that is being held (holding ball of the second special symbol). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the second special symbol reservation display device 7065 includes a second special symbol reservation number display unit 7065a and a second special symbol reservation information display unit 7065b. Then, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 7065b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 7062, and the second special symbol reservation number display unit 7065a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol reservation information display unit 7065b. ..

The second special symbol reservation number display unit 7065a has four LEDs arranged in the left-right direction (second special symbol reservation display LED). The display mode of the second special symbol reservation number display unit 7065a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol reservation display device 7063. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, as viewed from the player side, the second special symbol suspension display LED from the second special symbol suspension display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of suspension Lights up.

In addition, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 7065b displays information about the reservation ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol reservation information display unit 7065b displays the information (identification information) about the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be variably displayed next in the form of numbers or symbols. The configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 7065 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 100, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold of the second special symbol. ..

[Display device]
The display device 7013 is composed of the liquid crystal display device as described above, and performs various image display effects in the display area 7013a thereof.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image associated with the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 7061 is displayed in the display area 7013a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 7061, except for a specific case, for example, a plurality of production identification symbols (decoration) including numbers 1 to 8 and various characters (Pattern) is variably displayed in the display area 7013a. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 7061, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as a jackpot symbol described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 7013a.

Then, in the case where the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 7061 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the player can know that it is "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 7013a. As an effect for letting the player know that it is a “big hit”, for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative pattern is arranged in a predetermined direction). ), and then an effect of displaying an image for notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 7013a of the display device 7013, effect images associated with the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 7064 and the second special symbol hold display device 7065 are displayed. For example, in the display area 7013a, holding information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the holding number) for notifying the holding number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, the prefetching effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the notice of notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 7013a.

In the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 7062 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 7013a of the display device 7013. A function may be further provided.

<Circuit configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the configuration of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 7001.

As shown in FIG. 101, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 has a main control circuit 7070 that mainly controls game operations, a payout/launch control circuit 7123, and a sub-control circuit that controls effect operations according to the progress of the game. 7200 and.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 7070 includes a one-chip microcomputer 7077, a clock generation circuit 7074, and an initial reset circuit 7075. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed at the time of winning the first start port 7044 or the second start port 7045, but this process is controlled by the main control circuit 7070. That is, the main control circuit 7070 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing lottery processing as to whether or not to shift the game state to a state advantageous to the player.

The one-chip microcomputer 7077 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 7071, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 7072, a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 7073, and a serial communication unit 7076. The main CPU 7071, the main ROM 7072, the main RAM 7073, and the serial communication unit 7076 may be separately provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the main ROM 7072 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 7070 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ROM board on which a main ROM 7072 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 7070. Further, in this embodiment, the various circuits in the main control circuit 7070 may be integrally formed or may be separately formed. Further, the main ROM 7072 does not have to be installed in the gaming machine, but may be configured to be communicable with the gaming machine.

A clock generation circuit 7074 and an initial reset circuit 7075 are connected to the one-chip microcomputer 7077. The main ROM 7072 stores various programs (see FIGS. 124 to 131 described below) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 by the main CPU 7071, various data tables (see FIGS. 112 to 122 described below), and the like. ing.

The main CPU 7071 executes various kinds of processing according to the programs stored in the main ROM 7072. The main RAM 7073 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 7071 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values required by the main CPU 7071 for various processes. Although the main RAM 7073 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 7071 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium. ..

The clock generation circuit 7074 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 7075 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication unit 7076 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 7200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control circuit 7070 is connected to various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 7070.

Specifically, the main control circuit 7070 is connected to a special symbol display device 7061, a normal symbol display device 7062, a normal symbol hold display device 7063, a first special symbol hold display device 7064 and a second special symbol hold display device 7065. To be done. Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 7070. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the special symbol display device 7061, the special symbol display device 7061 controls the operation of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. To do.

Further, to the main control circuit 7070, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 7046a, a first special winning opening solenoid 7053b and a second special winning opening solenoid 7054b are connected. Then, the main control circuit 7070 drives and controls the normal electric accessory solenoid 7046a to open or close the pair of blade members of the normal electric accessory 7046. In addition, the main control circuit 7070 drives and controls the first big winning opening solenoid 7053b and the second big winning opening solenoid 7054b, respectively, to open or close the first big winning opening 7053 and the second big winning opening 7054. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control circuit 7070 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals from the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 7070 has a count sensor 7053c, 7054c, a general winning ball sensor 7051a, 7052a, a passing ball sensor 7043a, a first starting mouth winning ball sensor 7044a, a second starting mouth winning ball sensor 7045a, a backup. A clear switch 7121 or the like is connected.

The count sensor 7053c counts the game balls that have won the first big winning opening 7053, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 7070. The count sensor 7054c counts the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 7054, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 7070. The general winning ball sensor 7051a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 7070 when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 7051, and the general winning ball sensor 7052a has won the gaming ball in the general winning opening 7052. In that case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 7070.

Further, the passing ball sensor 7043a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 7070 when the game ball passes the ball passing detector 7043. The first starting opening winning ball sensor 7044a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 7070 when a gaming ball wins the first starting opening 7044. The second starting opening winning ball sensor 7045a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 7070 when a game ball wins the second starting opening 7045. In addition, the backup clear switch 7121 sends a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 7070 and the payout/launch control circuit 7123 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation by the manager of the game store at the time of power failure. Output.

Further, a payout/launch control circuit 7123 is connected to the main control circuit 7070. Details of the payout/launch control circuit 7123 and various peripheral devices connected thereto will be described later.

[Payment/launch control circuit and its peripherals]
The payout/launch control circuit 7123 is connected to the prize ball case unit 7170, the payout state notification display device 7178, the lower plate full tank switch 7179, the launch device 7015, the external terminal board 7140, and the card unit 7150. Further, the external terminal board 7140 is connected to the data display 7141, and the card unit 7150 is connected to the lending operation unit 7151.

The payout/launch control circuit 7123 inputs and outputs signals and the like to these peripheral devices based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 7070, and controls the operation of each peripheral device. For example, the payout/launch control circuit 7123 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 and a loan ball control signal described later transmitted from the card unit 7150, and sends a predetermined ball case unit 7170 a predetermined amount. Send a signal. Thereby, the prize ball case unit 7170 pays out the game balls.

The prize ball case unit 7170 is a device for paying out game balls, and includes a first 15-ball collateral switch 7172a, a second 15-ball collateral switch 7172b, a first counting switch 7181a, a second counting switch 7181b, and a payout. It has a motor 7174. These components included in the prize ball case unit 7170 are connected to the payout/launch control circuit 7123.

Although not shown here, two ball supply passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 7170. Then, the first 15-ball collateral switch 7172a detects the game ball replenished in one ball supply passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout/launch control circuit 7123. In addition, the second 15-ball security switch 7172b detects the game ball replenished in the other ball supply passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout/launch control circuit 7123.

Further, although not shown here, two payout passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 7170. Then, the first counting switch 7181a detects a game ball paid out to one payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout/launch control circuit 7123. In addition, the second counting switch 7181b detects the game ball paid out to the other payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout/firing control circuit 7123.

The payout motor 7174 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven according to a control signal input from the payout/firing control circuit 7123. The payout motor 7174 rotationally drives a sprocket (rotating member) (not shown) provided in the prize ball case unit 7170. Then, by the rotation operation of this sprocket, the game balls accumulated in each ball supply path are moved one by one to the corresponding payout path.

The payout state notification display device 7178 is a device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs with respect to the payout of gaming balls, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The payout state notification display device 7178 is attached to a position where it can be viewed only by the manager of the game store (game hall), and is attached to a predetermined position on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 7001, for example.

The lower plate full tank switch 7179 detects when the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 7022 are full, and outputs the detection result to the payout/launch control circuit 7123.

Note that, when a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 7179, the payout/launch control circuit 7123 displays the state of the lower plate full tank by displaying the payout state notification display device 7178. In addition to the notification, the main control circuit 7070 is output with a signal indicating that the lower plate is full. After that, when the production control command is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200, the sub control circuit 7200 uses, for example, the speaker 7011, the lamp group 7018, the display device 7013, and the like, and the lower plate 7022 is in a full state. Notify that there is.

The launching device 7015 has a launching handle 7025 which can be rotated by the player when launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 7021 to the game area 7012a. The payout/launch control circuit 7123 controls the solenoid actuator (not shown) of the launching device 7015 according to the turning angle when the player holds the firing handle 7025 and turns it clockwise. Supply power. Thereby, the launching device 7015 launches the game ball. A motor may be used as the driving means of the firing device 7015 instead of the solenoid actuator.

The external terminal board 7140 is used for transmitting data to a hall computer that manages all the pachinko gaming machines in the gaming shop. The data display 7141 is installed as, for example, an accessory facility of a game store on the top of the pachinko gaming machine 7001, and has a function of calling a hall staff member and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When rented out, the operation unit 7151 outputs a signal requesting the renting out of game balls to the card unit 7150 when operated by the player. The card unit 7150 determines the number of game balls (rental ball number) to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 7170, based on a signal requesting the lending of game balls output from the lending operation unit 7151. Then, when the card unit 7150 receives a signal requesting the lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 7151, it sends a lending ball control signal including information on the determined number of lending balls to the payout/launch control circuit 7123.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 7200 is connected to the serial communication unit 7076 of the main control circuit 7070. Then, the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210 described later) controls the sub control circuit 7200 as a whole in accordance with various commands (information regarding the progress of the game) transmitted from the main control circuit 7070. Then, the sub control circuit 7200 controls the audio reproduction operation by the speaker 7011, the image display operation by the display device 7013, and the lamp group 7018 including the lamps based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 7070. Control of lighting/extinguishing operation, control of effect operation by accessory 7020 (decorative member), and the like are performed. That is, the sub control circuit 7200 controls various effect devices based on the command from the main control circuit 7070 to execute various effects according to the progress of the game. Note that in this embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 7200 to the main control circuit 7070; however, the present invention is not limited to this and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 7200 to the main control circuit 7070. It may be provided with various configurations.

Next, the internal configuration of the sub control circuit 7200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub control circuit 7200 and a connection relationship between the sub control circuit 7200 and various peripheral devices thereof.

As shown in FIG. 102, the sub control circuit 7200 includes a relay board 7201, a sub board 7202 (first board), a control ROM board 7203, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 7204 (second board). .. Then, the sub-board 7202 is connected to the relay board 7201, the control ROM board 7203, and the CGROM board 7204. In the sub-control circuit 7200, the sub-board 7202 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 7203 and CGROM board 7204) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

The relay board 7201 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 and transmitting the received command to the sub-board 7202.

The sub-board 7202 is provided with a host control circuit 7210, a voice/LED control circuit 7220, a display control circuit 7230, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 7250, and a built-in relay board 7260. Of these, at least the host control circuit 7210, the audio/LED control circuit 7220, and the display control circuit 7230 are configured as one board substrate.

The host control circuit 7210 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 7200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 7070, and includes a CPU processor, sub work RAM 7210a, SRAM 7210b, RTC (real time clock), It is configured to include a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 7210 is connected to the audio/LED control circuit 7220, the display control circuit 7230, and the built-in relay board 7260 in the sub-board 7202. In addition, the host control circuit 7210 is connected to the control ROM substrate 7203.

Further, the host control circuit 7210 has a sub-work RAM 7210a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 7210b. The sub-work RAM 7210a is a storage device that acts as a work temporary storage area when the host control circuit 7210 executes various processes, and various flags and variables necessary when the host control circuit 7210 executes various processes. The value of is memorized. The SRAM 7210b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the sub-work RAM 7210a. Although the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 7210 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium. ..

The voice/LED control circuit 7220 is connected to the speaker 7011 and the lamp group 7018 via the built-in relay board 7260, and based on the control signal (sound request and lamp request described later) input from the host control circuit 7210, the speaker 7011. Is a circuit for controlling the sound reproducing operation by the and the light emitting operation by the lamp group 7018. Therefore, functionally, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 has a voice controller 7220a and a lamp controller 7220b. The voice controller 7220a and lamp controller 7220b are substantially included in the sound and lamp control module 7226 described below. The internal configuration of the audio/LED control circuit 7220 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

In the present embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice/LED control circuit 7220 is transmitted to the lamp group 7018 via the built-in relay board 7260, the voice/LED Communication between the control circuit 7220 and the lamp group 7018 is performed by an SPI (Serial Periperal Interface) communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, in this embodiment, the lamp group 7018 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 7230 is connected to the display device 7013 and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on a control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 7210. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations at the time of displaying. The display control circuit 7230 has a display controller (a first display controller 7238 and a second display controller 7239 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 7237.

Further, the display control circuit 7230 is connected to the SDRAM 7250 in the sub-board 7202. Further, the display control circuit 7230 is connected to the CGROM substrate 7204. In addition, the display controller in the display control circuit 7230 is directly connected to the display device 7013 without a relay substrate. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 7230 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

The SDRAM 7250 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 7250 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in a drawing process of an image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 7013. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 7250 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 7260 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 7210 and the voice/LED control circuit 7220, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 7011, the lamp group 7018, and the accessory 7020. It is a relay board for transmission.

Further, the built-in relay board 7260 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 7261 and a digital audio power amplifier 7262 (amplifying means). In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 7261 and the digital audio power amplifier 7262 are mounted on the same relay board is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board on which the I2C controller 7261 is mounted may be used for the digital audio It may be provided separately from the relay board on which the power amplifier 7262 is mounted.

The I2C controller 7261 is connected to the host control circuit 7210 and the motor controller 7270 of the accessory 7020. That is, the host control circuit 7210 is connected to the accessory 7020 via the I2C controller 7261 and the motor controller 7270. Then, the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 7210 are input to the accessory 7020 via the I2C controller 7261 and the motor controller 7270.

In this embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 7261 and the motor controller 7270 is performed by the I2C communication method (a kind of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory 7020 includes one or more motors, and the motor controller 7270 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. Although FIG. 102 shows an example in which only one accessory 7020 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory 7020 may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 may directly drive the motor of the accessory 7020 without using the motor controller 7270, or a separate control circuit for motor control may be provided. Good. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one control circuit controls a plurality of motor drivers (motors), but the present invention is not limited to this. In this embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used. The configuration may be such that one motor (motor driver) is controlled, or one motor (motor driver) is controlled by one control circuit.

The digital audio power amplifier 7262 is connected to the audio/LED control circuit 7220 and the speaker 7011. That is, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 is connected to the speaker 7011 via the digital audio power amplifier 7262. Therefore, the audio signal output from the audio/LED control circuit 7220 is input to the speaker 7011 via the digital audio power amplifier 7262.

A sub-main ROM 7205 is provided on the control ROM substrate 7203. The sub-main ROM 7205 stores various programs for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 by the host control circuit 7210 and various data tables (see, for example, FIG. 122 described later). Then, the host control circuit 7210 executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 7205.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 7205 is applied as the storage means for storing the programs used in the host control circuit 7210, various tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium including a control means, and for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Other storage media may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in different storage media. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 7205.

A CGROM 7206 is provided on the CGROM substrate 7204. The CGROM 7206 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 7206 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 7013, audio data reproduced by the speaker 7011 (sometimes referred to as sound data in this specification), and the like. At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 7206, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 7206 without being compressed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 7203 and CGROM board 7204) and sub-board 7202 are connected by a board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 7200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 7202, and the sub-board 7202 may be formed by a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 7202 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 7202 is composed of one board having the ROM function or having the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 7200 uses the sub-control circuit 7200 according to the type of the memory used as the CGROM. A switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the substrate or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used depending on the type of memory may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the relationship of data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 7205, CGROM 7206, built-in VRAM 7237, SDRAM 7250) and the corresponding control circuit is as follows: built-in VRAM 7237>SDRAM 7250>sub main ROM 7205≈CGROM 7206. That is, in this embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 7237 and various circuits in the display control circuit 7230 is the fastest, and then the communication speed between the SDRAM 7250 and the display control circuit 7230 is the fastest. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 7205 and the host control circuit 7210 and the communication speed between the CGROM 7206 and the display control circuit 7230 are the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be set arbitrarily. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that in the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different. May all be the same.

Here, a configuration that can be taken by the various storage means described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the storage unit of information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) stores information about transparency data (alpha table described below) that can be used when setting transparency for image data. The configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM 7206) has been described. That is, the configuration example in which the “first information storage means” is physically the same as the “second information storage means” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "first information storage means" may be configured by a storage means (storage medium) that is physically different from the "second information storage means".

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only the storage means such as the CGROM 7206 but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, or the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the “first information storage means” and the “second information storage means” may be different data storage areas in the same storage means, or may be different tables. Further, it may be stored in different register addresses. That is, "different information storage means" in the present specification means not only physically different storage means (storage medium) but also physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it is meant to include the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in the storage means are different.

The meaning of the “information storage means” in the present specification described above is also applicable to the “third information storage means” (SDRAM 7250) and “fourth information storage means” (built-in VRAM 7237) described above. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" to the "fourth information storage means" may be physically configured by different storage means (storage media), or "first information storage means" to The “fourth information storage means” may be configured with different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the “first information storage means” and the “second information storage means” are configured with different data areas in one storage means (CGROM 7206), and the “third information storage means” is formed. , A storage means (SDRAM 7250) physically different from the storage means (CGROM 7206) including the “first information storage means” and the “second information storage means”, and the “fourth information storage means” is An example will be described in which a storage unit (CGROM 7206) including "1 information storage unit" and "second information storage unit" and a storage unit (built-in VRAM 7237) that is physically different from the "third information storage unit" (SDRAM 7250) are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Which of the data area and the storage means constitutes the "information storage means", and how is the combination of the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means? It can be set appropriately depending on the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the gaming machine, for example. For example, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" to the "third information storage means" are configured with different data areas in one storage means, and the "fourth information storage means" is referred to as the "fourth information storage means". It may be configured by a storage means physically different from the storage means including "1 information storage means" to "third information storage means".

[Voice/LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the audio/LED control circuit 7220 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the internal circuit configuration of the audio/LED control circuit 7220 and the connection relationship between the audio/LED control circuit 7220 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. Note that in FIG. 103, for simplification of description, illustration of a relay board or the like provided between the audio/LED control circuit 7220 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 103, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 7221, a memory interface 7222, a digital audio interface 7223, a peripheral interface 7224, a command register 7225, and a sound/lamp. It includes a control module 7226, a main generator 7227, and a multi-effector 7228. The connection relation of each unit in the voice/LED control circuit 7220 is as follows.

In the sound/LED control circuit 7220, the sound/lamp control module 7226 is connected to the memory interface 7222, the peripheral interface 7224, the command register 7225, the main generator 7227, and the multi-effector 7228. The command register 7225 is connected to the LSI interface 7221 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 7226. Further, the main generator 7227 is connected to the memory interface 7222 and the multi-effector 7228 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 7226. Further, the multi-effector 7228 is connected to the memory interface 7222 and the digital audio interface 7223 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 7226 and the main generator 7227.

Next, the configuration of each unit in the voice/LED control circuit 7220 will be described.

The LSI interface 7221 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting control signals and the like (for example, sound request, lamp request, etc.) between the host control circuit 7210 and the command register 7225. That is, the command register 7225 is connected to the host control circuit 7210 via the LSI interface 7221.

The memory interface 7222 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting audio data and the like between the sub-main ROM 7205 and each of the sound/lamp control module 7226, the main generator 7227, and the multi-effector 7228.

The digital audio interface 7223 is an interface circuit used when outputting a sound signal or the like from the multi-effector 7228 to the speaker 7011. The digital audio interface 7223 also outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effector 7228.

The peripheral interface 7224 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting a lamp signal or the like (LED data or the like described later) between the lamp group 7018 and the sound/lamp control module 7226. Further, the peripheral interface 7224 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) for outputting data to the LED drivers included in the lamp group 7018. In this embodiment, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used as described later.

The command register 7225 is composed of a large number of register groups (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed by the host control circuit 7210. The command register 7225 sets the function control of the sound/lamp control module 7226, the main generator 7227, and the multi-effector 7228. The command register 7225 also sets the operating conditions of each interface (LSI interface 7221, memory interface 7222, digital audio interface 7223, peripheral interface 7224).

An IC (Integrated Circuit) is mounted on each register forming the command register 7225, and each register is formed by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When a register having such a configuration is used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module ( The capacity of the command register 7225) can be increased.

The sound/lamp control module 7226 centrally controls the sound reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the sound/LED control circuit 7220 according to the setting contents of the command register 7225. .. As shown in FIG. 103, the sound/lamp control module 7226 includes a simple access controller 7226a, a sequencer 7226b, a lamp control unit 7226c, and a peripheral control unit 7226d.

The simple access controller 7226a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands. The sequencer 7226b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function unit) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and sound. Then, each sequencer controls various operations in accordance with a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence reproduction of LED animation, voice, etc., which will be described later).

The lamp control unit 7226c calculates the brightness value to be set in all channels (8 channels) to which LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 7226d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the data of the calculation result output from the lamp control unit 7226c to the LED driver.

The main generator 7227 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 7227 acquires predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 7206 based on the control signal input from the sound/lamp control module 7226, and outputs the acquired audio data to the predetermined audio signal. Convert to. The main generator 7227 is divided into reproduction channels CH1 to CH32 to reproduce compressed data, a decoder 7227a, a volume control channel volume 7227b (V1 to V4), and a channel mixing unit 7227c for mixing reproduction sounds of the decoder 7227a. And a remix unit 7227d that executes a final mixing operation.

The multi-effector 7228 has a mixer for synthesizing an audio signal input from the main generator 7227 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 7223, and various effectors for giving various audio effects to audio. Then, the multi-effector 7228 outputs the audio signal synthesized by the mixer, the output signal from the effector, etc. to the speaker 7011 via the digital audio interface 7223.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining output signals of the audio/LED control circuit. The CGROM 7206 stores a maximum of 8192 types of sequence code groups and a maximum of 8192 types of SAC data groups. Sequence code and SAC data, respectively, have been identified in the 13 bit long sequence code number or SAC number, a relationship of 8192 ^{= 2 13.}

In the case of this embodiment, 16 sequences (SQ0 to SQ15) operating in parallel are provided as the sequencer 7226b, and 4 sequences (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel are provided as the simple accelerator controller 7226a. There is. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 7225 is provided with a voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ15) and a voice control register RGj1 for controlling the SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

Then, when the host control circuit 7210 configured by the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its attached information to a predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the voice command transmission operation, the corresponding simple The access controller 7226a starts the function, and the simple access controller 7226a writes the group of setting data specified by the SAC number into the group of voice control registers designated by the SAC data. In this embodiment, the complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its associated information.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 7210 composed of a CPU processor, based on the voice command transmission operation, stores the sequence code number and its associated information in a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 7226b (SQ0 to SQ7). When written, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts its function and writes the group of setting data specified by the sequence code into the group of voice control registers designated by the sequence code.

Here, in a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7), a plurality of (up to eight) sequence code numbers for any sequencer SQi and loop information for the effect of each sequence code number. You can fill in. Therefore, for example, when n+1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1,..., Xn) are designated for the sequencer SQi, the setting operation of the sequence code number X0 → the setting operation of the sequence code number X1. →... The setting operation of the sequence code number Xn is sequentially executed, and the voice effect corresponding to the setting operation is executed.

In addition, loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, so that after repeating the audio effect specified by the sequence code number a predetermined number of times, the audio effect specified by the next sequence code number is added. Can be migrated.

As described above, there are various kinds of data to be set in the sequencer SQi, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and associated data in the voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer. Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire sequence code number and associated data is divided in 1-byte units, and the divided 1-byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 in which this 1-byte data is to be set are stored. A group of SAC data, which is a set, is secured in the CGROM 7206 (hereinafter, this is referred to as sequencer starting SAC data).

Then, the host control circuit 7210 activates the simple access controller 7226a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the voice control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, it goes without saying that the SAC number specifies the SAC data for activating the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is expanded in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, the setting operation of the activation data of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15 is easy.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104, a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH) are described in a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number. After all, after executing all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number are executed.

Since the waiting time can be set in each sequencer, the first sequence step (writing operation of a group of setting data) is started after the waiting time pointed out by the host control circuit 7210 configured by the CPU processor. When the step end code (FFFEH) is executed, after the waiting time, the next set of setting data is written in the set of voice control registers. As the standby time, a single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the standby time applied to the succeeding sequence step is set. By doing so, the waiting time for each sequence step can be arbitrarily set.

Further, continuing the description of the internal configuration of the audio/LED control circuit 7220, as shown in FIG. 103, the output signals (mixing L0, mixing R0, mixing L1, mixing R1, mixing SUB0, 6) of the channel mixing unit 7227c are mixed. In the multi-effector 7228, the mixed SUB1) is subjected to digital filter processing based on the operation parameter defined in a predetermined audio control register of the command register 7225, and then is supplied to the total volume 7229 (TV0 to TV3) to obtain the total volume value. Amplified based on TV.

The total volume value TV is defined by the operation parameter written in the corresponding audio control register. As described above, this operation parameter is, in principle, set switch (hardware) operated by the staff in this embodiment. Wear switch). However, when the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (while waiting for the audio effect), the total volume TV is defined (changed) based on the set value. When the player operates the volume switch, the channel volume 7227b (V1 to V4) is defined (changed) instead of or in addition to defining the total volume TV based on the set value. You can

[Speaker volume control]
Next, volume control of each speaker 7011 executed by the host control circuit 7210 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

Sounds such as game sounds output from the respective speakers 7011 (L0/R0/L1/R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the audio signals of the total volume TV0 to 3 output to all channels, and the individual audio signals of all channels. The volume is controlled by a volume transition operation for gradually changing the volume value of the audio signal by multiplying the audio signal for each reproduction channel output to the channel.

The "audio signal" has volume information (for example, information such as wattage) and can be simply called "volume". For example, in this specification, the “audio signal for each reproduction channel” may be referred to as the “volume for each reproduction channel”.

The audio signals of the total volume TV 0 to 3 are output by the total value of the audio signal by the volume control 7281 by the hardware switch and the user volume control 7283 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 7283 at the time of debugging. It is specified by multiplying with the audio signal. The host control circuit 7210 that executes the volume control 7281 by the hardware switch, the user volume control 7282 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 7283 at the time of debugging corresponds to the “first volume control means” of the present invention.

The volume of each reproduction channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume includes the audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284 affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285 not affected by the volume adjustment. It is specified by the total value. In the first reproduction channel primary control 7284, for example, control is performed to change the volume of normal game sound (that is, the audio signal (hereinafter the same)) based on the operation of changing the volume performed by the player or the like. Be seen. The second reproduction channel primary control 7285 is a control for outputting a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is done. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. In this way, the second reproduction channel primary control 7285 which is not affected by the volume adjustment is controlled so that the specific game sound is output at a constant volume, so that the specific reproduction sound is specified not in the whole but only in the specific reproduction channel. It is possible to execute the control for making the volume of the game sound constant. The audio signal of the secondary volume is the volume incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number, and is output by the volume controls 7286, 7287, 7288. The host control circuit 7210 for executing the first reproduction channel primary control 7284, the second reproduction channel primary control 7285, and the volume controls 7286, 7287, 7288 incorporated in the audio data is the "second volume" of the present invention. It corresponds to "control means".

In this way, the sound output from each speaker 7011 (L0/R0/L1/R1, SUB0, SUB1) is the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3 and the volume of the primary volume which is the volume of each reproduction channel and the secondary volume. Since the volume is defined by being multiplied by the volume of the volume, it is possible to give variety to the volume of the game sound. In particular, since the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 7283 at the time of debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and at the time of debugging. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of.

Regarding the volume of the normal game sound, the volume can be changed based on the operation of changing the volume by a player or the like, but a specific sound such as an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity can be changed. Regarding the game sound, a constant volume is output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285 regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to improve security.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of this embodiment, the volume control 7281 by a hardware switch has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. Further, the user volume control 7282 by the volume setting screen has seven stages, and [small]=[1], [medium]=“4”, and [large]=“7” in association with the hardware switch.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, for the specific sound such as the error sound, the volume can be maintained only by the control by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285, and therefore the specific sound It becomes possible to easily perform the volume control such that the volume is maintained and the volume of other normal sounds is changed according to the volume adjustment. The processing by the host control circuit 7210 when volume adjustment is performed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 161.

[Connection structure between digital audio power amplifier and speaker]
Next, the connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 7262 and its peripheral circuits provided in the built-in relay board 7260 and the speaker 7011 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 7260 and the speaker 7011. Note that FIG. 106 shows a state where the speaker 7011 is not connected to the built-in relay board 7260 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a speaker box 7011a provided with a speaker 7011 is connected to a built-in relay board 7260 via a harness 7300.

The built-in relay board 7260 includes a digital audio power amplifier 7262, an LC circuit 7263, a connection terminal group 7264 including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal), two resistors 7265 and 7266, and a capacitor. 7267 and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 7268.

The digital audio power amplifier 7262 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 7011, and drives the speaker 7011. The LC circuit 7263 is composed of a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. The NOT circuit 7268 is a logic circuit which inverts the level of the input signal and outputs the inverted signal.

A clock input terminal (MCK) and a data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 are connected to the audio/LED control circuit 7220. The clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio/LED control circuit 7220 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262, and the audio/LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from the control circuit 7220 is input.

The first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 are connected to the first connection terminal in the connection terminal group 7264 of the built-in relay board 7260 via the LC circuit 7263, respectively. It is connected to the second connection terminal. Note that this embodiment shows an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 are provided; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate depending on, for example, a function or specification of the speaker 7011. You can

Furthermore, the digital audio power amplifier 7262 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). The digital audio power amplifier 7262 outputs the audio signals from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is LOW level. It has a function of stopping the output or putting these output terminals in a state of being grounded via a high resistance (hereinafter referred to as a mute function). That is, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 7262 operates from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) to the first relay board 7260. It has a function of generating a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped.

On the other hand, when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is the HIGH level, the digital audio power amplifier 7262 has the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). Output an audio signal from.

The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 7264 of the built-in relay board 7260 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 7268 via the resistor 7266. The output terminal of the NOT circuit 7268 is connected to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 and the resistor 7266 is connected to the power supply voltage (+5V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 7260 via the resistor 7265. The signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 7268 and the resistor 7266 is connected (grounded) to the ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 7260 via the capacitor 7267. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 is connected to the ground (GND) terminal.

As shown in FIG. 106, the speaker 7011 is attached to a speaker box 7011a formed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 7011a is provided with a connection terminal group 7011b including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal). Then, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a are connected to the speaker 7011 via signal wiring. Further, the third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 7011a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

As shown in FIG. 106, the harness 7300 is composed of a bundle of four signal wires. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to each of the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings are connected to the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a, respectively. That is, the first connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a are connected by the signal wiring between the first connection terminal and the fifth connection terminal in the harness 7300, and the built-in relay board 7260 is connected. The second connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a are connected by signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal in the harness 7300. Further, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a are connected by signal wiring between the third connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the harness 7300, and the built-in relay board 7260 is connected. The fourth connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a are connected by signal wiring between the fourth connection terminal and the eighth connection terminal in the harness 7300. As a result, the speaker 7011 is connected to the built-in relay board 7260 via the harness 7300.

Note that the number of signal wirings included in the harness 7300 is not limited to four, and may be appropriately changed depending on the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 and the speaker 7011, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. The harness 7300 has at least signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 and the speaker 7011, and signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 via the speaker box 7011a. Should be included.

When the built-in relay board 7260 and the speaker 7011 are connected via the harness 7300 as described above, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 are connected via the harness 7300. Connected to the speaker 7011. The mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 is grounded via the NOT circuit 7268, the harness 7300, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a.

As a result, in the state where the speaker 7011 is connected to the built-in relay board 7260 (digital audio power amplifier 7262) via the harness 7300, the LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 7268. The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) becomes high level. In this case, an audio signal is output from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 to the speaker 7011.

On the other hand, when the speaker 7011 is not connected to the built-in relay board 7260 (digital audio power amplifier 7262), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 is opened. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+5V) is input to the NOT circuit 7268, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 becomes LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier The above-described mute function of 7262 is activated.

That is, when the speaker 7011 is separated from the built-in relay board 7260 (digital audio power amplifier 7262), the built-in relay board 7260 is output from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262. A state is generated in which the output of the audio signal to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped. As a result, the occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the digital audio power amplifier 7262 (output terminal) and the first and second connection terminals of the built-in relay board 7260 is suppressed, and a malfunction such as a failure of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 is prevented. Can be prevented.

As described above, in this embodiment, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 can be activated regardless of the software control by the host control circuit 7210 and the audio/LED control circuit 7220. Therefore, for example, even if it is recognized that the host control circuit 7210 and the voice/LED control circuit 7220 are performing the output stop control of the voice signal in the situation where the speaker 7011 is detached from the built-in relay board 7260, In the case where a sound signal is erroneously output due to a bug (defect), or in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 having a structure in which the game board cannot be replaced unless the speaker 7011 is removed from the harness 7300, after the game board replacement is completed. Even if a situation occurs in which the door is closed by mistake and the voice output is started without connecting the speaker 7011 and the harness 7300, the above-described mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 operates in terms of hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 7262 can be surely protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 is connected via the harness 7300 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 7011a, It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 7260. In such a configuration, when the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 is LOW, is this cause because the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260 is grounded? Since it can be determined by measuring the signal level of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 7260, the digital output operation from the digital audio power amplifier 7262 can be managed more accurately.

[Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 7230 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 7230 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 7230 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

As shown in FIG. 107, the display control circuit 7230 includes a memory controller 7231, a command memory 7232, a command parser 7233, a moving image decoder 7234, a still image decoder 7235, an SDRAM controller 7236, a built-in VRAM 7237, and a first VRAM 7237. A display controller 7238, a second display controller 7239, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 7240, and a rendering engine 7241 are provided. The connection relation of each part in the display control circuit 7230 and the connection relation between the display control circuit 7230 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

In the display control circuit 7230, the memory controller 7231 is connected to the command parser 7233, the moving image decoder 7234, and the still image decoder 7235. The command parser 7233 is connected to the command memory 7232, the moving image decoder 7234, the still image decoder 7235, and the 3D geometry engine 7240 in addition to the memory controller 7231. The video decoder 7234 is connected to the SDRAM controller 7236 in addition to the memory controller 7231 and the command parser 7233. The still image decoder 7235 is connected to the built-in VRAM 7237 in addition to the memory controller 7231 and the command parser 7233.

Further, in the display control circuit 7230, the SDRAM controller 7236 is connected to the built-in VRAM 7237, the first display controller 7238, and the second display controller 7239 in addition to the moving image decoder 7234. The built-in VRAM 7237 is connected to the first display controller 7238, the second display controller 7239, and the rendering engine 7241 in addition to the still image decoder 7235 and the SDRAM controller 7236. Further, the 3D geometry engine 7240 is connected to the rendering engine 7241 in addition to the command parser 7233.

The SDRAM 7250 is connected to the memory controller 7231 and the SDRAM controller 7236 in the display control circuit 7230. Further, the CGROM substrate 7204 is connected to the memory controller 7231 in the display control circuit 7230. Further, the host control circuit 7210 is connected to the memory controller 7231 and the command memory 7232 in the display control circuit 7230. Further, the display device 7013 is connected to the first display controller 7238 and the second display controller 7239 in the display control circuit 7230.

Next, the configuration of each unit in the display control circuit 7230 will be described.

The memory controller 7231 mainly controls communication between various external memories (CGROM substrate 7204 and SDRAM 7250) and the display control circuit 7230. For example, the memory controller 7231 performs processing such as transmission/reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory ready, busy management, etc., and stores data (effect data) at a designated address for various memories. , Command data, etc.) is acquired.

The command memory 7232 is a built-in memory that stores a command list. The command list can be stored in the SDRAM 7250 and the CGROM board 7204 (CGROM 7206) in addition to the command memory 7232.

The command parser 7233 acquires the command list from the designated memory (command memory 7232, SDRAM 7250 or CGROM 7206). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 causes the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 7230 to store the type of memory (command memory 7232, SDRAM 7250, or CGROM 7206) in which the command list is arranged. Its start address and is set. Then, the command parser 7233 accesses the start address in the memory designated by the system control register (not shown) and acquires the command list.

The command parser 7233 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 7234, the still image decoder 7235, and the 3D geometry engine 7240. In the present embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 7230 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 7233.

The moving picture decoder 7234 decodes the moving picture compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 7204 or the SDRAM 7250. Then, the video decoder 7234 outputs the decoded video data to the SDRAM 7250 (external RAM). The moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 7234 is stored in the movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 7250.

The still image decoder 7235 decodes the still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 7204 or the SDRAM 7250. Then, the still image decoder 7235 outputs the decoded still image data to the built-in VRAM 7237. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 7235 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer (described later) provided in the built-in VRAM 7237.

The SDRAM controller 7236 is a controller that controls operations such as storage of decoded moving image data and still image data in the RAM, and transfer of image data between the built-in VRAM 7237 and the CGROM board 7204 or the SDRAM 7250.

The built-in VRAM 7237 operates as a work RAM when executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing process by the display control circuit 7230. Further, in image data transfer processing between the built-in VRAM 7237 and the CGROM substrate 7204 or the SDRAM 7250, which is performed in each processing step in the later-described drawing processing, various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 7237.

Each of the first display controller 7238 and the second display controller 7239 acquires the rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 7241 and outputs the rendering result to the display device 7013. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 7013. When two display controllers are provided like the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 7013 by one display control circuit 7230 (one chip) and each screen is displayed. It can be controlled independently.

The 3D geometry engine 7240 converts the three-dimensional information into two-dimensional information (projection conversion processing) based on the control code input from the command parser 7233, and performs affine transformation such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement of graphics. (Graphic conversion) processing is performed. Then, the 3D geometry engine 7240 outputs the result of the conversion processing to the rendering engine 7241.

The rendering engine 7241 refers to the texture source (SDRAM 7250 in this embodiment) that stores the decompressed still image data and moving image data, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 7241 writes the rendering result to the rendering target (in this embodiment, the built-in VRAM 7237 or SDRAM 7250).

It should be noted that the term “rendering (drawing)” in this specification means that the decoded data is edited according to specified information (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 7240) such as scaling and rotation of a moving image. It is to be. Further, the "rendering engine" here includes, for example, a "rasterizer" and a "pixel shader". Therefore, in the rendering engine 7241, similar to the pixel shader, ARGB values (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) in pixel units for image data. Brightness value, B: brightness value of blue component) is also calculated.

[Connection between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of coping with different types (NOR type or NAND type) of CGROMs connected to the display control circuit 7230. Here, a connection configuration between the display control circuit 7230 and its peripheral circuits provided in the sub-board 7202 and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM board will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

FIG. 108 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 7202 and the CGROM board 7204a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM 7206a (NOR flash memory). Further, FIG. 109 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 7202 and the CGROM board 7204b when the CGROM is a NAND-type CGROM 7206b (NAND flash memory). Note that FIGS. 108 and 109 show a state in which the CGROM board is separated from the sub-board 7202 in order to further clarify the structure of the connection portion, but in reality, both boards are connected via a board-to-board connector. Connected.

(1) Configuration of Sub Substrate First, the internal configuration of the sub substrate 7202 will be described. As is clear from comparison between FIGS. 108 and 109, the configuration of the sub-board 7202 when the NOR type CGROM 7206a is mounted on the CGROM substrate 7204a is the same as that when the NAND type CGROM 7206b is mounted on the CGROM substrate 7204b. It is the same.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the sub-substrate 7202 is provided with a display control circuit 7230, and as its peripheral circuits, a bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 and an AND circuit 7302 (AND gate). Further, the sub-board 7202 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 7303 including a plurality of connection terminals which are directly or indirectly connected to the display control circuit 7230 through the various buses.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301 includes four input/output terminals on one side (terminals A0 to A3 in FIG. 108) and four input/output terminals on the other side (terminals A0 to A3). It has one input/output terminal (terminal B0 to terminal B3 in FIG. 108). The bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 has two control terminals (terminals in FIG. 108) for switching control of the communication direction of signals between the input/output terminals A0 to A3 and the input/output terminals B0 to B3. OE and terminal DIR).

The bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is configured such that between the input/output terminal A0 to the input/output terminal A3 and the input/output terminal B0 to the input/output terminal B3 according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR, respectively. Switch the communication direction of the signal in. Accordingly, even if a mismatch occurs in the communication direction (communication operation) for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 will be described later in detail. The bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301 used in this embodiment can also be applied to a system having two power supplies of 3.3V and 5V.

The display control circuit 7230 is provided with four input/output terminals (terminal GMA31/GRB3 to terminal GMA28/GRB0 in FIG. 108). The I/O terminal GMA31/GRB3 to the input/output terminal GMA28/GRB0 act as the output terminal of the address bus when the CGROM is the NOR type CGROM 7206a, and the ready terminal when the CGROM is the NAND type CGROM 7206b. /Acts as a busy signal input terminal. Further, the display control circuit 7230 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 108) which serve as output terminals of data (address designation data, etc.) relating to addresses of data storage areas in the CGROM. To be

Further, the display control circuit 7230 is provided with two CG memory chip enable output terminals (terminal GCE_0 and terminal GCE_1 in FIG. 108). Note that in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 7230 has two memory spaces corresponding to the two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_1: specific output terminals), and each memory space has a memory space. Information such as type, bus width and access timing is set. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 7230 is configured to be incompatible (useable) when the synchronous mode ROM and the asynchronous mode ROM are mixed.

Further, the display control circuit 7230 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for obtaining image data (compressed data of moving images/still images) from the CGROM via the data bus.

The electrical connection relationship of the above-mentioned components provided on the sub-board 7202 is as follows.

Input/output terminals GMA31/GRB3 to input/output terminals GMA28/GRB0 of the display control circuit 7230 are connected to the input/output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109. To be done. The input/output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301 are connected to the first to fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 7303, respectively. That is, the input/output combined terminal GMA31/GRB3 to input/output combined terminal GMA28/GRB0 of the display control circuit 7230 are connected to the first to fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 7303 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301, respectively. It

The output terminals GMA27 to GMA2 of the display control circuit 7230 are connected to the ninth to 34th connection terminals of the terminal group 7303, respectively, and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 are connected to each other. , And the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal of the terminal group 7303, respectively. Furthermore, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 7230 are respectively connected to the corresponding connection terminals of the terminal group 7303 after the 37th connection terminal.

The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 7303, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 7302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 7302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 7302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1. The sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal of the terminal group 7303 of the sub-board 7202 are connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the sub-board 7202, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the sub-board 7202. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NOR Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 7204a having the NOR type CGROM 7206a mounted therein will be described with reference to FIG.

When the NOR type CGROM 7206a is mounted on the CGROM substrate 7204a, the CGROM substrate 7204a includes the NOR type CGROM 7206a, various signal wirings (buses), and terminals including a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM 7206a via various buses. Group 7311 is provided.

The connection terminals from the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal and after in the terminal group 7311 provided on the CGROM substrate 7204a are connected to the CGROM 7206a.

Note that in the example illustrated in FIG. 108, the CGROM 7206a is a NOR flash memory (a random access flash memory), and thus the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal in the terminal group 7311. The connection terminal is connected to the input terminal (not shown) of the address bus of the CGROM 7206a. The 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 7311 are connected to the CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 7206a, and the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to the display control circuit 7230 by the CGROM 7206a. It is connected to the data output terminal of the CGROM 7206a used when acquiring image data (compressed data of a moving image/still image) from the.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 7311 provided on the CGROM board 7204a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the CGROM board 7204a. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal. That is, when the CGROM 7206a is a NOR flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wire W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 7311 are connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 7204a.

The number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 7311 is the same as the number of connection terminals in the CGROM substrate connection terminal group 7303 provided on the sub-board 7202. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 7204a to the sub-board 7202, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 7204a is connected to the connection terminal of the sub-board 7202 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 108, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal of the CGROM substrate 7204a are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals, respectively.

(3) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NAND Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 7204b mounting the NAND type CGROM 7206b will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the CGROM substrate 7204b shown in FIG. 109, the same components as those of the CGROM substrate 7204a having the NOR type CGROM 7206a shown in FIG. 108 are designated by the same reference numerals.

When the NAND type CGROM 7206b is mounted on the CGROM substrate 7204b, the CGROM substrate 7204b is provided with the NAND type CGROM 7206b and a transistor circuit 7312 as a peripheral circuit thereof. Further, the CGROM substrate 7204b is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 7311 including a plurality of connection terminals which are directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 7206b via various buses.

The first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM substrate 7204b are connected to the drain terminals of the transistor circuit 7312. Note that the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 7312 is connected to the CGROM 7206b, and the source terminal is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 7204b. That is, the first to fourth connection terminals are connected to the CGROM 7206b through the transistor circuit 7312.

Note that, in the example illustrated in FIG. 109, the CGROM 7206b is a NAND flash memory (a flash memory of a sequential access method), so the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 7312, that is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 7311. The terminal is connected to a ready/busy output terminal (not shown) provided in the CGROM 7206b.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM substrate 7204b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal are connected. The terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 7204b. That is, when the CGROM 7206b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal via the signal wire W3.

The eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM board 7204b is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 7204b.

Furthermore, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM board 7204b are connected to the CGROM 7206b. At this time, the ninth to thirty-fourth connection terminals are connected to input terminals (not shown) for data relating to addresses provided in the CGROM 7206b, and the thirty-fifth and thirty-sixth connection terminals are connected to the CGROM7206b. Connected to the memory chip enable input terminal. The connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to a data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 7206b used when the display control circuit 7230 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image/still image) from the CGROM 7206b. It

Even when the NAND type CGROM 7206b is mounted on the CGROM board 7204b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM board 7204b is the same as that of the terminal group 7303 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub-board 7202. It is the same as the number of connection terminals. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 7204b to the sub-board 7202, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 7204b is connected to the connection terminal of the sub-board 7202 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 109, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal,... Of the CGROM board 7204b are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals, respectively.

[Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, the operation when the display control circuit 7230 acquires image data (compressed data of a moving image/still image) from the CGROM will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. 110 is a truth table showing the correspondence between the input signal and the output signal in the AND circuit 7302 provided on the sub-board 7202, and FIG. 111 is the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 provided on the sub-board 7202. 3 is a truth table showing the correspondence relationship between the signal levels applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR and the communication direction in FIG.

(1) Operation of AND Circuit and Bidirectional Balance Transceiver The AND circuit 7302, as shown in FIG. A high level signal is output to the control terminal OE, and under the other input conditions, a low level signal is output to the control terminal OE.

As shown in FIG. 111, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver when a LOW level signal (voltage signal) is input to the control terminal OE and a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR. The input/output terminals A0 to A3 of 7301 are operated as output terminals, and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 are operated as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM is from the display control circuit 7230 to the CGROM.

Further, in the bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301, when the LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE and the HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input/output terminals A0 to I/O of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 7301 are input. The terminal A3 acts as an input terminal, and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 act as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM is from the CGROM to the display control circuit 7230.

When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is set to HIGH. (When a level signal is input), the input/output terminals A0 to A3 and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 are in the HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 111). ) That is, the state becomes equivalent to the open state, and communication is not performed between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM.

(2) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NOR Type) Here, first, consider a case where the CGROM substrate 7204a having the NOR type CGROM 7206a mounted thereon is connected (mounted) to the sub-substrate 7202.

In this case, in this embodiment, since a LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 7230, a LOW signal is output to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301. The level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in a hardware initialization process (see FIG. 134 described later).

In the present embodiment, since the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals), which are preset by the sub control circuit 7200, differ depending on the type of CGROM, the display control circuit The amplitude values of the signals output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 7230 vary depending on the type of storage means. However, the mode in which the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of CGROM is not limited to this mode. As described in Modification Example 7 described later, the display control circuit 7230 detects the type of the connected storage means, and based on the detection result, outputs from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

The fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 7202 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is connected is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 7204a and the signal wiring W2, as shown in FIG. Therefore, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 7204a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 7206a is connected to the sub-board 7202, the input/output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 are used as output terminals as shown in FIG. The input/output terminals B0 to B3 function as input terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM 7206a in the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is from the display control circuit 7230 to the CGROM 7206a.

In this case, the signal wiring connected through the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 7202 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 7204a can be used as an address bus, and display control can be performed. The circuit 7230 can normally perform a memory addressing operation with respect to the NOR type CGROM 7206a. As a result, the display control circuit 7230 can directly address data through the address bus and perform a data read operation.

(3) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NAND Type) Next, consider a case where the CGROM substrate 7204b mounting the NAND type CGROM 7206b is connected (mounted) to the sub-substrate 7202.

Also in this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 7230, it is output to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301. Is input with a LOW level signal. That is, in this embodiment, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 regardless of whether the type of CGROM is NOR type or NAND type. Further, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 7202 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is connected, as shown in FIG. 109, is supplied with the power supply voltage (via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 7204b and the signal wiring W3). Since it is connected to the (+3.3V) terminal, a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 7204b mounting the NAND type CGROM 7206b is connected to the sub-board 7202, the input/output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 are used as input terminals as shown in FIG. The input/output terminals B0 to B3 act as output terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM 7206b in the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 is from the CGROM 7206b to the display control circuit 7230.

In this case, the signal wirings connected via the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 7202 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 7204b should be used as communication wirings for ready/busy signals. You can That is, in this case, it becomes possible to execute the transmission processing from the CGROM 7206 to the display control circuit 7230 of the ready/busy signal referred to by the display control circuit 7230 when reading data from the NAND type CGROM 7206b by the sequential access method. As a result, the display control circuit 7230 can normally perform the operation of acquiring the memory state (ready/busy state) with respect to the NAND type CGROM 7206b.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the type of CGROM is changed, the communication operation between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM can be normally executed without changing the configuration of the sub-board 7202. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, the optimum CGROM can be selected in consideration of the data capacity, the communication speed, the price, and the like. Further, for example, when a new pachinko gaming machine 7001 is manufactured, the sub-board 7202 used in the pachinko gaming machine manufactured in the past is diverted from the conditions such as data capacity and communication speed, and only the type of CGROM is changed. Even in such a case, it can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, it is possible to select the CGROM according to the mode of implementation, and the expandability of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 can be ensured.

Further, in this embodiment, by using the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301, the first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 7303 of the sub-board 7202 and the first connection in the terminal group 7311 of the CGROM board 7204. The terminals to the fourth connection terminal can be used as terminals for both input and output of data. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide data input terminals and data output terminals corresponding to the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 7202 and the CGROM board 7204, and the sub-board 7202 and the CGROM board 7204 can save space. Can be promoted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bidirectional balance transceiver 7301 can switch the “communication mode” between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM according to the type of the CGROM. However, the “communication form” between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM referred to in this specification means all transmission/reception modes of various information between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM.

For example, in the “communication form” between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification, data (image data (compressed data of moving image/still image) necessary for displaying information on the rendering operation on the display device 7013 is displayed. )), the transmission/reception mode between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM, and the transmission/reception mode when the information designating the address of the data stored in the CGROM is communicated between the display control circuit 7230 and the CGROM. It is also meant to include a transmission/reception mode when the control circuit 7230 receives the ready/busy signal from the CGROM. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the “communication form” in the present specification may mean only the communication form of a portion in which the transmission/reception form of information changes depending on the type of CGROM.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 7071 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 7071 are "big hit game state" (special game state) and "small hit game state" (specific game state), which have mutually different expectations of prize balls. There is. The “big hit gaming state” is a gaming state in which a round game in which the shutter opening period of the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054 (that is, one round period) is long (for example, 30 seconds) occurs, This is a game state in which a large prize ball can be expected for the player. That is, in the "big hit game state", the repeated state of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the special winning opening is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the "small hitting gaming state" is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in which the period of one round is shorter than that of the "big hitting gaming state" (for example, 1.8 sec), and a large prize ball cannot be expected for the player. It is in a game state. That is, in the "small hitting game state", the repeated state of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the special winning opening is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 7071 are "probability variation game state" (high probability game state) and "normal game state" (low There is a probability game state).

The “probability variation gaming state” is a gaming state in which the winning probability of “big hit” (1/131 in this embodiment) is high. On the other hand, the “normal game state” is a game state in which the winning probability of “big hit” (1/392 in the present embodiment) is lower than that in the “probability variation game state”.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the type of game state controlled and managed by the main CPU 7071, the winning probability of a normal symbol (probability that a regular symbol becomes a "hit" mode) is different from each other in a "time saving game state" (high There are a winning game state) and a "non-time saving game state" (low winning game state).

The "time saving game state" in this specification is a game state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is high. That is, the "time saving game state" is a game state in which the ordinary electric auditors role 7046 (blade member) provided in the second starting port 7045 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which the second starting port winning is likely to occur). The game state is advantageous for the player. The "time saving game state" ends when "big hit" is determined or when a variable display of special symbols for a predetermined time saving number described later is executed. Further, in the time saving game state, as the variation time which is the time for performing the variable display of the special symbol executed in the state, the variation time shorter than the variation time selected in the normal game state is easily selected. It may be controlled. By such control, the variable time may be shortened in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state, and the advantageous game state may be given to the player by increasing the number of games per unit time.

On the other hand, the "non-time saving (no time saving) gaming state" is a gaming state in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is lower than that in the "time saving gaming state". Therefore, the "non-time saving game state" is a game state in which the normal electric accessory 7046 (vane member) is unlikely to be in the open state (a game state in which the second starting winning a prize is unlikely to occur), and is a disadvantageous game for the player. It is in a state.

And in this embodiment, the game state of various combinations of the above-mentioned game states other than the "big hit game state" and the "small hit game state" is provided. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a "probability variation game state" and a "time saving game state" that occur at the same time (hereinafter referred to as a "high-probability time saving state"), and a "probability variation game state" A gaming state in which a "non-time saving game state" occurs at the same time (hereinafter, referred to as a "highly accurate time saving state") is provided. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the game state is the “probability variation game state” in the state of “no high-accuracy time saving”, here, such a game state is referred to as “substantial probability game state”. Also called. Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a “normal gaming state” and a “non-time saving gaming state” occur at the same time (hereinafter, referred to as “state with no low accurate time saving”), and a “normal gaming state” and “time saving” A gaming state in which a "gaming state" occurs at the same time (hereinafter, referred to as "state of low accuracy and short time") is also provided.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 7072 of the main control circuit 7070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 121.

[Big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting mouth)]
First, with reference to FIG. 112, a jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning at the first starting opening) will be described. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening) is based on the big hit determination random number value obtained when the game ball enters the first starting opening 7044 (winning), "big hit", "small hit" It is a table that is referred to when any of "and" is lost by lottery.

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining a lottery result that is triggered by the winning of the starting mouth, and more specifically, a lottery for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) It is a random number value indicating the result. Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number value (random number for special symbol lottery) is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 7044, any one of “big hit”, “small hit” and “miss” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning at the first starting opening), as shown in FIG. 112, for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”), The range of random numbers for jackpot determination that determines the winning of each of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss", and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data") And any one of “miss judgment value data”). The probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 7073, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “probability variation gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “probability variation gaming state”, the confirmation flag is “1”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number value is any of “777” to “943”, , "Big hit" is won, and "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the “big hit” (“selection rate” in FIG. 112) in this case is 167/65536.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number value is any of “1” to “300” at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044, “small hit” is won, and “ "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 300/65536.

Furthermore, at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number value is neither “1” to “300” nor “777” to “943”, “miss” Is won, and “miss determination value data” is determined.

On the other hand, at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044, if the probability variation flag is "1" and the big hit determination random number value is any of "777" to "1277", as shown in FIG. Is won and the “big hit judgment value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of the “big hit” (“selection rate” in FIG. 112) in this case is 500/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

Further, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the big hit determination random value is any of "1" to "300" at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044, "small hit" is won, and " "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 300/65536, which is the same as that when the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the first start opening 7044 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the big hit determination random number value is neither “1” to “300” nor “777” to “1277”, “miss” Is won, and “miss determination value data” is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 7044, the selection rate (big hit probability) depends on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the “probability variation gaming state”. fluctuate. Specifically, the jackpot probability when a game ball wins the first starting opening 7044 when the gaming state is the “probability variation gaming state” is about three times that when the gaming state is not the “probability variation gaming state”. Get higher

[Big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the second starting mouth)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning at the second starting opening) will be described. The big hit random number determination table (at the time of winning at the second starting opening) is a lottery of whether or not it is a "big hit" based on the random value for the big hit determination obtained when the game ball enters (wins) at the second starting opening 7045. It is a table referred to when performing.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 7045, either "big hit" or "miss" is determined by lottery. If a game ball wins the second starting opening 7045, the "small hit" is not won. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table (at the time of winning at the second starting opening), as shown in FIG. 113, for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”), Relationship between the range of random numbers for jackpot determination that determines the winning of each "big hit" and "miss" and the corresponding determination value data (either "big hit determination value data" or "miss determination value data") Is prescribed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number value is any of “777” to “943” when the second starting opening 7045 is won. , "Big hit" is won, and "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the “big hit” (“selection rate” in FIG. 113) in this case is 167/65536.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the big hit determination random number value is neither “777” to “943” at the time of winning the second starting opening 7045, “miss” is won and “miss determination” is made. Value data” is determined.

On the other hand, at the time of winning the second start opening 7045, if the probability variation flag is "1" and the big hit determination random number value is any of "777" to "1277", as shown in FIG. Is won and the “big hit judgment value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the “big hit” in this case is 500/65536, which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the big hit determination random number value is neither "777" to "1277" at the time of winning the second start opening 7045, the result is "miss" and "miss determination value data". Is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 7045, the selection rate (big hit probability) is also determined depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability variation game state”. Fluctuates. Specifically, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 7044, when the gaming state is in the "probability variation gaming state" when the gaming state is in the second starting opening 7045 The jackpot probability is about three times higher than that when the gaming state is not the “probability variation gaming state”.

[Pattern determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “miss”) of the lottery based on the random number value for big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 7044, and the first start The special symbol is selected based on the symbol random number value (random number for symbol determination) acquired at the time of oral winning. The symbol determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening) is a table that is referred to when selecting the special symbol. The symbol random number value is a random number value for determining the special symbol, and is selected from 0 to 99 (100 types) regardless of the lottery type based on the big hit determination random number value.

As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol determination table (at the time of winning at the first starting opening) is a symbol designating command for designating a special symbol for each determination value data indicating the winning type of the lottery based on the random number value for jackpot determination. The relationship between (“zA1” to “zA3”) and the symbol random number value for which the symbol designation command is selected is defined.

In addition, when the winning type of the lottery based on the big hit determination random number value is "small hit" (small hit determination value data), the symbol designation command to be selected is one type (zA2), and the symbol is always designated. The command (zA2) is determined. In addition, even when the winning type of the lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value is “miss” (miss determination value data), the symbol designating command selected is one type (zA3), and the symbol designating command (always). zA3) is determined.

On the other hand, when the winning type of the lottery based on the big hit determination random number value is “big hit” (big hit determination value data), there are a plurality of types of special symbols to be selected, as shown in FIG. 114, and “big hit”. A plurality of types (“z0” to “z4”) of time symbol designating commands (big hit selection symbol commands in FIG. 114) are also prepared. Then, at the time of "big hit", the big hit selection symbol command that is decided also changes according to the obtained symbol random number value. For example, when the symbol random number value acquired at the time of "big hit" is any of "40" to "59", the big hit selection symbol command "z2" is selected, and the selection rate is 20/100. Become.

[Design determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the winning type (“big hit” or “miss”) of the lottery based on the random number value for jackpot judgment performed when the game ball wins the second starting mouth 7045, and the second starting mouth winning is acquired. The special symbol is selected based on the random number value of the symbol (random number value for symbol determination). The symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second starting opening) is a table that is referred to when selecting the special symbol.

In the symbol determination table (at the time of winning the second starting mouth), as shown in FIG. 115, a symbol designating command for designating a special symbol for each determination value data indicating the lottery winning type based on the big hit determination random number value (“ZA1” and “zA3”) and the relation between the symbol random number value for which the symbol designation command is selected are defined.

Even when the winning type of the lottery based on the big hit determination random number value is “miss” (miss determination value data), the selected symbol designating command is one type (zA3), and the symbol designating command (always). zA3) is determined.

On the other hand, when the winning type of the lottery based on the big hit determination random number value is “big hit” (big hit determination value data), as shown in FIG. 115, there are a plurality of types of special symbols to be selected, “big hit”. A plurality of types (“z0” and “z4”) of time symbol designating commands (big hit selection symbol commands in FIG. 115) are also prepared. Then, at the time of "big hit", the big hit selection symbol command that is decided also changes according to the obtained symbol random number value. For example, when the symbol random number value acquired at the time of "big hit" is any of "29" to "99", the big hit selection symbol command "z4" is selected, and the selection rate is 80/100. Become.

[Big hit type determination table]
Next, the jackpot type determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. In the present embodiment, when the big hit selection symbol command (one of "z0" to "z4") is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (see FIGS. 114 and 115), the determined big hit selection Based on the symbol command, determine the type of "big hit" (contents of big hit game). The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the type of jackpot (contents of the jackpot game) based on the jackpot selection symbol command.

Further, in the present embodiment, a jackpot type determination table is provided for each gaming state at the time of winning the "jackpot". FIG. 116 is a jackpot type determination table (No. 1) that is referred to when the “big hit” is won when the gaming state is “no low certainty hour/hour”, and FIG. 117 is a gaming state “low certainty hour/hour”. It is a jackpot type determination table (No. 2) that is referred to when the "big hit" is won when the answer is "Yes". FIG. 118 is a jackpot type determination table (No. 3) that is referred to when the “big hit” is won when the gaming state is “no high-accuracy time/short”, and FIG. 119 shows that the gaming state is “high”. It is a jackpot type determination table (No. 4) that is referred to when the "big hit" is won when "there is an accurate time reduction".

In each jackpot type determination table, the relation between the jackpot selection symbol command (“z0” to “z4”) and various parameters for determining the type of “jackpot” is defined. As various parameters for determining the type of "big hit" (contents of the big hit game), the value of the time saving flag, the number of time saving, the value of the probability variation flag, and the number of rounds in the big hit game are defined.

For example, when the "big hit" is won in the state of "high accuracy time saving", and "z1" is determined as the big hit selection symbol command, as shown in FIG. 119, the kind of "big hit" ( As various parameters for determining the jackpot game contents, a time saving flag “1”, a time saving frequency “100”, a probability variation flag “0”, and a round number “10” are set.

The "round number" defined in each jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special winning opening is relatively long in the big hit game. The "time saving flag" is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 7073, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "1 (on)". Further, the "time saving number" is the number of times of variable display of special symbols given in the "time saving game state".

[Demonstration information determination table when winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a winning effect information determination table will be described.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 7070 (main CPU 7071), the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “miss”) determined at the time of winning (starting winning), and a symbol designating command or big hit. Based on the time selection symbol command, the sub-control circuit 7200 determines the information used when determining the effect contents. For example, in the sub-control circuit 7200, the information used when determining the content regarding the color change effect of the holding symbol indicating the holding ball of the special symbol, the content regarding the prefetching effect, and the like is determined. The winning effect information determination table is referred to when determining the outline of the effect contents executed by the sub control circuit 7200 based on the information acquired by the main control circuit 7070 at the time of winning (when the winning opening is won). It's a table.

In the winning effect information determination table, "winning effect information 1" and "winning effect information 1" and "showing the outline of the effect contents executed by the sub-control circuit 7200 and a combination of various kinds of information determined at the time of winning (starting winning a prize). The relationship with the winning effect information 2” is defined. In the present embodiment, as the various information determined at the time of winning (starting mouth winning), the type of starting mouth, the type of judgment value data, the type of selection symbol command at the time of big hit, and the type of symbol designating command are winning. It is defined in the time performance information determination table.

The winning effect information 1 (“1A” to “1D”) defined in the winning effect information determination table is mainly used in the sub-control circuit 7200, and is a color change effect of a holding symbol indicating a holding ball of a special symbol. It is the production information used when determining the content regarding. When the sub control circuit 7200 receives the winning effect information 1 determined based on the winning effect information determining table, the sub control circuit 7200 causes the holding pattern color change effect included in the classification of the winning effect information 1 to be obtained. One effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns related to.

In addition, the winning effect information 2 (“2A” to “2D”) defined in the winning effect information determination table is pre-reading effect (pre-reading continuous) mainly in the sub-control circuit 7200 based on the reserved ball of the special symbol. It is the production information used when determining the content regarding (production). When the sub control circuit 7200 receives the winning effect information 2 determined on the basis of the winning effect information determination table, the sub control circuit 7200 causes the sub-control circuit 7200 to include a plurality of types of pre-reading effects included in the classification of the winning effect information 2. Select one performance pattern from the patterns.

When referring to the winning effect information determination table of the present embodiment, for example, when the "big hit" is won at the time of winning the first starting mouth, regardless of the type of the big hit selection symbol command, "1A" as the winning effect information 1 Is determined, and “2A” is determined as the winning effect information 2.

[Variable production pattern determination table]
Next, the variation effect pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 121.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 7070 (main CPU 7071), at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the winning type (“big hit”, “small hit” or “miss”), symbol designating command, big hit selection symbol command, The variation effect pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the information such as the variation time. The variation effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern of this special symbol.

The variable effect pattern (information included in a special symbol effect start command described later) determined based on the variable effect pattern determination table is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). .. Then, when the sub control circuit 7200 receives the information of the fluctuating effect pattern, the sub control circuit 7200 determines the type of effect based on the received information such as the fluctuating effect pattern and the game state.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the variation effect pattern determination table, a combination of the symbol designating command, the jackpot selection symbol command, and the variation time of the special symbol determined at the time of winning (starting winning a prize), and the variation display of the special symbol The relationship with the type of effect (variable effect pattern) executed by the sub-control circuit 7200 is defined therein.

In this embodiment, the fluctuating effect pattern is represented by a two-digit number, and the parameters of “upper” (first digit) and “lower” (second digit) described in the fluctuating effect pattern column in FIG. It is expressed as a combination with parameters. For example, the symbol designating command determined at the time of winning (starting winning a prize) is "zA1", the jackpot selection symbol command is "z0", and the variation time of the special symbol is "15000 msec". The parameter is “C1” (combination of high-order “C” and low-order “1”).

In addition, in this embodiment, the information of the variable effect parameter is included in the special symbol effect start command described later. At this time, the “upper” parameter and the “lower” parameter defined in the variation effect pattern column are stored in different parameter areas. Therefore, in the variation effect pattern determination table, the “upper” parameter and the “lower” parameter of the variation effect pattern are separately defined.

<Structure of data table stored in sub-main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub main ROM 7205 of the sub control circuit 7200 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Variable production table]
First, the variation effect table will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, as described above, by the control of the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210), various effects are executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The content of the effect performed at this time (effect pattern) is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable effect of the special symbol included in the later-described special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200. It is determined based on pattern information and the like. The variation effect table is referred to when determining the effect contents (effect pattern) based on information such as the effect effect pattern and the game state.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the variation effect table, a combination of various information (including information of the variation effect pattern) determined at the time of winning (at the time of starting mouth winning) and the effect pattern determined by the lottery (“EN00 ~"EN44") and effect contents, and a random number value for selecting (determining) each effect pattern and a selection rate (probability of winning) are defined. In addition, in this embodiment, as various information determined at the time of winning (at the time of starting mouth winning), types of special symbol variation effect patterns (“A0” to “A4”, “B1” to “B3” and “C1”). ~ "CF"), the variation time of the special symbol, the winning type ("big hit", "small hit" or "miss"), the symbol designating command and the big hit selection symbol command are defined in the variation effect table.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol defined in the variation effect table is almost the same as the effect time of the corresponding effect pattern. Further, the random number value defined in the variation effect table is a random number value acquired in the sub lottery process, and is any one of "0" to "999" (1000 types).

When determining the effect pattern with reference to the variation effect table of the present embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started is “C1”, and when selecting the effect pattern When the random number value acquired in any one of the values is "0" to "499", "EN15" is selected as the effect pattern. In this case, an effect called "normal reach effect A" is performed during the variable display period (15000 msec) of the special symbol. Then, with the end of the "normal reach effect A", the "big hit" mode is displayed in the display area 7013a of the display device 7013, and the special symbol stops changing.

<Outline of drawing control method>
Next, an outline of the drawing process executed by the display control circuit 7230 when the drawing request is output from the host control circuit 7210 to the display control circuit 7230 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. Note that FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) at the time of drawing processing.

In this embodiment, data (compressed data) of images (moving images and/or still images) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 7013 is stored in the CGROM 7206 in the CGROM board 7204. When the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 7230, the display control circuit 7230 first reads the image compression data from the CGROM 7206 and decodes (expands) it. At this time, when the moving image compressed data is read, the moving image decoder 7234 in the display control circuit 7230 decodes the moving image compressed data, and when the still image compressed data is read, in the display control circuit 7230. The still image decoder 7235 decodes the still image compressed data.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data in a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In this embodiment, a movie buffer or texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 7250 (external RAM) or a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 7237 is designated as the texture source. For example, when displaying one moving image, the expanded moving image data (decoding result) is written to the movie buffer in the SDRAM 7250. Further, for example, when displaying one still image, the decompressed still image data is written to the sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 7237.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 specifies a rendering target for writing the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 7250 (external RAM), a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 7237, or the like can be designated.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 operates the rendering engine 7241 to perform the rendering process on the decoding result of the image data written to the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. It should be noted that in this process, the rendering process is performed according to specified information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 7240) such as enlargement/reduction and rotation of the moving image.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 displays the rendering result (display output data) written in the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 7013.

In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. Then, when writing the rendering result from the rendering engine 7241 to the frame buffer, the frame buffer to which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when a rendering result is written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written in the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written in one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result in one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result in the other frame buffer are alternately switched for each frame.

Further, in the above-described rendering result writing process and display process flow, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 7013 in the next frame (one The frame buffer function can be switched from the drawing function to the display function). The rendering result written to the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 7013 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result display processing in one frame buffer and the rendering result display processing in the other frame buffer are alternately switched for each frame and executed.

<Outline of voice reproduction control method>
Next, the outline of the audio reproduction process executed by the audio/LED control circuit 7220 when the sound request is output from the host control circuit 7210 to the audio/LED control circuit 7220 will be described with reference back to FIG. 104.

In the present embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 7011 is stored in the CGROM 7206. The audio data stored in the CGROM 7206 is phrase compressed data specified by a 13-bit long phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH), and is a series of background music for one song (BGM) or a group of pieces. Up to 8192 types (=213) of effect sounds (preliminary sounds) and the like are stored in association with the phrase numbers NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by the set value (operation parameter) of the voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 7210 to the command register 7225 of the voice/LED control circuit 7220.

The voice command is used for Individual Write for transmitting a 1-byte length set value to any one of the many voice control registers built in the voice/LED control circuit 7220, or a continuous series of N voice commands. It is used for Block Write to transmit N set values to the audio control register group.

In any case, the voice control register to be accessed is specified by a 1-byte register address, and the storage capacity of each voice control register is 1 byte. Further, in this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured by dividing into seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven sections, the total number of voice control registers is theoretically 7×256 at maximum.

In this embodiment, the specific register address is the voice control register for register bank setting in all the register banks. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7×256 voice control registers, the register control bank is written in the voice control register for bank setting by the preceding voice command, and then the voice control belonging to the register control bank is written. A register is specified by a register address having a 1-byte length.

By the way, in the operation of setting the set value to the voice control register, it is not always necessary to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM 7206 or A sequence code can be designated to complete a series of setting operations for a group of voice control registers. In order to realize such an operation, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 includes four simple access controllers 7226a (simple Access Controller) and 16 sequencers 7226b (Sequencer) shown in FIG. ..

Explaining from SAC (Simple Access Code) data for operating the simple access controller 7226a, SAC data includes a register address (1 byte) of a voice control register and a set value (1 byte) to the voice control register. It is a data group of a maximum of 512 sets (=1024 bytes) associated with each other, and means an aggregate terminated by a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 104).

In the case of the present embodiment, up to 8192 kinds (=213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 7210 stores the SAC number of 13-bit length in the voice control register for SAC control (see FIG. 104). ), the simple access controller 7226a can be made to function. The simple access controller 7226a which has started the function sequentially reads the group of SAC data specified by the SAC number from the CGROM 7206, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

Therefore, the host control circuit 7210 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the voice control register for SAC control, and can perform a series of setting operations without individually specifying the register address of the voice control register. You can give instructions. In the SAC control voice control register, a standby time (standby information as attached data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set, and the SAC number to the SAC control voice control register can be set. It is also possible to delay the setting start timing of the voice control register by the simple access controller 7226a from the write timing of.

Next, a sequence code (Sequence Code) for causing the sequencer 7226b to function will be described. Like the SAC data, the sequence code is also a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) in the voice control register are associated (see FIG. 104). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can define a plurality of operation steps (a plurality of sequence steps) that can be intermittently executed after a predetermined waiting time.

The sequencer (Sequencer) control voice control register includes, for each of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15, a standby time (standby information) that defines the start timing of the setting operation, the presence/absence of a repetitive operation, and the number of repetitions (loop information). ) Can be included. Therefore, the sequence code specifies a series of sound effects that are executed over a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 104, the plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps are terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of the present embodiment, a maximum of 8192 kinds (=213) of sequence codes can be provided, and the host control circuit 7210 uses a sequencer (Sequencer) to output a 13-bit length sequence code number and attached data that defines the operation of the sequencer. By writing in the control voice control register, a sequence of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 7226b.

In the present embodiment, such SAC data and sequence codes are stored in advance in the CGROM 7206 only in the required sets, and the group of SAC data and the group of sequence codes are specified by the SAC number and the sequence code number. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the voice command for Write defines not only the direct setting operation to the voice control register but also the indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 7226a and the sequencer 7226b. It is also included when doing.

In order to realize the above operation, the host control circuit 7210 and the voice/LED control circuit 7220 include a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting/receiving 1-byte data and a 2-bit length operation management capable of transmitting operation management data. A data line (address bus), a 2-bit length control signal line capable of controlling read/write operations, and a chip select signal line for selecting the audio/LED control circuit 7220 are connected.

The parallel signal line is realized by the data bus of the host control circuit 7210, and the operation management data line is realized by the address bus of the host control circuit 7210. The audio/LED control circuit 7220 is provided with three port numbers PORT having the upper 6 bits in common and the lower 2 bits being 00, 01, and 10, and the host control circuit 7210 uses these ports. When the I/OREAD command or the I/OWRITE command for the number PORT is executed, the chip select signal CS becomes the active level in any case.

The data output to the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address bus when the I/OREAD instruction or the I/OWRITE instruction is executed becomes the operation management data A0 to A1 for the voice/LED control circuit 7220, and these 2 bits A0. Based on A1 to A1, it is specified whether the 1-byte data of the data bus at that time is a register address, or write data or read data.

That is, if the address data is [00], the data bus data at that timing is evaluated as a register address, while if the address data is [01], the data bus data at that timing is write data or read data. It becomes data. Note that when the I/OREAD instruction is executed, it is read data, and when the I/OWRITE instruction is executed, it is write data.

Therefore, the operation of transmitting the voice command for writing the predetermined set value in the predetermined voice control register is performed by changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice/LED control circuit 7220 while changing the I/OWRITE command. It is realized by executing continuously. Specifically, the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] → [voice control register]. To write data to], a predetermined voice command transmission operation is realized.

When transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the control data (standby information, loop information, etc.) that accompanies this, the write data has a multi-byte length, When the register address of the register is continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] is repeated in the order of [00]→[01]→[01]→[01], and the write data of a plurality of bytes is transmitted. ..

The voice command transmitted in this manner is subsequently executed in the voice/LED control circuit 7220 as long as there is no communication abnormality. However, if a communication error is recognized, such as when the data of a plurality of bytes does not match each other, the voice command is not activated. Then, the error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) is an I/OREAD instruction that shifts the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10]. Can be received by executing.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the final cycle in which the operation management data A0 to A1 are transited from [00]→[01]→... [01]→[10], error information (abnormality) of a plurality of bit lengths is obtained. FFH) can be obtained. Then, by retransmitting the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the voice effect suddenly stops.

On the other hand, in the data read operation by the I/OREAD operation, the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice/LED control circuit 7220 are transited, and the I/OWRITE instruction and the I/OREAD instruction are continuously executed. It will be realized. When the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I/OREAD instructions are made continuous for the required number of bytes.

Specifically, first, as an I/OWRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [register address of voice control register for storing operation status ( 1 byte length)] is output. Next, if the I/OREAD instruction is executed for the port number PORT in which the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], the necessary data such as the operation status can be obtained from the predetermined voice control register. You can

The audio reproduced by the audio/LED control circuit 7220 having the above-described configuration is a digital audio signal of the audio/LED control circuit 7220 in the form of a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, SD0, SD1, SD2). The signal is transmitted to the power amplifier 7262, class D amplified by the digital audio power amplifier 7262, and supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 is supplied to the lower speaker for bass, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 7262 is provided to the player. Four normal speakers (see, for example, FIG. 105 (L0, R0, L1, R1)) and two deep bass (vibration) speakers (see, for example, FIG. 105 (SUB0, SUB0, SUB1).

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 7071 of the main control circuit 7070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 131.

[Main control main processing]
First, the main control main processing under the control of the main CPU 7071 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main control main processing in the present embodiment.

When the pachinko gaming machine 7001 is powered on, first, the main CPU 7071 performs initial setting processing (S4001). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 performs processing such as access permission to the main RAM 7073, backup restoration, and work area initialization. Next, the main CPU 7071 performs an initial value random number update process (S4002). In this process, the main CPU 7071 updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special symbol control process (S4003). In this process, the main CPU 7071 performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game, the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display device 7061. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs normal symbol control processing (S4004). In this process, the main CPU 7071 carries out a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the ordinary symbol game and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 7062.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a control process of the symbol display device (S4005). In this process, the main CPU 7071, based on the execution result of the special symbol control process (S4003) and the normal symbol control process (S4004), special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), and the variable of the normal symbol Performs display control of the display.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a game information data generation process (S4006). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 generates game information data to be transmitted to the payout/launch control circuit 7123, the sub control circuit 7200, a hall computer of a game shop, etc., and stores the game information data in the main RAM 7073.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a storage/game state data generation process (S4007). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 generates storage/game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/game state data in the main RAM 7073.

After the processing of S4007, the main CPU 7071 returns the processing to the processing of S4002, and repeats the above-described processing of S4002 and thereafter.

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol control process performed in S4003 in the main control main process (see FIG. 124) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol control processing in this embodiment. Note that the parenthesized numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parallel to the reference numerals of the processing steps shown in FIG. It is stored in the area. The main CPU 7071 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

First, the main CPU 7071 loads the control state flag (S4011). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 7073.

The main CPU 7071 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S4012 to S4020 described below based on the value of the control state flag loaded in S4011. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of S4012 to S4020.

Further, the main CPU 7071 executes the process of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of S4012 to S4020. In the period before reaching the predetermined timing, the process of each step is not executed and other subroutine processes are executed. Further, a system timer interrupt process described later (see FIG. 129 described later) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Then, when the processing of S4011 ends, the main CPU 7071 performs a special symbol storage check processing (S4012).

In this process, the main CPU 7071, when the control state flag is a value ("00") indicating the special symbol storage check process, checks the variable number of the special symbols for variable display, and if the number is not "0" In the case of (holding ball), processing such as hit determination, determination of special symbol, determination of variation pattern of special symbol, etc. is performed. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variation time management process (S4013) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern determined in this process. Set the waiting time timer for the variable time of the special symbol. That is, by this process, after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the process of S4012 has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described later is set to be executed.

On the other hand, when the number of held balls is “0” (when there is no held ball), the main CPU 7071 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. The details of the special symbol storage check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special symbol variation time management process (S4013). In this process, the main CPU 7071, the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process ("01"), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag, the special symbol display described later. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (S4014) is set, and the post-determination waiting time is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of S4013 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special symbol display time management process (S4014). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the wait determination result set in the process of S4013 has elapsed. Is a "big hit" or a "small hit". When the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (S4015) described later in the control state flag, The waiting time is set to the time corresponding to the big hit start interval. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S4014 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described below is set to be executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (S4020) described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. The details of the special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later.

Next, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4014 that the hit determination result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 7071 performs a big hit start interval management process (S4015). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines whether the control state flag is the value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of S4014 has passed, the first CPU 7071 In order to open the special winning opening 7053 or the second special winning opening 7054, the variables located in the main RAM 7073 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 7072.

Further, in this processing, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described special winning opening opening processing (S4016) in the control state flag, and also opens the special winning opening upper limit time (for example, 30 sec). Is set to the special winning opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the after-mentioned special winning opening opening processing.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special winning opening opening process (S4016). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the opening. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied).

When one of the conditions is satisfied in S4016, the main CPU 7071 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 7073 in order to close a predetermined special winning opening (first special winning opening or second special winning opening). To do. Then, the main CPU 7071 sets, in the control state flag, a value (“05”) indicating the after-main-prize-win remaining ball monitoring process (S4017), and sets the after-winning-win remaining ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. .. That is, by this process, after the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time set in S4017 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process described later.

In addition, in S4016, the main CPU 7071 transmits an inter-round display command to the sub control circuit 7200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening opening process.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S4017). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is the value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing, and when the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the main winning opening opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times of opening the special winning opening (that is, the final round) is satisfied.

When the main CPU 7071 determines in S4017 that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 7071 sets the waiting time timer to the time corresponding to the inter-round interval. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing described later is set to be executed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4017 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval. (Big hit end interval time) is set to the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the big hit ending interval set in S4017 has elapsed, the big hit ending interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, in S4017, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not greater than or equal to the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 7071 performs the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing ( S4018). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 opens the special winning opening when the control state flag has a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time before opening special opening management processing and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The value of the frequency counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 7071 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 sec) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this processing, the processing for opening the special winning opening (S4016) is set to be executed again after the processing of S4018.

Further, in S4018, the main CPU 7071 transmits a special winning opening open display command to the sub control circuit 7200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing.

Further, in S4017, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, it performs the big hit ending interval processing (S4019). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval processing, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, the value indicating the special symbol game end processing (“ 08") in the control status flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set to be executed after the processing of S4019. The details of the big hit end interval process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the main CPU 7071 performs control to shift the game state to the probability variation game state when the big hit symbol is the probability variation symbol, and shifts the game state to the normal game state when the big hit symbol is the non-probability variation symbol. Control. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to "small hit", the main CPU 7071 determines that the gaming state after the "small hit" game is finished is more than the gaming state controlled when "small hit" is won. Is controlled so as not to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special symbol game ending process when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is finished, or when the “miss” is won (S4020).

In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 7071 updates the storage so as to decrease the data (starting storage information) indicating the number of holdings by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 7071 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of S4020, the special symbol storage check process (S4012) described above is set to be executed.

After the processing of S4020, the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol control processing, and moves the processing to S4004 of the main control main processing (see FIG. 124).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flags to "00" and "01". , “02”, and “08” in that order. Thereby, the main CPU 7071 performs the special symbol storage check process (S4012), the special symbol variation time management process (S4013), the special symbol display time management process (S4014), and the special symbol game end process (S4020) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing.

Further, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to "00", " Set in the order of "01", "02", "03". Thereby, the main CPU 7071 performs the special symbol storage check process (S4012), the special symbol variation time management process (S4013), the special symbol display time management process (S4014), and the big hit start interval management process (S4015) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

Furthermore, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06” when the shift control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 7071 performs the special winning opening opening process (S4016), the special winning opening remaining ball monitoring process (S4017), and the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (S4018) in this order at predetermined timings. The big hit game or the small hit game is executed.

It should be noted that during the big hit game, when the ending condition of the big hit game state is satisfied, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, “08”. As a result, the main CPU 7071 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (S4016), the special winning hole remaining ball monitoring process (S4017), the big hit ending interval process (S4019), and the special symbol game ending process (S4020) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing to end the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process of S4004 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 124 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process, as described later.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched depending on the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the present embodiment as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol storage check process performed in S4012 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 125) will be described. Note that FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol storage check process in this embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 loads a control state flag (S4031). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 7073.

Next, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the control state flag is the value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (S4032). In S4032, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in S4032), the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol storage check process, and the process is the special symbol control process (Fig. 125). Refer to).

On the other hand, in S4032, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is “00” (YES in S4032), the main CPU 7071 determines that the second starting mouth winning (variable display of the second special symbol) It is determined whether or not the reserved number (second startup memory number) is "0" (S4033).

In S4033, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of held second starting mouth winnings is not “0” (NO in S4033), the main CPU 7071 determines whether the number of held second starting mouth winnings is the second. The value of the starting memory number is subtracted by "1" (S4034).

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 7073, It is determined whether or not there is a starting memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is changing or is on hold. In the second special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing second special symbol is stored as the starting memory. Then, in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times being held. Data (information) is stored as a starting memory. The data included in the starting memory stored in each of the second special symbol starting memory areas is, for example, data such as a big hit determination random number value and a big hit symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning the second starting opening 7045. ..

After the processing of S4034, the main CPU 7071 performs the special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning combination (S4035). In this process, the main CPU 7071 transfers (stores) the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. Then, after the processing of S4035, the main CPU 7071 performs the processing of S4040 described below.

Here, returning to the process of S4033 again, in S4033, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of retained second winning opening winning prizes is “0” (YES in S4033), the main CPU 7071 determines It is determined whether or not the reserved number (first start memory number) of the first start winning a prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0" (S4036).

In S4036, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of held first start opening prizes is "0" (YES in S4036), the main CPU 7071 performs a demo display process (S4037). Then, after the processing of S4037, the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol storage check processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 125).

In the demo display processing of S4037, the main CPU 7071 sets the demo display permission value in the main RAM 7073. That is, the main CPU 7071 determines that the state in which the number of held first start winning and second start winning is "0" (the start memory of the special symbol game is "0") is a predetermined time (for example, If maintained for 30 sec), a predetermined value is set as the demo display permission value. When the demo display permission value is the predetermined value in the demo display processing of S4037, the main CPU 7071 sets the demo display command data in the main RAM 7073. Then, the demo display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 7071 of the main control circuit 7070 to the host control circuit 7210 in the sub control circuit 7200. Upon receiving the demo display command data, the sub control circuit 7200 causes the display area 7013a of the display device 7013 to display a demo screen.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4036 that the number of held first starting mouth winnings is not "0" (NO in S4036), the main CPU 7071 corresponds to the number of held first starting mouth winnings. The value of the first starting memory number is subtracted by "1" (S4038).

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 7073, It is determined whether or not there is a starting memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing or is on hold. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory. Then, in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times being held. Data (information) is stored as a starting memory. The data included in the start-up memory stored in each first special symbol start-up storage area is, for example, data such as a big-hit determination random number value and a big-hit symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning the first starting opening 7044. ..

After the processing of S4038, the main CPU 7071 performs the special symbol memory transfer processing based on the first starting opening winning combination (S4039). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 transfers (stores) the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. After the processing of S4039, the main CPU 7071 performs the processing of S4040 described below.

Next, after the processing of S4035 or S4039, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state variation number counter is "0" (S4040).

In S4040, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the time saving state variation number counter is “0” (YES in S4040), the main CPU 7071 performs the process of S4044 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4040 that the value of the time saving state variation number counter is not “0” (NO in S4040), the main CPU 7071 subtracts “1” from the value of the time saving state variation number counter. Yes (S4041).

After the processing of S4041, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state variation number counter is “0” (S4042).

In S4042, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the time saving state variation number counter is not “0” (NO in S4042), the main CPU 7071 performs the process of S4044 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4042 that the value of the time saving state variation counter is “0” (YES in S4042), the main CPU 7071 sets the time saving flag to “0” (S4043). ).

After the processing of S4043, if S4040 is YES, or if S4042 is NO, the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management processing (S4044). In addition, in this processing, the main CPU 7071 transmits a hold subtraction command and a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 7200.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a big hit determination process (S4045). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines (determines) which one of the “big hit”, “small hit” and “miss” has been won by lottery based on the big hit determination random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting mouth.

Next, the main CPU 7071 clears the information (data) in the storage area used for the previous variable display (S4046). Next, the main CPU 7071 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (S4047). Then, after the processing of S4047, the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol storage check processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 125).

[Special symbol display time management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol display time management process performed in S4014 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 125) will be described. Note that FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol display time management processing in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (S4051). In S4051, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in S4051), the main CPU 7071 performs the special symbol display time management process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 125).

On the other hand, in S4051, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in S4051), the main CPU 7071 determines that the waiting time timer It is determined whether the value (waiting time) is "0" (S4052). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the waiting time after the fluctuation set by the waiting time timer (fluctuation start waiting time) has been exhausted.

In S4052, if the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in S4052), the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol display time management process, and the process is the special symbol control process. (See FIG. 125). On the other hand, in S4052, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in S4052), the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the special symbol game is “big hit”. It is determined (S4053). Further, in this process, the main CPU 7071 simultaneously transmits a special effect stop command to the sub control circuit 7200.

In S4053, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the special symbol game is not a “big hit” (when S4053 is NO determination), the main CPU 7071 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game ending process. Set (S4054). Then, after the processing of S4054, the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 125).

On the other hand, in S4053, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in S4053), the main CPU 7071 sets the big hit flag to the ON state (S4055). The big hit flag is a flag indicating whether or not to play a big hit game.

Next, the main CPU 7071 clears the value of the time saving state variation counter, the value of the time saving flag, and the value of the probability variation flag (S4056). Next, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag (S4057).

Next, the main CPU 7071 sets the big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 msec) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S4058). Next, the main CPU 7071 sets a big hit start command (special symbol start display command) corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 7073 (S4059). In addition, in this processing, the main CPU 7071 simultaneously transmits a special symbol hit start display command to the sub control circuit 7200.

Next, the main CPU 7071 sets the round number display LED pattern flag to the on state (S4060). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. Then, after the processing of S4060, the main CPU 7071 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 125).

[Big hit end interval processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the jackpot end interval process performed in S4019 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 125) will be described. Note that FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end interval process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (“07”) indicating a big hit end interval process (S4071).

In S4071, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (NO in S4071), the main CPU 7071 ends the big hit end interval process and executes the process. Is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 125). On the other hand, in S4071, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the control state flag is the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in S4071), the main CPU 7071 determines that the wait timer value is It is determined whether it is "0" (S4072). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted.

In S4072, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in S4072), the main CPU 7071 ends the jackpot end interval process, and the process is a special symbol control process (Fig. 125)). On the other hand, in S4072, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in S4072), the main CPU 7071 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag ( S4073).

Next, the main CPU 7071 clears the round number distribution flag (sets it to “0”) (S4074).

Next, the main CPU 7071 sets a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (S4075). Further, in this processing, the main CPU 7071 simultaneously transmits a special symbol per end display command to the sub control circuit 7200. Next, the main CPU 7071 clears the big hit flag (S4076).

Next, the main CPU 7071 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 116 to 119), and sets the value of the probability variation flag based on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of the selected symbol command at the time of jackpot (S4077). .. Next, the main CPU 7071 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 116 to FIG. 119), and sets the value of the time saving flag based on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of the jackpot selection symbol command (S4078). ..

Next, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the value of the time saving flag is “1” (whether the time saving flag is in the ON state) (S4079). In S4079, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the value of the time saving flag is not "1" (NO in S4079), the main CPU 7071 ends the big hit ending interval process, and the process is a special symbol control process (Fig. 125). Refer to).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 7071 determines in S4079 that the value of the time saving flag is “1” (YES in S4079), the main CPU 7071 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 116 to 119). Then, based on the game state at the time of big hit and the type of selection symbol command at the time of big hit, the value of the corresponding time saving number is set in the time saving state variation number counter (S4080). Then, after the processing of S4080, the main CPU 7071 ends the big hit ending interval processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 125).

[System timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 7071 interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even while the main processing is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 7071 executes a system timer interrupt process in response to a clock pulse generated by the clock generation circuit 7074 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Here, the system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 7071 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. Note that FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the system timer interrupt processing in this embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 saves the data (information) in each register (S4121). Next, the main CPU 7071 performs random number update processing (S4122). In this process, the main CPU 7071 updates various random number values extracted from the big hit determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the falling determination counter, the variation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. .. The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a fixed timing in a 2 msec cycle to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a switch input detection process (S4123). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 detects winning or passing of various starting openings, various winning openings, and the ball passage detector 7043. The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs timer update processing (S4124). Specifically, the main CPU 7071 has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 7070 and the sub control circuit 7200 and a special winning opening opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening. Update process.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a command output process (S4125). In this process, the main CPU 7071 outputs various commands such as a winning command and a variation command to the host control circuit 7210 of the sub control circuit 7200.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a game information output process (S4126). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 7070, the sub control circuit 7200, the payout/launch control circuit 7123, etc., to the hall computer of the game store.

Next, the main CPU 7071 restores the data in each register saved in S4121 (S4127). After the processing of S4127, the main CPU 7071 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the switch input detection processing performed in S4123 during the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 129) will be described. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection processing in this embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 performs a starting opening winning detection process (S4131). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) into the first starting opening 7044 or the second starting opening 7045. That is, the main CPU 7071 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first starting opening winning ball sensor 7044a or the second starting opening winning ball sensor 7045a. The details of the starting mouth winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a general winning hole passage detection process (S4132). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 7051 or 7052. That is, the main CPU 7071 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the general winning ball sensor 7051a or 7052a. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 7051 or 7052 is detected, the main CPU 7071 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S4133). In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054. That is, the main CPU 7071 detects whether or not the winning of the game ball is detected by the first big winning opening solenoid 7053b or the second big winning opening solenoid 7054b. When the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 7053 or the second big winning opening 7054 is detected, the main CPU 7071 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs gate passage detection processing (S4134). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 7043. That is, the main CPU 7071 detects whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 7043a. Next, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the ball passage detector 7043, the main CPU 7071 performs various predetermined processes corresponding to the passage. After the processing of S4134, the main CPU 7071 ends the switch input detection processing, and moves the processing to S4124 of the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 129).

[Starting mouth winning detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the starting mouth winning detection process performed in S4131 of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 130) will be described. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting mouth winning detection process in the present embodiment.

First, the main CPU 7071 determines, based on the output signal of the first starting opening winning ball sensor 7044a, whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 7044 is detected (S4141).

When the main CPU 7071 determines in S4141 that the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 7044 is not detected (NO in S4141), the main CPU 7071 performs the process of S4149 described below. On the other hand, in S4141, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 7044 is detected (YES in S4141), the main CPU 7071 determines the payout information corresponding to the first starting opening winning. Is set in the main RAM 7073 (S4142). In the present embodiment, when the game balls win the first starting opening 7044, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the processing of S4142, payout information of a predetermined number of game balls is set.

After the processing of S4142, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the number of reserve balls) of the first start opening winning prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is less than “4” (S4143).

In S4143, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of held first start-up winning awards is not less than “4” (NO in S4143), the main CPU 7071 performs the process of S4149 described below. On the other hand, in S4143, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of held first starting mouth winnings is less than “4” (YES in S4143), the main CPU 7071 determines the number of held first starting mouth winnings. A process of adding “1” is performed (S4144).

After the processing of S4144, the main CPU 7071 acquires various random number values used in the lottery and stores the acquired various random number values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 7073 (S4145). Specifically, the main CPU 7071 acquires various random number values such as a big hit determination random number value, a symbol random number value, and a fall determination random number value.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (S4146). In this process, the main CPU 7071 refers to the big hit random number determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 112) and the symbol determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 114), and obtains the big hit determination disorder acquired in S4145. Based on the numerical value and the random number of the design, it is determined whether or not the "big hit", and in the case of the "big hit", the big hit design (production identification design) to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 7013. Make a selection (judgment).

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a determination process for the presence or absence of a fall (S4147). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 performs a fall lottery based on the fall determination random number value acquired in S4145, and determines whether or not a fall has occurred. Thereby, the main CPU 7071 obtains the falling lottery information (“0”: no falling, or “1”: falling).

Next, the main CPU 7071 sets the hold addition command data at the time of winning the first starting opening in the main RAM 7073 (S4148).

In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines the big hit random number determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 112), the symbol determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 114), the big hit type determination table (see FIGS. 116 to 119). ) And the winning performance information determination table (see FIG. 120), the game state (“normal”, “probability change”, “shorter time”), winning type (“big hit”, “small hit”, “miss”) )), starting memory number (holding number of the first special symbol), symbol designating command, selection symbol command at the time of big hit, performance information at the time of winning, result information of big hit judgment, fall lottery information, etc., based on information such as hold addition command The information (transmission content) to be included in is determined.

At this time, the gaming state is obtained by referring to the values of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and the winning type is obtained by referring to the jackpot random number determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 112), The symbol designation command and the big hit selection symbol command are acquired by referring to the symbol determination table (first starting opening) (see FIG. 114), and the winning effect information is the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 120). It is obtained by referring to. The result information of the jackpot determination is acquired in the process of S4146, and the falling lottery information is acquired in the process of S4147.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S4148, the hold addition command at the time of winning the first starting opening is transmitted from the main CPU 7071 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). Then, based on the hold addition command at the time of winning the first start opening, the sub-control circuit 7200 selects the effect pattern of the hold effect and the prefetch effect.

After the processing of S4148, or if S4141 or S4143 is NO determination, whether the main CPU 7071 has detected the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 7045 based on the output signal of the second starting opening winning ball sensor 7045a. It is determined whether or not (S4149).

In S4149, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 7045 is not detected (NO in S4149), the main CPU 7071 ends the starting opening winning detection processing, and the processing To S4132 of the switch input detection processing (see FIG. 130). On the other hand, in S4149, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 7045 is detected (YES in S4149), the main CPU 7071 determines the payout information corresponding to the second starting opening winning. Is set in the main RAM 7073 (S4150). In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the second starting opening 7045, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the process of S4150, payout information of a predetermined number of game balls is set.

After the processing of S4150, the main CPU 7071 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of reserved balls) of the second starting opening winning prize (variable display of the second special symbol) is less than “4” (S4151).

When the main CPU 7071 determines in S4151 that the number of held second start opening winning a prizes is not less than "4" (NO in S4151), the main CPU 7071 ends the starting opening winning detection processing and switches the processing. The process moves to S4132 of the input detection process (see FIG. 130). On the other hand, in S4151, when the main CPU 7071 determines that the number of held second starting mouth winnings is less than “4” (YES in S4151), the main CPU 7071 determines the number of held second starting mouth winnings. A process of adding “1” is performed (S4152). After the processing of S4152, the main CPU 7071 acquires various random number values used for the lottery, and stores the acquired various random number values in a predetermined area of the main RAM 7073 (S4153). Specifically, the main CPU 7071 acquires various random number values such as a big hit determination random number value, a symbol random number value, and a fall determination random number value.

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (S4154). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 refers to the big hit random number determination table (second starting opening) (see FIG. 113) and the symbol determination table (second starting opening) (see FIG. 115), and obtains the big hit determination disorder acquired in S4153. Based on the numerical value and the random number of the design, it is determined whether or not it is a "big hit", and in the case of a big hit, selection of a big hit design (production identification design) to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 7013 ( Judgment).

Next, the main CPU 7071 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a fall (S4155). In this processing, the main CPU 7071 performs a fall lottery based on the fall determination random number value acquired in S4153, and determines whether or not a fall has occurred. Thereby, the main CPU 7071 obtains the falling lottery information (“0”: no falling, or “1”: falling).

Next, the main CPU 7071 sets the hold addition command data at the time of winning the second starting opening in the main RAM 7073 (S4156).

In this process, the main CPU 7071 determines the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) (see FIG. 113), the symbol determination table (second starting port) (see FIG. 115), the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 116 to 119). ) And a winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 120), a game state (“normal”, “probability change”, “shorter time”), winning type (“big hit”, “miss”), start memory Information to be included in the hold addition command, based on information such as number (holding number of the second special symbol), symbol designating command, big hit selection symbol command, winning effect information, big hit determination result information, falling lottery information, etc. Send content) is determined.

At this time, the gaming state is obtained by referring to the values of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and the winning type is obtained by referring to the jackpot random number determination table (second starting port) (see FIG. 113), The symbol designating command and the big hit selection symbol command are acquired by referring to the symbol determination table (second starting opening) (see FIG. 115), and the winning effect information is the winning effect information determination table (see FIG. 120). It is obtained by referring to. The result information of the jackpot determination is acquired in the process of S4154, and the falling lottery information is acquired in the process of S4155.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S4156, the hold addition command at the time of winning the second starting opening is transmitted from the main CPU 7071 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). The sub-control circuit 7200 selects an effect pattern of an on-hold effect and a pre-reading effect based on the on-hold addition command at the time of winning the second starting opening. After the processing of S4156, the main CPU 7071 terminates the starting mouth winning detection processing, and moves the processing to S4132 of the switch input detection processing (see FIG. 130).

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 170, contents of various processes executed by various control circuits in the sub-board 7202 of the sub-control circuit 7200 (both of which are, for example, see FIG. 102) will be described. The sub control circuit 7200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 (see, for example, FIG. 102) and performs various processes based on these various commands.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 132, the sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit 7210 (see, for example, FIG. 102, the same applies hereinafter) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main processing according to this embodiment. The sub-control main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the sub-control main processing described with reference to FIG. 132 and the sub-control main processing described later (see FIGS. 143, 144, and 145), the same processing is given different reference numerals for convenience of description. ing. For example, various initialization processes will be described as examples. Various initialization processes of FIG. 132 (step S4201), various initialization processes of FIG. 143 (step S4381), and various initialization processes of FIG. 144 (step S4391). The various initialization processes (step S4401) in FIG. 144 are substantially the same processes, but different reference numerals are given.

First, the host control circuit 7210 performs various initialization processes (step S4201). In this processing, the host control circuit 7210 performs various initialization processing such as hardware initialization processing, device initialization processing, various application initialization processing, backup data restoration initialization processing, and RTC acquisition processing. To do. When the game data is erased by clearing the RAM, a random number initialization process is also performed. The host control circuit 7210 also clears the counter of the watchdog timer each time each initialization process ends. It should be noted that at the time of startup, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and if the service pulse is not written thereafter (time-out), the power interruption process is performed. The watchdog timer is cleared at the start of each process in the main loop of the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the transition to the power interruption process.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 enters the main loop and performs RTC acquisition processing based on the RTC time, that is, processing for acquiring the current time (step S4202).

The host control circuit 7210 performs random number initialization processing in step S4203. This random number initialization processing will be described later.

The host control circuit 7210 acquires the control code of the accessory in step S4204, and performs a synchronization process between the accessory and the solenoid (step S4205). These processes will be described later in "Product solenoid control process".

The host control circuit 7210 performs sub-device input processing in step S4206. In this processing, the host control circuit 7210 obtains information on the operation content based on the input state of the operation means (determination processing as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the button). And so on. This sub-device input processing (step S4206) includes brightness adjustment of LEDs and the like by an operation of a player or the like.

The host control circuit 7210 performs various request control processes in step S4207. In this process, the host control circuit 7210 performs various request control processes such as a sound request control process, an LED request control process, and an accessory request control process. The sound request, the LED request, the accessory request, and the like are stored in the buffer and output to each device after the bank flip in step S4213 described below. This makes it possible to achieve synchronization with drawing. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 enters a packet reception loop in the main loop and performs main-sub command control processing (step S4208). In this process, the host control circuit 7210 performs a command data read process (command reception process) when command data is received from the main CPU 7071 and a command data storage process (received data storage process) in the sub-work RAM 7210a.

The host control circuit 7210 performs a game data backup process in step S4209. In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, first data (magic code, program version and SUM value) and second data (both are magic codes which are information set in the hall menu) as game data used for RAM clear determination. And SUM value). Then, in the game data backup process, the first data is stored in the game data and then backed up in the SRAM 7210b (see FIG. 102). Also, the game data is backed up (mirrored) to another area of the SRAM 7210b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 7210b. At this time, the first data is used to check whether the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is damaged, it is checked whether or not the second data is damaged. At this time, data such as hole menu information stored in all the SRAMs 7210b is also initialized.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 performs an animation request construction process (step S4210). In this processing, the host control circuit 7210 performs command analysis/state setting/lottery processing, receives them, and generates an animation request necessary for performing production control using the display device 7013. In response to the effect control (display) on the display device 7013 executed based on the above, various requests (sound request, lamp request, and accessory request) for operating various effect devices are generated.

The host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S4202 to S4205 until the number of received commands is executed, and after executing the number of received commands, the loop for packet reception is exited. After that, the host control circuit 7210 repeats each process in the main loop through the animation update process (step S4211), the drawing control process (step S4212), and the bank flip/bank flip end wait (step S4213).

The host control circuit 7210 repeatedly executes the example processing (main loop processing) of steps S4202 to S4213 described above in a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS) or about 33.3 msec (30 FPS). The predetermined FPS cycle is time adjusted in step S4213.

The following are timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition playback control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel The sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the LED brightness adjustment processing, the accessory solenoid control processing, the data loading processing, and the sub-random number processing will be described in this order. Note that the order of description of each of the above-mentioned processes is different from the order of processing for convenience of description.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 performs interrupt processing at a cycle of 1 msec. The interrupt processing will be described later in each processing, but here, an example of a typical interrupt processing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). Note that, in the timer interrupt processing briefly described with reference to FIG. 133 and the timer interrupt processing described later (see FIGS. 140 and 142), the same processing is given different reference numerals for convenience of description. For example, to describe the role motor control as an example, the role motor control of FIG. 133 (step S4251), the role motor control of FIG. 140 (step S4352), and the role motor control of FIG. 142 (step S4371). Indicates substantially the same process but different reference numerals.

Referring to FIG. 133, in the timer interrupt processing, the host control circuit 7210 first performs accessory motor control (step S4251). Next, the host control circuit 7210 performs input state determination processing based on the input information of the sub device (step S4252). Next, the host control circuit 7210 performs control processing such as a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013 based on the luminance value (step S4253). Next, the host control circuit 7210 performs sound amplifier check processing (step S4254).

[Sub device input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 creates the sub device input determination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec, and this is created. The sub device is controlled based on the sub device input discrimination information.

When the host control circuit 7210 detects the input state of the sub device with a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the host control circuit 7210 uses the sub device input information and the sub device input information as the sub device input determination information created in the main process based on the detection result. Input ON edge information, sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function), and sub device input OFF edge information are created.

The sub device input processing shown in FIG. 132 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 134 to 137. The sub-device is controlled by the host control circuit 7210 based on input (eg, operation) information, such as a push button. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the sub-device input determination information to be created, (a) a diagram showing an input state of a sub-device detected by a timer interrupt, (b) a main process The sub-device input ON-edge information (with a repeat function) created by the main processing, (c) the sub-device input ON-edge information created by the main processing, FIG. 4D is a diagram showing sub-device OFF edge information created in (d) main processing. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub device input processing. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 137 shows an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 136.

The sub device input information created in the main process is created in accordance with the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt (see FIG. 134(a)), as shown in FIG. 134(b). That is, if the subdevice input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. When the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt is OFF, 0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 134(c), when the sub device input ON edge information is detected that the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt is changed from OFF to ON, only 1 frame is set to 1 in the main process. Is set.

The sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) is information used for control during debugging or when the operation button is pressed for a long time, for example, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 134(d). When it is detected that the input state of the sub device is changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main process. If the ON state of the input state of the sub device continues thereafter, for example, 1 is set to 1 frame after 10 frames have elapsed in the main process as the fixed time until the key repeat starts, and thereafter, in the main process, for example. 1 is set for every 4 frames. In this way, the reason why the first frame is made as long as 10 frames is to make it possible to determine whether or not the sub device has been pressed for a long time, and it is determined that the sub device is not pressed for a long time if the first frame is short. You can

As shown in FIG. 134(e), when the sub device input OFF edge information is detected that the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt is changed from ON to OFF, only one frame is set to 1 in the main process. Is set.

In this embodiment, assuming that there are a plurality of sub devices, the host control circuit 7210 manages the sub device input determination information in bit units. For example, bit0 is a main button, bit1 is a left button, bit2 is a right button, and sub-device input determination information for a maximum of, for example, 32 devices can be managed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the sub device input processing (for example, see step S4206 in FIG. 132) will be described. In this sub-device input processing, for example, sub-device input information, sub-device input ON-edge information, sub-device input ON-edge information (with a repeat function), and sub-device input OFF-edge information, for example, 4 This is a process of creating type information.

The host control circuit 7210 first creates input information of the current sub device based on the input state of the current sub device (step S4301). Specifically, 1 is set when the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set when the sub device is in the OFF state.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 updates the sub-device input information in accordance with the current sub-device input information, that is, the sub-device input information created in step S4301 (step S4302).

Next, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 1 (step S4303). If the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S4303), the host control circuit 7210 sets the subdevice input ON edge information to 1 (step S4304), and the step It moves to S4306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (that is, the previous subdevice input information is 1 or/and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host The control circuit 7210 sets the sub device input ON edge information to 0 (step S4305), and proceeds to step S4306.

In step S4306, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0. If the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 0 (YES in step S4306), the host control circuit 7210 sets the sub device input OFF edge information to 1 (step S4307), and It moves to S4309. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is not 0 (that is, the previous subdevice input information is 0 or/and the current subdevice input information is 1), the host The control circuit 7210 sets the sub device input OFF edge information to 0 (step S4308), and proceeds to step S4309.

In step S4309, the host control circuit 7210 performs sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. Details of this sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

When the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S4309 is completed, the host control circuit 7210 sets the input information of the current sub device to the previous sub device input information (step S4310), and the sub device input The process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not the previous sub device input information is 0 (step S4321). .. If the previous sub device input information is 0 (YES in step S4321), the process advances to step S4322.

In step S4322, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current sub device input information is 1. If the current sub device input information is 1 (YES in step S4322), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4323. On the other hand, if the current sub device input information is not 1 (NO in step S4322), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 0, then the sub device input is ON. The edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 sets the sub device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) to 1 (step S4233), sets 10 frames as the elapsed frame (step S4324), and sets the sub device input ON edge information. (With repeat function) End processing.

If the previous subdevice input information is 1 in step S4321 (NO in step S4321), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4325 in FIG. 137.

137, in step S4325, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current sub device input information is 1. If the current sub device input information is 1 (YES in step S4325), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 1, subtract 1 from the elapsed frame. (Step S4326) and the process moves to step S4327.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4327 whether the elapsed frame is 0 or not. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S4327), the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 1 (step S4328), and the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S4329). The input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

In step S4325, if the current sub device input information is not 1 (NO in step S4325), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 0, host control is performed. The circuit 7210 sets the elapsed frame to 0 (step S4330), and proceeds to step S4331.

When the host control circuit 7210 sets the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) to 0 in step S4331, the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

As described above, the host control circuit 7210 creates the above-described four types of sub-device input determination information in the main processing every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-device based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is possible to easily control the continuous hitting effect of the sub-device, the control of the long-press effect, the control at the time setting, and the control of other operations. It becomes possible.

[Backlight control processing]
Next, a backlight control process (for example, a backlight control process for controlling a backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control process. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the backlight control process.

The backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the SPI asynchronous data write (SPI+DMA) function to continuously and continuously from a serial output terminal of a serial peripheral interface (hereinafter referred to as “SPI”), for example. A signal equivalent to pulse width modulation (hereinafter referred to as “PWM”) is output so that the duty (luminance) can be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to perform backlight control without going through a driver for backlight control.

In the present embodiment, for example, the frequency of the SPI clock is 100 kHz, the SPI1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required to transmit 16 bits of SPI (1 bit of luminance data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, The interrupt is 1 msec, and the number of brightness data transmitted from the SPI between the regular interrupts of the host control circuit 7210 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of luminance data transmitted between the regular interrupts of the host control circuit 7210 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 138). Therefore, for example, the number of regular interrupts executed before replenishing 32 pieces of luminance data in a FIFO (First In First Out) data area in which 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is 5 to 6 times. it is conceivable that. The number of times depends on the time of the regular interruption of the host control circuit 7210.

For example, when the brightness data set (stored) in the data area of the FIFO (First In First Out) capable of setting (storing) 64 pieces of 16-bit brightness data is less than 32, the callback function is called, so the FIFO data The area is not always filled. Therefore, if the process of setting (storing) the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO does not come around in the other processing in the main processing executed at the cycle of 33.3 msec, the data area of the FIFO becomes empty. There is a possibility that it becomes (the backlight becomes dark).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, first, 64 pieces of luminance data of 1 data are first set to fill the data area of the FIFO, and then 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO. When it falls below, the callback function is called, 32 data is set in the callback function, and the data area of the FIFO is prevented from becoming empty.

As shown in FIG. 139, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not it is a process at the time of initial setting (step S4341). When the host control circuit 7210 determines that this is the processing at the time of initial setting (that is, one processing in step 4201 of FIG. 132) (YES in step S4341), 64 pieces of brightness data of brightness 0 is stored in the data area of the FIFO. It sets (step S4342) and moves to step S4343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the initial setting process (that is, the process of step S4253 in FIG. 133) (NO in step S4341), the process of step S4342 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S4343.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4343 whether the brightness value has been changed. When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the brightness value has been changed (YES in step S4343), the host control circuit 7210 changes the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO (step S4344), and proceeds to step S4345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the brightness value is not changed (NO in step S4343), the process of step S4344 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S4345.

In step S4345, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than the number (YES in step S4345), 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO, that is, supplemented (step S4346), and the backlight control process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S4345), the host control circuit 7210 ends the backlight process.

In this way, by processing the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO so as not to become empty, it is possible to continuously and continuously output a signal corresponding to PWM from the serial data output terminal of the SPI. It is possible to perform backlight control without going through a light control driver.

Note that the processing of steps S4343 to S4346 of the backlight control processing of this embodiment can be replaced as follows. That is, after setting 64 pieces of data of luminance 0 (see step S4342), it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32 pieces. After that, it is determined whether or not the brightness value has been changed, and when it is determined that the brightness value has been changed, 32 pieces of brightness data corresponding to the setting are set in the data area of the FIFO, and when it is determined that the brightness value has not changed, the last time 32 pieces of the same luminance data as in the above are set in the data area of the FIFO. In this way, the brightness data may be set in the data area of the FIFO and the backlight control process may be ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below 32 (half the number of data that can be set in the FIFO), 32 brightness data are supplemented. Is not limited to this, and the number of luminance data to be supplemented is not limited to this, and when the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined number of luminance data may be supplemented. Further, the luminance data to be replenished in the FIFO data area does not have to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area falls below the first number, The brightness data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint that the luminance data set in the FIFO data area does not become too frequent and the luminance data set in the FIFO data area does not become empty, the above predetermined number or the first The number is preferably about half the number of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO, but is not limited to this as described above. It should be noted that the above “about half” may be a range in which the frequency of setting the brightness data in the data area of the FIFO does not become too high and the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO does not become empty. There are various determination methods such as less than half or less than half depending on the consumption speed of the brightness data set in the data area of. For example, since up to 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64 pieces, one or more new pieces of luminance data are newly set. The brightness data may be set, but from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the FIFO data When there are two or more pieces of brightness data set in the area, it is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of brightness data. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

[Modification of backlight control processing]
Next, a modified example of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing according to a modification of the backlight control processing. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the backlight control process.

In the modified example of the backlight control process, when it is possible that the timer interrupt process of 1 msec takes time, whether or not a predetermined time or more has elapsed since the data was set in the FIFO data area in the backlight control process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed and data is set in the data area of the FIFO.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 140, the host control circuit 7210 first performs a backlight control process (step S4351). For convenience of description, the backlight control process of step S4351 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 before describing the processes of step S4352 and subsequent steps.

As shown in FIG. 141, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not it is a process at the time of initialization (step S4361). When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process of step 201 in FIG. 132) (YES in step S4361), 64 pieces of brightness data of brightness 0 are stored in the FIFO data area. After setting (step S4362), the process moves to step S4366. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the initial setting process (that is, the process of step S4351) (NO in step S4361), the process advances to step S4363.

In step S4363, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than the number (YES in step S4363), 32 pieces of luminance data are set or supplemented in the data area of the FIFO (step S4364), and the process proceeds to step S4365. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is more than 32 (NO in step S4363), the process proceeds to step S4366. As mentioned above, the 32 data items are half the number of data items that can be set in the FIFO.

In step S4365, the host control circuit 7210 resets the elapsed time (step S4365) and starts measuring the elapsed time (step S4366). When the elapsed time measurement is started in step S4366, the host control circuit 7210 ends the backlight control process.

Returning to FIG. 140, the host control circuit 7210 performs accessory motor control after ending the backlight control process of step S4351 (step S4352).

In this modification, the host control circuit 7210 performs a process that may require a long time, such as a character motor control, and then determines whether or not the elapsed time when the time measurement is started in step S4366 has exceeded a predetermined time. It is determined whether or not (step S4353). If the predetermined time or more has passed (YES in step S4353), 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO (step S4354). On the other hand, if the predetermined time or more has not elapsed (NO in step S4353), it is not necessary to replenish the brightness data in the FIFO data area, and the process advances to step S4357.

As described above, it takes 0.16 msec to transmit 16-bit data (1 bit of luminance data is 16 bits) by SPI. Therefore, it is thought that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 luminance data. To be Therefore, in this modification, in step S4353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as the predetermined time.

After performing the processing of step S4354, the host control circuit 7210 resets the elapsed time (step S4355), and restarts the counting of the elapsed time (step S4356). Then, when the counting of the elapsed time is started in step S4356, the host control circuit 7210 performs an input state determination process (step S4357), and ends the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the luminance data is set in the FIFO data area, timing is started, and after the processing that may take time, the luminance data is replenished if the above-mentioned clocking time has exceeded the predetermined time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness data in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty.

In this modification, an example in which the processing of steps S4353 to S4357 is performed after the accessory motor control (step S4352) has been described, but this is merely an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S4353 to S4357 is performed after the processing that may take a long time, Of course, such processing is not limited to a specific processing.

[Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations in the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs will be described. Various LEDs correspond to a board side LED (for example, an LED arranged on the game board 7012), a frame side LED, and the like, and in this specification, a lamp group 7018 including LEDs (for example, see FIG. 101) corresponds to this. .. Further, in this specification, as variations of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs, three variations of the first embodiment to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 145, respectively. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing showing the backlight control processing. FIG. 143 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 7210 for explaining the first example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 144 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 7210 for explaining the second example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 145 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 7210 for explaining the third example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, in FIGS. 143 to 145, only the processes necessary for the description are shown, and the other processes are omitted. Note that, also in the first to third embodiments described below, as described above, the host control circuit 7210 causes the data area of the FIFO to be stored in the data area of the FIFO when the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO becomes about half. Replenish the brightness data.

The timing of replenishing the brightness data in the FIFO data area is not limited to the time when the brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes about half. In the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when there are 1 to 64 pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area, one or more new pieces of luminance data are newly set. It is sufficient to set the brightness data. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 2 It is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of luminance data when the number of pieces is more than one. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

(First embodiment)
For example, when the brightness of the backlight (for example, the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) is adjusted by an operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. At this time, control of the board side LED and the frame side LED May affect the. In this case, in the present embodiment, the backlight brightness setting and the brightness setting of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are set in common, and the backlight, the board-side LED, and the frame-side LED are set according to the settings. The control is performed. Thereby, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 142, the host control circuit 7210 performs the accessory motor control (step S4371), the input state determination process (step S4372), and the backlight control process (step S4373) in this order.

As shown in FIG. 143, the host control circuit 7210 performs initialization processing (step S4381), then moves to the main loop, and performs LED request control processing (step S4382). The LED request made in step S4382 is created in the animation building process one frame before (step S4386 described later).

After performing the process of step S4382, the host control circuit 7210 performs the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information generation process (step S4383) based on the input state of the sub-device, and proceeds to step S4384.

In step S4384, the host control circuit 7210 determines the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the player or the like operates the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013). To set. The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the process of step S4384 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 moves to the packet reception loop, and first sets the brightness values of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the effect mode and the brightness value setting to be executed. Yes (step S4385). The brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is also set to three levels, for example, strong/medium/weak, like the backlight.

Here, by setting the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED and the brightness of the backlight in common, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in control load. Both the setting and the setting of the brightness of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, the host control circuit 7210 changes the brightness value of the backlight based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013 (step S4384), and The brightness values of the board side LED and the frame side LED are also changed (step S4385). At this time, the stage of the brightness value of the backlight and the stage of the brightness value of the board side LED and the frame side LED are common. For example, if the level of the brightness value of the backlight is medium, it is also the level of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED. As shown in FIG. 143, since the brightness update timing of the backlight differs from the brightness update timing of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, after the backlight brightness is updated, the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are updated. The brightness of is updated. However, the brightness update timing of the backlight may be controlled to be the same as the brightness update timing of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED.

Note that the brightness of the backlight, the brightness of the board-side LED, and the brightness of the frame-side LED are changed based on the operation of the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013 by the player or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED may be changed, for example, based on the operation of the push button for performance. In this case, it is necessary to judge whether or not it is a period in which it functions as a push button for effect (push button effective period). Therefore, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is adjusted in the main flow. It is necessary to control the backlight according to the brightness of the LED.

The host control circuit 7210, in step S4386, performs animation construction processing. In the animation building process of step S4386, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S4382) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 7210 repeats the processing of steps S4385 and S4386 according to the received packet.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs animation update processing (step S4387), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S4388).

The host control circuit 7210 repeatedly performs the processes of steps S4382 to S4388 in the main loop at a cycle of 33.3 msec.

(Second embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, it may affect the control of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs as described above. In the present embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a brightness adjusting operation is performed by a player or the like, the brightness value of the backlight is immediately changed, but the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is a special symbol. This is executed after the end of fluctuation or between bank flips.

As described above, the host control circuit 7210 performs the accessory motor control (step S4371), the input state determination process (step S4372), and the backlight control process (step S4373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 142. To do.

As shown in FIG. 144, after performing the initialization process (step S4391), the host control circuit 7210 moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S4392). The LED request made in step S4392 is created in the animation constructing process one frame before (step S4395 described later).

When the host control circuit 7210 performs the process of step S4392, the host control circuit 7210 generates the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like) (step S4393). ) Is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4394.

In step S4394, the host control circuit 7210 sets the luminance of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the luminance adjustment operation by the player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the processing of step S4394 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 moves to the packet reception loop and performs animation construction processing (step S4395). In the animation building process of step S4395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control process (see step S4392) of the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 7210 repeats the processing of step S4395 according to the received packet.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs animation update processing (step S4396), then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S4397), and proceeds to step S4398.

In step S4398, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 7013 has ended, that is, whether or not the effect identification effect variation time has elapsed. (Step S4398). If the variation of the effect identification symbol has ended (YES in step S4398), the host control circuit 7210 changes the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the set value at that time (step S4399). On the other hand, if the variation of the special symbol has not ended (NO in step S4398), the processes of steps S4392 to S4399 in the main loop of the 33.3 msec cycle are repeated. The process of step S4399 may be performed during the bank flip of step S4397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol is completed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 controls the brightness of the backlight, which directly affects the eyes of the player, based on the input state of the subdevice (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player). Although it is controlled so that it is changed immediately, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the fluctuation of the production identification symbol is completed. To control. Further, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjusting operation while the production identification pattern is changing, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process, but the backlight is required. Can be changed immediately. Therefore, based on the input state of the sub device, the brightness of the backlight is controlled to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control processing, so that the control load is changed. Can be minimized. In other words, it is possible to change the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED while minimizing the control load, for example, by performing only one brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like.

When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like), the host control circuit 7210 outputs the brightness data concerning the changed brightness to the FIFO. Set in the data area.

(Third embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, it may affect the control of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs as described above. In the present embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the brightness value of the backlight is changed, and the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are limitedly performed. It was done like this. Limitedly performing means, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the effects of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs, and limiting the number of effects performed by the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs. .. Limiting the number of effects corresponds to, for example, originally performing effects 1 to 5, but only effects 1 to 3 and omitting effects 4 and 5 and not performing them. As a result, the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are limited without directly changing the brightness value, so that the intensity of light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. Further, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

As described above, the host control circuit 7210 performs the accessory motor control (step S4371), the input state determination process (step S4372), and the backlight control process (step S4373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 142. To do.

As shown in FIG. 145, the host control circuit 7210 performs initialization processing (step S4401), then moves to the main loop, and performs LED request control processing (step S4402). The LED request made in step S4402 is created in the animation constructing process one frame before (step S4407 described later).

After performing the process of step S4402, the host control circuit 7210 performs the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information generation process (step S4403) based on the input state of the sub-device, and proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the host control circuit 7210 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the process of step S4404 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the brightness setting has been changed (step S4405). If there is a change in the brightness setting (YES in step S4405), the host control circuit 7210 limits the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the setting at that time (step S4406), and moves to the packet reception loop. On the other hand, if the brightness value setting has not been changed (NO in step S4405), the host control circuit 7210 moves to the packet reception loop without performing the process of step S4406.

Upon moving to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs animation construction processing (step S4407). In the animation building process of step S4407, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control process (see step S4402) of the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 7210 repeats the processing of step S4407 according to the received packet.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs animation update processing (step S4408), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S4409).

The host control circuit 7210 repeatedly performs the processing of steps S4402 to S4409 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec.

Regarding the above-described backlight and brightness adjustment of various LEDs (first to third examples), the backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the SPI asynchronous data write (SPI+DMA) function as described above. For example, a signal corresponding to PWM is continuously and continuously output from the serial output terminal of SPI. On the other hand, as for the board side LED and the frame side LED, for example, as shown in step S4382 of FIG. 143, the LED is controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop. Therefore, even if the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing of changing the brightness of the backlight and the timing of changing the brightness of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED are different.

[RTC acquisition process]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 146. As described above, the RTC acquisition process is performed both in various initialization processes (see step S4201 in FIG. 132) and in the main loop (see step S4201 in FIG. 132). Note that FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the RTC acquisition process.

For example, when it is not possible to communicate with the RTC or when an abnormality occurs in the RTC itself, or when an accurate time cannot be acquired due to the RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and remains the previous time. Therefore, when an RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) is executed based on the RTC time, if the RTC abnormality occurs, there is a possibility that the RTC effect cannot be executed. Furthermore, when the RTC or more occurs, the RTC time is not updated, so that the RTC effect may be still executed, or the RTC effect may be executed at an unexpected time.

Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, when the previous RTC time is different from the current RTC time, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. Note that the RTC is provided with a secondary battery, so that the time can be managed even when the host control circuit 7210 is powered off. Further, the host control circuit 7210 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the error occurrence time and the like.

As shown in FIG. 146, in the RTC acquisition process, the host control circuit 7210 first acquires the RTC time (step S4412), and then moves to step S4413.

The host control circuit 7210 updates the previous time in step S4413. In updating the previous time, the current time updated in step S4416 described below is updated as the previous time. After that, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S4414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S4414), the current time is maintained (step S4415), and the process proceeds to step S4417. On the other hand, if the RTC is not abnormal (NO in step S4414), the current time is updated (step S4416), and the process proceeds to step S4417.

In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the RTC is abnormal after updating the previous time (step S4413) (step S4414), but instead, update the previous time. It may be determined whether the RTC is abnormal or not before, and if the RTC is not abnormal, the previous time may be updated so that the current time is not maintained.

In step S4417, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current time is the designated time (for example, the time at which the RTC effect is executed). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S4417), the process proceeds to step S4418. If the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S4417), the process proceeds to step S4420.

In step S4418, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S4418). If the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S4418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S4419). That is, if the RTC is abnormal, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. When the processing of step S4419 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 ends the RTC acquisition processing. On the other hand, if the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S4418), the process advances to step S4420.

The host control circuit 7210 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0 in step S4420. When the processing of step S4420 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 ends the RTC acquisition processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, by executing the RTC effect when the current time becomes the designated time, it is possible to avoid the situation where the RTC effect is not executed. ..

[Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

The composition is, for example, scene data in which material data for forming an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013 is combined, and is generally composed of a plurality of layers. Layers include animations, vector graphics, still images, lights, and more.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of animation control main processing executed by the display control circuit 7230. As shown in FIG. 147, the display control circuit 7230 first clears the composition reproduction information (step S4431). Then, the display control circuit 7230 executes composition reproduction control processing (step S4432). This composition reproduction control processing will be described later. After that, the display control circuit 7230 executes the highest-level direct drawing function (step S4433), and ends the animation control main processing.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the composition reproduction control process executed by the display control circuit 7230. As shown in FIG. 148, the display control circuit 7230 first determines whether or not the determined priority number is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the priority number (step S4441). If the determined priority number is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the priority number (YES in step S4441), the process advances to step S4442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition that are simultaneously reproduced, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be reproduced. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 7210 is normal, the determined priority number does not exceed the upper limit of the priority number. Therefore, if the determined priority number exceeds the upper limit of the priority number (NO in step S4441), the display control circuit 7230 ends the composition reproduction control process.

In step S4442, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays, that is, the determined number of displays is usable (for example, mounted) on the system. It is determined whether it is less than (or less than) the number (step S4442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays (YES in step S4442), the process moves to step S4443.

In step S4443, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the used display number is 0, that is, whether or not there is a usable display number. If the used display number is not 0 (YES in step S4443), that is, if there is a usable display number, the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4444. On the other hand, if the used display number is 0 (NO in step S4443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4459.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment is provided with two frame buffers as a frame buffer in which the composition is registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

In step S4444, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination processing of step S4444, it is determined whether or not all the compositions are registered (that is, whether or not there is any unregistered composition). If all the compositions are registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (YES in step S4444), the display control circuit 7230 sets the drawing target (step S4445). Setting a drawing target is a process of setting a display to which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (NO in step S4444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition, the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4450.

In step S4446, the display control circuit 7230 sets the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer. That is, the processing in step S4446 is processing in which the rendering result output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer by the bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. After that, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not there is a pause flag in the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S4446 (step S4447). The pause flag is a flag of a debug function for temporarily suspending the image. When this pause flag is present (YES in step S4447), the display control circuit 7230 causes the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S4446. Then, the composition reproduction information is registered (step S4448), and the composition is reproduced (step S4449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (NO in step S4447), the process moves to step S4459. The reproduction information of the composition includes, for example, the size of the frame buffer, the size of the composition, the coordinates of the four vertices of the image to be reproduced, the composition registration information, the loop composition to be reproduced, the composition length, and the start frame setting. , Loop playback flag, etc. Moreover, the registration of the reproduction information of the composition is to collect the reproduction information of the composition, and the reproduction of the composition is to register the reproduction information of the collected composition. When the composition reproduction information is registered, the previous reproduction information is cleared.

In step S4450, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or more than the upper limit (that is, whether the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames held by the composition). To determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is not the upper limit or more (NO in step S4450), the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4457 and registers the composition reproduction information in the drawing result output destination buffer (step S4457). The composition is reproduced with S4457) (step S4458).

When the display control circuit 7230 determines in step S4450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or more than the upper limit (YES in step S4450), the process proceeds to step S4451.

In step S4451, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction (YES in step S4451), the display control circuit 7230 performs reproduction from the beginning during loop reproduction (step S4452), and then moves to step S4457. .. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not loop reproduction (NO in step S4451), the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4453.

In step S4453, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display (YES in step S4453), the display control circuit 7230 reproduces the last frame during frame continuous display (step S4454), and then step S4457. Move on to. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not frame continuous display (NO in step S4453), the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4455.

In step S4455, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is shot reproduction. If the reproduction mode is shot reproduction (YES in step S4455), the display control circuit 7230 clears the composition during shot reproduction (step S4456), and then proceeds to step S4459. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not shot reproduction (NO in step S4455), the display control circuit 7230 moves to step S4457.

Note that, in principle, the composition reproduction information registration in step S4457 is a process performed when the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (when NO is determined in step S4444). However, as described above, the display control circuit 7230 also performs the frame flip in step S4446 even when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in step S4446 has a pause flag (YES in step S4447). The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the buffer (step S4448), and the composition is reproduced (step S4449). As described above, when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S4446 has a pause flag (YES in step S4447), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer ( Since the composition is reproduced at the same time as step S4448) (step S4449), rapid processing can be performed.

In step S4459, the display control circuit 7230 adds 1 to the determined number of displays, and the process returns to step S4442.

If the display control circuit 7230 determines in step S4442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S4442), it directly executes the drawing function if there is data to be drawn. (Step S4460). After that, the display control circuit 7230 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S4461) and returns to step S4441.

As described above, in the composition reproduction control of the present embodiment, as a general rule, reproduction information of a new composition is not registered when the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S4447, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It becomes possible to perform the process (composition reproduction information registration). In other words, while the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at an arbitrary timing, so it depends on the content of the (new) registered composition. It is possible to overwrite effects, skip effects, and stop effects.

Further, the process of step S4441 (process for determining whether the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays) The process of determining whether or not) is a higher-level process than the process of step S4442. Therefore, by returning from the process of step S4459 to step S4442 and performing the process, the priority number determined in step S4441 is displayed on a plurality of displays. It can be shared, and the processing load can be reduced.

[Sound amplifier check processing]
Next, the sound amplifier check processing shown in FIG. 133 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. In this sound amplifier check processing, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 7262 (hereinafter, referred to as "sound amplifier") is in an abnormal state (for example, overcurrent abnormality, high temperature abnormality, DC detection abnormality in which audio signal does not change, etc.). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound amplifier check processing. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal amplifier check processing. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the deep bass amplifier check processing.

The pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment includes, as sound amplifiers, a normal amplifier that amplifies normal voice data and a heavy bass amplifier that amplifies heavy bass sound data.

As shown in FIG. 149, the host control circuit 7210 performs normal amplifier check processing (step S4471) and heavy bass amplifier check processing (step S4472).

As shown in FIG. 150, in the normal amplifier check process, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S4481). If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, settings will be made from the binary file. The initialization process is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and the settings are reset. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is performed from the binary file, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage area different from the read setting such as a binary file may be used.

When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the setting is performed from the binary file (YES in step S4481), the host control circuit 7210 performs a determination process of whether or not the register serving as the reference of the register value to be checked is normal (step S4482), , Moves to step S4483. In the determination processing of step S4482, the value of the register is checked in the order of addresses, so it is determined whether or not there is a register value to start the check and whether or not the value is normal.

The host control circuit 7210, in step S4483, sorts the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 7210 compares the value of the RAM in the register with the received data (step S4484), and performs a process of determining whether the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S4485). When the host control circuit 7210 performs the determination process of step S4485, it ends the normal amplifier check process.

On the other hand, if the setting is not performed from the binary file in step S4481 (NO in step S4481), the host control circuit 7210 performs a process of comparing the default value and the set value (step S4486), and the normal amplifier check process. To finish. When the normal amplifier check processing is completed, the host control circuit 7210 performs heavy bass amplifier check processing.

As shown in FIG. 151, in the deep bass amplifier check processing, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S4491).

When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the setting is performed from the binary file (YES in step S4491), the host control circuit 7210 performs a process of determining whether or not the register to be checked is normal (step S4492), and then proceeds to step S4493. ..

In step S4493, the host control circuit 7210 clears the registers 0x17-0x25 with appropriate values (binary file information) in consideration of the case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware failure.

The host control circuit 7210, in step S4494, sorts the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 7210 compares the value of the RAM in the register with the received data (step S4495), and updates the RAM address (step S4496). When the host control circuit 7210 performs the update process of step S4496, the host control circuit 7210 ends the deep bass amplifier check process.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S4491 (NO in step S4491), the host control circuit 7210 performs a process of comparing the default value and the set value (step S4497), and checks the deep bass amplifier. The process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the host control circuit 7210 performs the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process of 1 msec. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check process takes time, other processes may be overwhelmed. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check processing in the interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to perform the sound amplifier check processing without overwhelming other processing in the main loop.

In the sound amplifier check processing shown in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 133), for example, as shown in FIG. 152, in the interrupt processing of 1 msec, the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (collective) check processing (step S4497). ) May be performed. The normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier (collective) check processing (step S4497) is a processing in which the normal amplifier check processing (see FIG. 150) and the heavy bass amplifier check processing (see FIG. 151) are collectively performed.

However, if the sound amplifier check processing is performed in the interrupt processing of 1 msec, there is a possibility that the entire sound amplifier check processing cannot be executed. Therefore, a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the sound amplifier check processing. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing. FIG. 155 shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 154.

In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check processing, as shown in FIG. 153, the host control circuit 7210 performs normal amplifier/low bass amplifier (division) check processing (step S4498). The details of this normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing will be described later, but each check processing of the normal amplifier and each of the deep bass amplifier check processing is divided into a range that can be performed in the interrupt processing of 1 msec. The check process is performed in the frame, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, of all the check processing of the normal amplifier and all the check processing of the heavy bass amplifier, only a part of the check processing is performed in the one-time interrupt processing, but all the checks are performed over the plurality of interrupt processing. It is the one. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all the checking processing of the normal amplifier and the checking processing of the deep bass amplifier without being completed in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 154, in the normal/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing, the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S4501).

When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the setting is performed from the binary file (YES in step S4501), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the check status is 0 (step S4502). If the check status is 0 (YES in step S4502), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S4503). After performing the processing of step S4503, the host control circuit 7210 sets the check status to 1 (step S4504), and ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S4502), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4505. Note that the process of step S4503 may be performed by further dividing each register to determine whether each register value of the plurality of registers is normal.

The host control circuit 7210 determines whether the check status is 1 in step S4505. If the check status is 1 (YES in step S4505), the host control circuit 7210 performs a rearrangement process of the received data from the binary file (step S4506). After that, the host control circuit 7210 compares the RAM value in the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S4507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S4508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S4508), the host control circuit 7210 sets the check status to 2 (step S4509), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S4508), the host control circuit 7210 does not update the check status, and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing is performed. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 1, the host control circuit 7210 performs the process when the check status is 1 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4505 that the check status is not 1 (NO in step S4505), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4510. In the process of step S4508, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register of the plurality of registers with the received data may be further divided for each register.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4510 whether the check status is 2. If the check status is 2 (YES in step S4510), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S4511). After that, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S4512). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S4512), the host control circuit 7210 sets the check status to 3 (step S4513), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S4512), the host control circuit 7210 does not update the check status, and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing is performed. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 2, the host control circuit 7210 performs the process when the check status is 2 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4510 that the check status is not 2 (NO in step S4510), the process advances to step S4514 (see FIG. 155).

Referring to FIG. 155, the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4514 whether the check status is 3. If the check status is 3 (YES in step S4514), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the register value checked by the deep bass amplifier is normal (step S4515). After that, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S4516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S4516), the host control circuit 7210 sets the check status to 4 (step S4517), and the normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier ( (Division) check processing ends. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier is not executed (NO in step S4516), the host control circuit 7210 checks the normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. The process ends. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 3, the host control circuit 7210 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4514 that the check status is not 3 (NO in step S4514), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4518.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4518 whether the check status is 4. If the check status is 4 (YES in step S4518), the host control circuit 7210 clears the register value of the deep bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S4519). Thereafter, the host control circuit 7210 sets the check status to 5 (step S4520), and ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4518 that the check status is not 4 (NO in step S4518), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4521.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4521 whether the check status is 5. If the check status is 5 (YES in step S4521), the host control circuit 7210 performs rearrangement processing of received data from the binary file (step S4522). After that, the host control circuit 7210 compares the RAM value of the register of the deep bass amplifier with the received data (step S4523), and updates the RAM address (step S4524). After that, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S4525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S4525), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the update of the RAM address is completed (step S4526), and the check status is set. It is set to 0 (step S4527), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing ends. When the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed in step S4525 (NO in step S4525), and when it is determined that the RAM address update is not completed in step S4526 (NO in step S4526). The host control circuit 7210 ends the normal amplifier/low bass amplifier (division) check processing without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 5, the host control circuit 7210 performs the process when the check status is 5 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4521 that the check status is not 5 (NO in step S4521), the host control circuit 7210 ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing.

As described above, in a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check processing, each check processing of the normal amplifier and each check processing of the heavy bass amplifier are divided and can be performed within the interrupt processing of 1 msec (that is, within one frame). The check processing is performed within the range, and the subsequent processing is performed in the next and subsequent frames. As described above, a part of the check processing of the normal amplifier and the check processing of the heavy bass amplifier is performed over a plurality of frames within one frame. Therefore, all the check processing of each amplifier can be performed over a plurality of frames. It will be possible.

Note that when the check status is 4, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, the processing of step S4516 corresponds). Absent. This is because the process of step S4519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interrupt process of 1 msec. In other words, the process performed when the check status is 4 (step S4519) is the process performed when the check status is 0 (step S4503), and the process performed when the check status is 1 (step S4506). And step S4507), processing performed when the check status is 2 (step S4511), processing performed when the check status is 3 (step S4515), processing performed when the check status is 5 (step) This is because the time required for the processing is shorter than that of S4522 to step S4524) and does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the processing corresponding to the number of divisions has been executed in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether or not the interrupt processing of 1 msec is affected). I have decided whether or not. However, even if the processing does not affect the interrupt processing for 1 msec (for example, the processing in step S4519 performed when the check status is 4), whether or not the processing for the number of divisions is executed is determined. You may make it judge.

Note that in each of the processes of steps S4503, S4511, and S4515, it may be possible to determine whether each register value of the plurality of registers is normal by further dividing each register. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the large classification processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 and the check status related to the small classification processing (second check status) obtained by further dividing the large classification processing. With, the progress of processing can be managed. Similarly, in each of the processes of steps S4506 to S4507 and steps S4522 to S4523, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register of the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register. May be. In this case, the progress of the further divided processing may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the large classification processing shown in FIGS. 154 and 155 and the check status related to the small classification processing (second check status) obtained by further dividing the large classification processing. With, the progress of processing can be managed. For example, even if an electric power interruption occurs in the middle of the small classification process or the judgment, the progress status of the small classification process or the judgment is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored. You may control so that each process and each determination may be restarted.

The check status can be set to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the power is cut off during the process, starting from the check status at the previous power cut after the power is restored. Of course, if power is cut off, power is turned on, or backup clear (ram clear) processing is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processing and determination are performed again ( Alternatively, as one of the initialization processes, all the processes or the determination or a part of the processes or the determination may be performed again).

[Sound request control processing (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control processing shown in FIG. 132, the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same reproduction channel in the same frame of the main loop performed at a cycle of 33.3 msec, for example, a mute command of 2 msec between SAC requests. Is registered with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being overlaid on another game sound, and it is possible to output the game sound with high accuracy. However, in this case, although there is an advantage that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that the processing takes time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are designated (registered) in the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop, a SAC request of the first arrival arrives with a space between the SAC requests of the first arrival. There are provided a case of making a request and a case of making a later-arriving SAC request without an interval between the first-arriving SAC number. The details will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 156, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 7210 first confirms the SAC number and the reproduction channel (step S4541), After that, the process moves to step S4542.

In step S4542, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction, there are cases where a plurality of SAC numbers are designated for the same reproduction channel without an interval. If there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (YES in step S4542), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4543. On the other hand, if there are no SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (NO in step S4542), the sound request control process ends. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, one virtual track corresponds to one reproduction channel, and therefore the determination processing in step S4542 is synonymous with the determination as to whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. Is. That is, the “track” is an interface for decoding and reproducing the “phrase”, and the “reproduction channel” is a concept for reproducing the “phrase”. That is, when a "playback channel" is specified and a "phrase" is requested to be played back, the phrase is assigned to the corresponding "track" and played. The "virtual track" is an "interface for controlling phrase reproduction". Note that there are 128 virtual tracks and they can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase playback channels, but since this function is not used in this embodiment, "virtual track"="playback channel".

In step S4543, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction is performed. If it is the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction (YES in step S4543), the host control circuit 7210 executes the SAC request of the LOOP reproduction one frame later (33.3 msec later) (step S4544), and the sound request control. The process ends. In the case of chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback, the SAC request of LOOP playback is delayed by one frame to prevent the sound of SHOT playback from being overwritten and prevent the sound of SHOT playback from becoming difficult to hear. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if it is not the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction (NO in step S4543), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4545.

In step S4545, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all reproduction channels. For example, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol ends, the mute command is uniformly set between the SACs for all the reproduction channels. If the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all playback channels (YES in step S4545), the host control circuit 7210 sets the SAC data corresponding to the first-arrival SAC request so that mute is executed. On the other hand, without overwriting the mute command, the SAC data corresponding to the late arrival SAC request is set (step S4546), and the sound request control process is ended. On the other hand, when the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting for all the reproduction channels (NO in step S4545), the mute command for each reproduction channel corresponds to the later-arriving SAC request so that quick processing is performed. The SAC data is overwritten and set (step S4547), and the sound request control process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same reproduction channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction, , The SAC number of the LOOP reproduction is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so that the sound of the LOOP reproduction is not received with respect to the SHOT reproduction. The SHOT reproduction is, for example, a one-time reproduction of a phrase, and the LOOP reproduction is, for example, a LOOP reproduction (reproduction a plurality of times) of the phrase.

Also, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting for all playback channels, the mute command does not overwrite the SAC data of the last arrival so that the mute command does not overwrite the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number. sign up. Thereby, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, it is possible to secure a time until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting for all reproduction channels, the mute command for each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the SAC request that arrives later so that mute is not executed. In this way, by executing or not executing the muffling depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the swiftness of the processing (the swiftness due to the muffling being overwritten) while making the most of the game sound effect of the muffling. ing.

[Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)]
Next, regarding the sound request control processing shown in FIG. 132, variations of the sound request control processing when volume adjustment is performed will be described. In this specification, as variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed, five variations of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 161 respectively. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the first embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a second embodiment of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a third embodiment of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the fourth embodiment of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed.

(First embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 157, in the first embodiment of the sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 7210 first performs the input processing of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S4551). After that, the process moves to step S4552. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 7210.

In step S4552, the host control circuit 7210 specifies the output destination speaker based on the audio data specified by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S4553. In the first embodiment, the audio data designated by the SAC number incorporates information about which speaker is to be output. The speaker is, for example, a shared speaker that is used for general purposes (used to output a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a dedicated speaker that is used to output a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) And a speaker (for example, a speaker for heavy bass). Note that the host control circuit 7210 sets which of the plurality of speakers is to be the dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 132 (step S4201)).

In step S4553, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S4553), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 7281 in FIG. 105) (step S4554), and the process proceeds to step S4556. On the other hand, if it is not the volume control by the hardware switch (NO in step S4553), user volume control (see reference numeral 7282 in FIG. 105) is performed (step S4555), and the process proceeds to step S4556.

In step S4556, the host control circuit 7210 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 7283 in FIG. 105), and then proceeds to step S4557.

In step S4557, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. In addition, the voice data instructed by the SAC number includes information that the output destination of the normal sound is the shared speaker, and that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated speaker. There is.

If it is determined in step S4558 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S4557), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (see reference numeral 7284 in FIG. 105) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S4558). ), and proceeds to step S4560. In the volume control in step S4558, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4557 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S4557), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (reference numeral 285 in FIG. 105) for the specific sound set in the channel ( (Step S4559), the process proceeds to step S4560. In the volume control in step S4559, control is performed so that a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment regardless of whether the volume adjustment is performed (that is, even if the volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S4560, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If volume settings for the number of channels have been made in step S4560 (YES in step S4560), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S4561), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S4560 (NO in step S4560), the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4557, and the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S4560). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S4557 to S4560 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 157, considering that the SAC number is designated corresponding to each channel, the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S4561. good.

(Second embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 158, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 7210 first performs the input process of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S4571). After that, the process moves to step S4572. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 7210.

In the second embodiment, for example, a shared channel that is used for general purposes (used to output a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) There is a dedicated channel used for output. The host control circuit 7210 uses the dedicated channels (CH31, CH32) used to output a specific sound among the plurality of channels (1 to 32CH) and the shared channel (CH1) used for sounds other than the specific sound. To CH30) in various initialization processes (for example, see various initialization processes (step S4201) in FIG. 132).

In step S4572, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S4572), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 7281 in FIG. 105) (step S4573), and the process proceeds to step S4575. On the other hand, if it is not the volume control by the hardware switch (NO in step S4572), the user volume control (see reference numeral 7282 in FIG. 105) is performed (step S4574), and the process proceeds to step S4575.

In step S4576, the host control circuit 7210 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 7283 in FIG. 105), and then proceeds to step S4576.

In step S4576, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S4576 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S4576), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (see reference numeral 284 in FIG. 105) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S4577). ), and proceeds to step S4578. In the volume control of step S4577, control is performed to change the volume according to volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4576 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S4576), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (reference numeral 7285 in FIG. 105) for the specific sound set in the channel ( Step S4579) and the process proceeds to step S4582. In the volume control of step S4579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment is performed, a control that outputs a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S4578, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the reproduction is a reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the reproduction is a reproduction channel (eg, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S4578), a certain volume is designated (step S4580). If reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) that receives the volume adjustment (NO in step S4578), the volume corresponding to the user volume is set (step S4581). When the process of step S4580 ends or the process of step S4581 ends, the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4582.

In step S4582, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S4632 (YES in step S4582), volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S4583), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S4582 (NO in step S4582), the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4576 and performs volume control for the number of channels (determined as YES in step S4582). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S4576 to S4582 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 158, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S4583.

(Third embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 159, in the third embodiment of the sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 7210 first performs the input processing of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S4591). Then, it moves to step S4592.

In step S4592, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S4592), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 7281 in FIG. 105) (step S4593), and the process proceeds to step S4595. On the other hand, if it is not the volume control by the hardware switch (NO in step S4592), user volume control (see reference numeral 7282 in FIG. 105) is performed (step S4594), and the process proceeds to step S4595.

In step S4595, the host control circuit 7210 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 7283 in FIG. 105) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S4596.

In step S4596, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed in step S4596 (NO in step S4596), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (see reference numeral 7284 of FIG. 105) of the normal sound set in the channel (step S4597). ), and proceeds to step S4599. In the volume control of step S4597, control for changing the volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4596 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S4596), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (reference numeral 285 in FIG. 105) for the specific sound set in the channel ( (Step S4598), the process proceeds to step S4599. In the volume control of step S4598, control is performed such that a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment is performed (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S4599, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data in the reproduction channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S4599), a certain volume is designated for the reproduction channel next time (step S4600). If the data in the reproduction channel is data to be volume-adjusted (NO in step S4599), next time, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S4601). When the process of step S4600 ends or the process of step S4601 ends, the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4602.

In step S4602, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels has been made in step S4602 (YES in step S4602), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S4603), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S4602 (NO in step S4602), the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4599 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S4602). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S4599 to S4602 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 159, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S4603.

In the third embodiment, in step S4599, it is determined whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, and the result of the determination in step S4599 is If YES, a certain volume is set for the next playback channel (step S4600), and if the determination result of step S4599 is NO, the volume for the next playback channel is set according to the volume adjustment. Instead, a modified example described below may be used. That is, in this modified example, as the processing of the step subsequent to step S4597 and step S4598, the audio data set this time and the audio data already being reproduced on the reproduction channel in which the audio data is set are subjected to volume adjustment. After performing processing to confirm whether the data is not affected, processing to determine whether the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data are the same. I do. When the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data is the same as the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data, processing is performed to determine whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the volume adjustment settings for the audio data this time are not the same as the volume adjustment settings for the previous audio data, the volume adjustments for the audio data set this time are not affected by the volume adjustments. The process moves to the process of determining whether or not it is data. The process moves to the process of determining whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. Then, if the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process for setting a certain volume to the playback channel is performed, and if the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the volume is adjusted to the playback channel. Perform the process to set the volume. After that, as in step S4602, the process of determining whether or not the number of channels has been set may be performed. In this modified example, the processing different from the third embodiment is only the above-described processing, and the other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (the processing of steps S4592 to S4598 shown in FIG. 159, the processing of step S4602, And the process of step S4603).

(Fourth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 160, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 7210 first determines whether the SAC number is the SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. It is confirmed (step S4611). Then, it moves to step S4612.

In step S4612, the host control circuit 7210 updates the flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs the audio data designated by the SAC number (step S4613). Specifically, if the SAC number is affected by volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (if the SAC number is not affected by volume adjustment, the flag is OFF).

In step S4614, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S4614), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 7281 in FIG. 105) (step S4615), and the process proceeds to step S4617. On the other hand, if it is not the volume control by the hardware switch (NO in step S4614), the user volume control (see reference numeral 7282 in FIG. 105) is performed (step S4610), and the process proceeds to step S4617.

In step S4617, the host control circuit 7210 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 7283 in FIG. 105), and then proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4618, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control of a specific sound is performed. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S4618 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S4618), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (see reference numeral 7284 in FIG. 105) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S4619). ), and proceeds to step S4620. In the volume control of step S4619, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4618 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S4618), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (reference numeral 7285 in FIG. 105) for the specific sound set in the channel ( The process moves to step S4622) and step S4624. In the volume control of step S4622, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a control in which a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, that operation is performed). Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S4620, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, in step S4612, it is determined whether the flag is set to ON. If the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S4620), a certain volume is designated for the reproduction channel (step S4621), and the process proceeds to step S4624. If the reproduction is not performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S4620), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S4623), and the process proceeds to step S4624.

The host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed in step S4624.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S4624 (YES in step S4624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S4625), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S4624 (NO in step S4624), the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4618 and performs volume control for the number of channels (determined as YES in step S4624). Until this is done), the processes of steps S4618 to S4624 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 160, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S4625.

(Fifth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 7210 first performs the input processing of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S4631). After that, the flow shifts to step S4632.

The host control circuit 7210 confirms whether or not the audio data is audio data for which each channel is subjected to volume adjustment (step S4633). Specifically, if the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment. If it is audio data, the flag is OFF).

In step S4633, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S4633), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 281 in FIG. 105) (step S4634), and the process proceeds to step S4636. On the other hand, if it is not the volume control by the hardware switch (NO in step S4633), user volume control (see reference numeral 7282 in FIG. 105) is performed (step S4635), and the process proceeds to step S4636.

In step S4636, the host control circuit 7210 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 7283 in FIG. 105) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S4637.

In step S4637, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S4637 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S4637), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (see reference numeral 7284 in FIG. 105) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S4638). ), and proceeds to step S4639. In the volume control in step S4638, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4637 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S4637), the host control circuit 7210 performs volume control (reference numeral 285 in FIG. 105) for the specific sound set in the channel ( Step S4640) and then step S4643. In the volume control of step S4640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, A constant volume is output before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S4639, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON in step S4632. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S4639), a certain volume is set to the reproduction channel (step S4641). If the channel is affected by volume adjustment (NO in step S4639), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S4642). When the process of step S4641 ends or the process of step S4642 ends, the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4643.

In step S4643, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If volume settings for the number of channels have been made in step S4643 (YES in step S4643), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S4644), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S4643 (NO in step S4643), the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4637 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (YES in step S4643). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S4637 to S4643 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 161, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S4644.

According to the sound request control processing when the above-described volume adjustment is performed (first to fifth embodiments), when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is output for the normal sound. On the other hand, for a serious specific sound such as an error sound, it is possible to easily perform voice control such that a certain volume is output from the speaker even if the volume is adjusted.

[LED brightness adjustment processing]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 162. FIG. 162 is an attenuation table showing an example of the brightness attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. This attenuation table is stored in the sub-main ROM 7205 (for example, refer to FIG. 102).

The pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by the operation of a player or the like. Specifically, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed on the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013, the host control circuit 7210 performs the attenuation table switching process shown in FIG. 162. For example, when an operation of changing from strong to medium among the three levels of brightness is performed, the host control circuit 7210 performs a process of switching the reference table from strong to medium in the attenuation table of FIG. 162.

Note that the LED whose brightness can be adjusted by an operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on a glass door 7004 (see, for example, FIG. 99), or for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013. May be It should be noted that the brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three steps, and may be configured to be adjustable in more steps, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value=luminance value based on LED data×(100−luminance attenuation value)/100 (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can be set for each reproduction channel of the LED. The parameter changed by the player's operation is the brightness attenuation value. For example, when the brightness attenuation value is 0, the brightness is strongest, and when the brightness attenuation value is 100, the brightness is weakest and the light is turned off. The calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 7226b (see FIG. 103).

In addition, the LED data table that defines the LED data and the reproduction pattern is created by using a tool such as ActiveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE) to create a BLD file (LED animation), and information is added to the created BLD file. While being created, it is created by converting with the LED list (Excel macro) (UE).

By the way, in the case of the three primary color full-color LEDs, if the luminance attenuation values of red, green, and blue are made to be the same, the white balance may be lost, and for example, what is white may become yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, it is necessary to maximize the brightness attenuation value of blue among red, green, and blue, and it is preferable to minimize the brightness attenuation value of red.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, even if the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of the player or the like, for example, by setting the brightness attenuation value for each 1024 ports, the white It is designed to maintain balance as much as possible.

Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of high, medium, and low by the operation of the player or the like, the sound/LED control circuit 7220 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The brightness of the LED is controlled based on the brightness attenuation value set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for each of 1024 ports (for each LED), the attenuation value can be set for each port.

For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be high by the operation of the player or the like, the sequencer 7226b of the voice/LED control circuit 7220 causes the red brightness attenuation value 0, the green brightness attenuation value 5 and the blue brightness attenuation value 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, the sequencer 7226b of the sound/LED control circuit 7220, when the brightness of the LED is set to the middle by the operation of the player or the like, the red brightness attenuation value 50, the green brightness attenuation value 53 and the blue brightness attenuation value 53. When 63 is substituted into the above equation (1) and the brightness of the LED is set to be weak by the operation of the player or the like, the brightness attenuation value of red 80, the brightness attenuation value of green 81 and the brightness attenuation value of blue 85 are set. The output value of the LED is calculated by substituting it in the above equation (1). Then, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 controls the light emission of the LED based on the output value of the LED calculated in this way.

In this way, the audio/LED control circuit 7220 calculates the output value of the LED based on the brightness attenuation value set corresponding to each of red, green and blue, and based on the calculated output value of the LED. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of the player or the like.

[Handle solenoid control processing]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 132, 133, and 163. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state of the LED port and the LED and the solenoid.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of this embodiment, for example, the movement of movable bodies (features) provided in the game area is diversified, and control of the movable bodies is complicated accordingly. Therefore, for simple movements among a wide variety of movements of the movable body, control of the movable body is suppressed by operating a member constituting the accessory with a solenoid or providing a locking mechanism in the accessory. I am trying to When the accessory driver receives the motor operation request, the accessory driver sequentially outputs the contents of the motor operation data. The determination of the output of the motor driver and the end of the motor operation is performed by a timer interrupt process of 1 msec as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt processing, output determination and end determination (that is, start and end determination) of the accessory motor are performed, and synchronous control of the plurality of motors is also performed.

Further, the voice/LED control circuit 7220 of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163, is based on a command from the host control circuit 7210, and is connected to each LED port on the frame side LED and The LEDs on the board surface side (for example, the LEDs arranged on the game board 7012 and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013) are controlled to emit light through the LED driver. Among the LED ports (Port0 to Port23) controlled by the LED driver, the solenoid is connected to Port6 and the LEDs are connected to the other Ports.

The audio/LED control circuit 7220 receives a command from the host control circuit 7210 and causes the LED connected to each port of the frame-side LED and the board-side LED to emit light through the LED driver. By connecting a solenoid to the port 7006, the solenoid can also be operated via the LED driver. As a result, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the variety of the movement of the accessory. ..

By the way, as shown in FIG. 163, when the operation of the solenoid is executed through the LED driver, it is necessary to synchronously control the operation of the solenoid for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. The operation of the accessory is performed by interrupt processing of 1 msec including synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, if a control code is added to the accessory sequence table and the solenoid and a plurality of motors for operating the accessory are to be synchronously controlled, a value greater than 0 is set to the control code. I'm trying to set it. Then, the host control circuit 7210 acquires the control code of the accessory that is being reproduced by the accessory device in the processing of the main loop (see step S4204 of FIG. 132), and the acquired control code has a value greater than 0. In this case, the control of the LED port corresponding to the control code (for example, Port 6 to which the solenoid is connected) is executed (see step S4205 in FIG. 132). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control between the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory.

The control of the LED port corresponding to the control code is executed in the main loop so that the normal LED control executed in the interrupt process of 1 msec is not affected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid is connected to a part of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23), the above-described LED brightness adjustment is performed by an operation of the player or the like. Then, the voltage to the solenoid is also reset, but since the solenoid operation is only ON/OFF, it is considered that the influence on the solenoid is small. Further, when the synchronization effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute the synchronization effect.

[Data load processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, a data loading process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S4201 of FIG. 132) executed when the power is turned on. Further, the data loading process may be performed during the game. These data loading processes include data transfer from ROM to RAM or buffer (for example, data transfer from sub-main ROM 7205 to SRAM 7210b, data transfer from CGROM 7206 to built-in VRAM 7237 (for example, see FIG. 102)), that is, , A process of loading the data stored in the ROM into the RAM or the buffer (data loading process).

In the above data loading process, if the amount of data to be transferred is large, it takes time to load the data, and there is a risk that the watchdog is reset and the data loading process ends. When the watchdog is reset, it is difficult to determine whether the reset is caused simply because the amount of data is large and it takes time or when an error occurs during data loading. Further, when the data loading process is completed, the host control circuit 7210 cannot determine whether the loading is completed or the loading is unsuccessful, and keeps waiting for the completion of the loading, so that the automatic recovery cannot be performed. There is a risk of becoming.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the time required for the data loading process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, an error occurs, the data loading process is terminated, and the data is reloaded. The data loading process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of a data load process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 7210.

As shown in FIG. 164, the host control circuit 7210 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S4651). The transfer time is the time required to load data from ROM to RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred, but in this embodiment, it is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (transfer data amount per unit time) x (transfer time guide + α)...Equation (2)
The transfer data amount per unit time and the transfer time reference of the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transferred data amount, or based on the transferred data amount, for example, the host control circuit 7210. You may make it calculate by. It should be noted that α is a time for allowing a margin for data loading.

Upon the processing in step S4651 ending, the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4652 and starts loading data from the ROM to the RAM.

After starting the data loading (step S4652), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the data loading is completed (step S4653). If data loading has not been completed (NO in step S4653), the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4654. On the other hand, if the data loading is completed (YES in step S4653), the host control circuit 7210 ends the data loading process.

In step S4654, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the data transfer time has exceeded the upper limit value. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (YES in step S4654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S4655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S4654), the host control circuit 7210 determines that an error has occurred and executes error processing. The error process executed here is a process of resetting the load data by the watchdog reset without performing the clearing process of the watchdog timer (step S4656) and reloading. After that, the host control circuit 7210 returns to step S4654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S4654), it is reloaded as error processing.

In this way, when performing the data loading process, the host control circuit 7210 keeps performing the clearing process of the watchdog timer at regular intervals while waiting for the completion of loading so that the watchdog reset does not occur during the normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the host control circuit 7210 resets the load data and reloads it. As a result, even if the data loading process takes time, the data is automatically restored by reloading.

[Sub random number processing]
Next, sub random number processing executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 7210 will be described.

The sub-random number process includes a random number initialization process that is executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S4201 of FIG. 132) when the power is turned on, a random number periodic update process that is periodically executed, A random number acquisition process that is executed when a random number is used is included. The sub-random number process is, unlike the special symbol lottery by the main CPU 7071 (for example, refer to FIG. 101) related to the payout, a process for a random number that does not affect the payout, for example, is used for determining a production mode. However, the sub-random number process described below may be applied to the random number process executed by the main CPU 7071. These sub-random number processes described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 7210. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number periodic update processing. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of (a) random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, (c) a flowchart showing an example of random number 3 acquisition processing, and (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, four random numbers are used (random number 1 to random number 4), and the initialization processing for these four random numbers is performed by clearing the game data RAM as shown in FIG. It is executed at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the random number initialization process, the host control circuit 7210 first acquires the RTC time (minutes/seconds) (step S4671), and then enters a loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 7210 first creates a random number SEED (step S4672). Creation of the random number SEED in the random number initialization process is executed based on the following expression (3).
SEED (random number 1 to 4)=(RTC time (second)+(RTC time (minute)×60)+random number (random number 1 to 4))×initial prime number...Equation (3)

After creating the random number SEED in step S4672, the host control circuit 7210 saves the random number SEED created in step S4672 in the random number backup, that is, the SRAM 7210b (see, for example, FIG. 102) (step S4673). The random number SEED backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be erased or may be stored continuously.

When the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of step S4672 and step S4673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in this embodiment), it exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

Thus, in the random number initialization process, the RTC time minutes and seconds are used. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization involves the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds.

Next, the random number periodic update processing will be described with reference to FIG. The random number regular update process is a process of periodically updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the bank flip end wait shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the random number periodic update process, the host control circuit 7210 has the random number 1 acquisition process (step S4681), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S4682), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S4683), and the random number 4 acquisition. The processing (step S4684) is performed in this order. The random number periodic update process is always executed while waiting for the completion of bank flip. Further, even when the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs the random number periodic update processing once in one frame.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), in the random number 1 acquisition process, random number 1 is updated (step S4685), that is, random number 1 is acquired and then random number 1 is updated. After that, the random number 1 is backed up, that is, the obtained random number 1 is stored in the SRAM 7210b (see, for example, FIG. 102) (step S4686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 167(b), the random number 2 acquisition processing updates the random number 2 (step S4687) and backs up the random number 2 (step S4688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the random number 3 acquisition processing updates the random number 3 (step S4689) and backs up the random number 3 (step S4690). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 167(d), the random number 4 acquisition processing updates the random number 4 (step S4691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S4692). The random numbers backed up in step S4686, step S4688, step S4690, and step S4692 are the random numbers acquired this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be stored continuously. ..

Note that any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from the random numbers generated within the range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the host control circuit 7210 first performs a random number 3 acquisition process (step S4693). The random number 3 acquisition process is a process of acquiring the random number to be used for determining the random number to be used among the random number 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4. Upon executing the random number 3 acquisition processing in step S4693, the host control circuit 7210 moves to step S4694.

In step S4694, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the number of remainders (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder number”) when dividing the random number acquired by the random number 3 acquisition process of step S4693 by 4 is 0 or 1. Determine whether. If the remainder is 0 or 1 (YES in step S4694), random number 1 acquisition processing is performed (step S4695). On the other hand, if the number of remainders is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S4694), the process proceeds to step S4696.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4696 whether or not the number of remainders is two. If the number of remainders is 2 (YES in step S4696), random number 2 acquisition processing is performed (step S4697). On the other hand, if the remainder is not 2 (NO in step S4696), the process moves to step S4698.

The host control circuit 7210 determines in step S4698 whether or not the number of remainders is three. If the number of remainders is 3 (YES in step S4698), random number 4 acquisition processing is performed (step S4699). On the other hand, if the number of remainders is not 3 (NO in step S4698), this means that there is no number of remainders 0 to 3, so the process is repeated from step S4693.

Note that the random number 1 acquisition process (step S4695), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S4697), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S4693), and the random number 4 acquisition process (step S4699) are all as shown in FIG. 167. ..

Thus, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the random number selected from random number 1, random number 2, and random number 4 is updated, but the random number that is not selected is updated. Not done

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment, the random number initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, and the random number acquisition process is performed for the selected random number when the random number is used, and the bank flip end wait or the bank flip end is performed. Random number periodical update processing is performed even when waiting does not occur.

The calculation formula when updating the random number is as shown in the following formula (4).
Update value this time = (update value of last time x prime number of each random number) +1 ... Expression (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition processing is a value of 0 to 32767 that is right-shifted back from 32 bits to 16 bits. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the current update value of 32 bits is right-shifted back from 32 bits to 16 bits. Then, the 16th bit is masked, and the value indicated by 1 to 15 bits (one of 0 to 32767) is determined as the updated value this time.

By performing the sub-random number process described above, it is possible to randomize the acquired random numbers, and it is possible to prevent the acquired random numbers from being biased. In particular, since the random number SEED at the time of initialization involves the time when the power is turned on up to the minute/second unit, it is possible to change the initial value each time.

[Modification of sub-random number processing]
Although the sub-random number process in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number process (variation example) described below may be performed instead of or in combination with the above-described sub-random number process. Further, the sub-random number process (variation example) described below may be applied to the random number process executed by the main CPU 7071. A modified example of this sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. Note that FIG. 169 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 7210 for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process. However, in FIG. 169, only the processing necessary for the description is shown, and other processing is omitted. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit 7210.

The host control circuit 7210 first performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S4201 of FIG. 132) (step S4701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (power number) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in the stack pointer.

When the random number initialization processing in step S4701 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 enters the main loop, performs sub device input processing (step S4702), and then performs various request control processing (step S4703). In this various request control processing (step S4703), the data is output to various devices based on the request created in step S4705, which will be described later, one frame before.

When the host device input processing (step S4702) and various request control processing (step S4703) are performed, the host control circuit 7210 performs random number table creation processing (step S4704). In the random number table creation process of step S4704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power of 2 size at the drawing timing. To obtain the random numbers registered in the random number table, for example, a random number seed that is determined based on the current random number seed number among the random number seeds that are powers of two is used. For example, when 2 ³ (8) random number seeds a to h are prepared, and the current random number seed number is 4, the random number seed d is used.

In step S4704, the host control circuit 7210 can create a random number table having a size of, for example, ²⁵ (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in this random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 7210 updates the value of the random number seed. The random number seed is updated by multiplying the previous update value by the prime number and then adding 1 as in the case of the above-described expression (4). It should be noted that the size of the random number table may be any power of 2 (pieces) in this modification, and ²⁵ (32) is adopted, but any size of power of 2 (pieces) may be adopted. good.

As shown in FIG. 170, the random number seed used for creating the random number table in step S4704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 7210 when the serial command is received (step S4801). It is updated by using (step S4802). In the random number seed update process of step S4802, the random number seed number used for creating the random number table is updated by incrementing the random number seed number and using the incremented random number seed number as the current random number seed number.

Returning to FIG. 169, when the random number table creation processing in step S4704 is performed, the host control circuit 7210 enters a packet reception loop.

In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs an animation constructing process (step S4705) for creating a request for animation for animation effect, and performs a random number acquisition process when a random number is used (step S4706). The request created in step S4705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

In the random number acquisition process of step S4706, the host control circuit 7210 acquires a random number from the random number table created in step S4704. The random number acquired here is used in a lottery (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for moving image production) related to the production executed by the host control circuit 7210. When the host control circuit 7210 acquires a random number from the random number table in step S4706, it updates (increments) the reference position of the random number table. Note that the reference position of the random number table is only performed when the random number is acquired from the random number table, and is not used in the random number table creation process of step S4704.

The host control circuit 7210 repeats the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 for the packet reception. The host control circuit 7210 exits the packet reception loop after performing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 for the packet reception.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 7210 performs animation update processing (step S4707), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S4708).

The host control circuit 7210 repeatedly performs the processes of steps S4702 to S4708 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec.

According to the modification of the sub-random number process described above, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities in the packet reception loop, only the random number is acquired by changing the reference position using the same random number table that has already been created. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the host control circuit 7210 while giving randomness to the acquired random numbers.

[Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 7001 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, the main control circuit 7100 itself is not limited to a mode in which a game medium is shot or thrown in by a physical player's action to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium managed by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 7100 and managing the game medium.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 7100 manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface with a medium handling device, and provides a necessary game medium for lending a game medium (that is, for a player to insert a game medium). Operation) or a combination relating to the payout of a game medium (a winning combination is achieved), a payout operation of a game medium (that is, a game medium is paid out to a player, and a necessary game medium is obtained. It is sufficient to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and the game is managed. In addition to the case where a person directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the capability of not transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by the image pickup means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine is described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has a game medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, an upper plate and a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game sphere is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game sphere does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game sphere does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has got a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Furthermore, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that consumption, lending and payout of balls are performed. Further, "increasing or decreasing the number of game media" indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. In addition, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media accompanying lending and payout" is data relating to decrease in balls held due to firing of game balls and increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball through each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball due to that is added to the number of balls owned. Also, when a game ball is launched, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of balls to the game medium management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a ball (ball lending) or counting (returning) the ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit the data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the gaming media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted possessed balls can be used for prize exchange or the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

[Appendix]
[First gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit.

As a gaming machine of this kind, a long press effect that changes the execution mode of the specific game effect is performed on the operation means on condition that a predetermined long press operation is performed by the player, and a short time shorter than the long press operation. There is known a game machine capable of executing a continuous stroke effect on condition that a continuous stroke operation in which a push operation is performed a plurality of times is performed (for example, see JP-A-2015-065977). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if a long press operation is performed within a long press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether or not a long press operation is performed, a long press effect is executed.

(First issue)
As in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if the control is performed by determining whether a long press operation is performed on the operation means or a continuous hit effect is performed, the control load increases, which is not preferable. ..

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by performing an effect that can give a further visual impact.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

The first gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of executing main processing (for example, main loop processing) in which various processing (for example, various request control processing) is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 33.3 msec),
A predetermined operation means (for example, a main button),
A control in which an interrupt process is performed every time period shorter than the predetermined time period (for example, 1 msec), and input information can be generated in the main process based on an input state of the operation unit detected by the interrupt process. Means (eg, host control circuit 7210),
Equipped with
The control means is
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
As the input information, after the input state of the operation means is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the ON state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 frames), and then the input state of the operation means is Input information for generating information (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function) capable of determining that an ON state has occurred periodically as long as the ON state continues for a time shorter than a certain time (for example, 4 frames) Generating means (for example, the host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4309),
A device control unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210) capable of controlling a predetermined device based on the information generated by the input information generation unit (for example, the ON edge information with the repeat function). Characterize.

According to the first gaming machine, based on the input state of the operating means (for example, the input information of the sub device), after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the ON state continues for a certain time. As long as the input state of the operating means remains in the ON state for a shorter time than the fixed time after it is determined that the sub-device is generated, it is possible to periodically generate information that can determine that the ON state has occurred. It is possible to easily perform control such as continuous hit effect control, long press effect control, and the like.

Further, according to the first gaming machine, it becomes possible to execute the control according to the mode of the operating means while reducing the control load.

[Second gaming machine, third gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine including a display device that emits light with a backlight is disclosed (see, for example, JP-A-2016-159026).

(Second task)
However, if the brightness of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, for example, the display of the effect image on the display device may be unstable, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the second problem described above, a second gaming machine and a third gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

The second gaming machine is
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner (for example, a backlight),
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data (for example, brightness data) corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area;
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit;
Equipped with
The data setting means,
The drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is configured to set new drive data when the number of drive data settable in the predetermined area reaches a reference data number. And

According to the second gaming machine, when the drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference data number when the number of drive data storable in the predetermined area reaches the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) that is output by the driving unit can be output, and the light emitting unit can stably emit light without using a driver. It becomes possible.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

The third gaming machine is
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner (for example, a backlight),
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data (for example, brightness data) corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area);
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit;
A time measuring means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4356) capable of measuring the elapsed time after the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
The drive data can be set to a predetermined area of the data storage means (the processing of step S4354 can be executed) based on the time measured by the time measuring means having passed a predetermined time or more. And

According to the third gaming machine, the drive data is stored in the predetermined area of the data storage unit on the basis of the elapsed time after the drive data is set in the predetermined area of the data storage unit being longer than the predetermined time. Is set. For example, if some processing takes time, there is no drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage unit until the timing for setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage unit. There is a risk that In this respect, according to this gaming machine, even if it is not the timing for setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is set in the data storage means based on the elapse of the predetermined time or more. Since it is set in the area of No. 3, it is possible to prevent the drive data set in the predetermined data area from becoming empty. Therefore, a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive unit can be output, and the light emission unit can be stably provided without a driver. It becomes possible to emit light.

Further, according to the second gaming machine and the third gaming machine, it becomes possible to prevent the light emission of the light emitting means from becoming unstable.

[Fourth Gaming Machine, Fifth Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is used for performance and decoration by causing a light emitting device, which is provided on the front side and is composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs, to emit light in a predetermined manner. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(Third subject)
By the way, in recent years, production has become flashy, including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the brightness of the light emitting device is high, some players may feel stress. If the brightness of the light emitting device can be manipulated by the player or the like, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but this may not be enough.

In order to solve the third problem, a fourth gaming machine and a fifth gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The fourth gaming machine
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner;
Operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013),
Based on the operation of the operation unit, the first light emission control unit capable of changing the brightness of the first light emission unit to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a host control circuit that executes the process of step S4384). 7210),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means capable of changing the brightness of the second light emission means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4385),
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed to one of the plurality of steps at a timing different from the timing of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the fourth gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the timing is different from the timing when the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to one of a plurality of levels, so that the degree of freedom for the player to change the brightness can be further increased. It will be possible.

(2) In the fourth gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to the light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit;
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the fourth gaming machine of the above (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. Therefore, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive unit, and stabilize the light emission unit without passing through the driver. It becomes possible to emit light. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

(1) The fifth gaming machine
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 7071 that executes the processing of step S4045),
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013),
Based on the result of the lottery, a variable display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 7230) that performs a variable display of a symbol (for example, a production identification symbol) on the display unit,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner;
Operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013),
Based on the operation of the operation unit, the first light emission control unit capable of changing the brightness of the first light emission unit to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, host control for executing the process of step S4394). Circuit 7210),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means for controlling the light emission mode of the second light emission means based on a predetermined request (host control circuit 7210 for executing the processing of step S4392);
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
Based on the operation means being operated, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variable display of the symbols is finished. (For example, the processing of step S4399 is executed).

According to the fifth gaming machine of (1) above, when the operating means is operated, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variable display of the symbols is finished. Here, since the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the brightness of the second light emitting means after the variable display of the symbols ends. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means while suppressing the brightness to the limit.

(2) In the fifth gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to the light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit;
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the fourth gaming machine of the above (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. Therefore, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive unit, and stabilize the light emission unit without passing through the driver. It becomes possible to emit light. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

Further, according to the fourth gaming machine and the fifth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player or the like can more appropriately adjust the brightness of the light emitting device.

[Sixth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is used for performance and decoration by causing a light emitting device, which is provided on the front side and is composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs, to emit light in a predetermined manner. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(Fourth task)
By the way, in recent years, production has become flashy, including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of light received from the light emitting device is high, it may be stressed by some players.

In order to solve the above-mentioned 4th subject, the 6th game machine of the following composition is provided.

(1) The sixth gaming machine
The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner;
Operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013),
Based on the operation of the operation unit, the first light emission control unit capable of changing the brightness of the first light emission unit to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a host control circuit that executes the process of step S4394). 7210),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means capable of changing the light emission mode of the second light emission means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4406),
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
Based on the operation of the operation means, the mode of the light emission effect executed by the second light emission means is limited and executed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emission means is changed. It is characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the sixth gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emission effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited. .. Therefore, the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting means can be suppressed by a simple process.

(2) In the sixth gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to the light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit;
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the fifth gaming machine of (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. Therefore, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive unit, and stabilize the light emission unit without passing through the driver. It becomes possible to emit light. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

Thus, according to the sixth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the intensity of light received from the light emitting device can be suitably adjusted by the player or the like.

[Seventh gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, gaming machines in which an effect depending on an RTC (real time clock) is performed are known.

In this type of gaming machine, an RTC abnormality determination is performed when the power is turned on, if there is an abnormality, the date and time is notified, and if an RTC abnormality is recognized, a gaming machine that can quickly cope with this is provided. It is publicly known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-51853 (for example, paragraph [0094])).

(Fifth task)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time is notified, so there is a possibility that it can be dealt with quickly, but if the date and time cannot be acquired due to an RTC abnormality, it depends on the RTC. It may not be possible to perform the effect.

In order to solve the fifth problem, a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

The seventh gaming machine,
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information,
Time information management means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4413) that can acquire time information from the real-time clock and update the acquired time to the current time information,
Production execution means (e.g., host control circuit 7210) capable of executing a specific production (e.g., RTC production) based on the current time information being specific time information (e.g., designated time);
An abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4414),
Equipped with
The time information management means,
When it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information acquired last time by the time information management means is maintained as the current time information (for example, step S4415), and it is determined that the real-time clock is normal. Then, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the process of step S4416),
The effect execution means,
The specific effect is executed on condition that the current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S4417) and the previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S4418) (step S4419). ) Is configured as follows.

According to the seventh gaming machine, even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to preferably perform the effect depending on the RTC.

[Eighth game machine, ninth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a start opening, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that decodes compressed image data, appropriately converts the decoded image data, stores it in a frame buffer, and outputs it to a display device. (For example, JP-A-2014-87402 (see paragraph [0100])).

(Sixth task)
In recent years, variations in the effect images displayed on the display device are increasing, and the control of the effect images tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

In order to solve the sixth problem, an eighth gaming machine and a ninth gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

The eighth gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of executing processing (for example, bank flip) for switching functions of a drawing output destination buffer having a drawing function and a frame buffer having a display function,
Registration means (eg, display control circuit 7230 capable of executing step S4449 or step S4458) capable of registering image information (eg, composition) related to the effect image displayed on a predetermined display means in the drawing output destination buffer. When,
After the drawing output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer (for example, after the process of step S4446 is performed), an effect image is displayed on the predetermined display unit based on the image information registered by the registration unit. An effect image display control means (for example, a display control circuit 7230) for controlling the display,
Equipped with
The registration means is
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for temporarily stopping the image (for example, when YES is determined in step S4447), First registration means for registering image information in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S4449),
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if it is determined as NO in step S4444), the effect image displayed on the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. Second registration means (for example, step S4458 can be executed) that registers the image information in the drawing output destination buffer when the upper limit of the displayed image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S4450). Display control circuit 7230).

According to the eighth gaming machine, while the image information is registered on condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, the image information specific to the registered image information is registered. Since the image information is registered when is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

The ninth gaming machine is
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 7230) capable of controlling image information relating to the effect image reproduced on the plurality of display units;
Equipped with
The display control means,
A layer number determination unit (for example, a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S4441) that determines the appropriateness of the layer number related to the image information that is simultaneously reproduced on the display unit
When the number of layers is proper (for example, when YES is determined in step S4441), the number of display means determining means that determines the appropriateness of the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image (for example, step A display control circuit 7230 for executing the processing of S4442);
When the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S4442), there is a display means that determines the presence of the display means that is the registration target of the image information. Determination means (for example, a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S4443),
When there is a display unit to which the image information is to be registered (for example, when YES is determined in step S4443), the image information registration unit that registers the image information reproduced on the display unit (for example, step S4449). And a display control circuit 7230 for executing the processing of step S4458),
After registering image information reproduced by one of the plurality of display means by the image information registration means, the image information is registered in another display means different from the one display means. Further, the display means number determination means and the display means presence determination means are determined (the processing of step S4459 is performed and then the processing of returning to step S4442 is performed).

According to the ninth gaming machine, when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers related to the image information is appropriate, after the image information relating to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered, Since the image information relating to the effect image displayed on the other display means different from the display means described above is registered, the image information for which the number of layers is determined to be appropriate can be efficiently registered.

As described above, according to the eighth gaming machine and the ninth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling the effect image.

[Tenth Gaming Machine, Eleventh Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, audio effects are also output.

As this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining the abnormality of the digital amplifier is reached, and for example, when the operation determination timing is determined at a time interval of about several seconds, the input port Pi2 There is known a gaming machine that obtains the abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not the digital amplifier is at an abnormal level (see JP-A-2016-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(Seventh task)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of effect images displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like, the effect contents have become more sophisticated and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of the effect contents, the effect contents of the game sound are also becoming more sophisticated, and in order to output a normal game sound, the determination process of the amplification device that amplifies the game sound must be appropriately performed. There is.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a tenth gaming machine and an eleventh gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The tenth gaming machine
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 7262) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
An abnormality determining means for performing abnormality determination processing as to whether or not the amplifying hand is normal (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes processing such as step S4503, step S4511, step S4515);
Equipped with
The abnormality determination means,
The abnormality determination processing can be divided into a plurality of times of abnormality determination processing (for example, processing of step S4503, step S4511, step S4515, etc.), and
Part of the abnormality determination processing (for example, step S4503, step S4511, step S4515) divided into the plurality of times is performed in the predetermined processing (for example, one frame) performed once within the predetermined time, It is characterized in that a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing after the next time.

According to the tenth gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). Since it is performed, it is possible to perform all the abnormality determination processing of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the tenth gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 7262) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
Setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes processing of steps S4506 to S4507 and steps S4522 to S4523) that confirms setting information about the amplification means,
Equipped with
The setting information confirmation means,
The confirmation process can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of confirmation processes,
Part of the confirmation processing (for example, the host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of steps S4506 to S4507, steps S4522 to S4523, etc.) divided into the plurality of times in the predetermined processing performed once within the predetermined time. Is performed, and a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing after the next time.

According to another example of the tenth gaming machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame) Since this is performed over a plurality of frames, it is possible to perform all the confirmation processing of the setting information of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames.

(1) The eleventh gaming machine
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 7262) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
The abnormality determination process for determining whether or not the amplifying unit is normal can be performed by dividing the abnormality determination process into a plurality of times (for example, check status=0, 2, and 3), and the abnormality determination process can be performed multiple times. An abnormality determination unit that performs determination processing over a plurality of times of the predetermined processing (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes processing such as step S4503, step S4511, step S4515),
A progress degree management means for managing the progress degree of the abnormality determination processing (for example, a host control circuit 7210 for managing the check status),
Equipped with
The progress management means,
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of times of abnormality determination processing (for example, processing of check status=0, 2, 3) is completed in one predetermined processing,
The abnormality determination means,
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the check status 0 process) is completed in the one predetermined process, another predetermined different abnormality determination process from the next and subsequent (for example, the next frame and later) When the abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 2) is executed and the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is not completed in the one predetermined process, the next predetermined process is performed. It is characterized in that the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) can be executed again.

According to the eleventh gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the deep bass amplifier) within a predetermined processing (for example, one frame) is performed over a plurality of frames. Since it is performed, it is possible to perform all the abnormality determination processing of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames. In addition, when one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination is performed in the next or subsequent (for example, next frame) predetermined process. Since the process is executed again, any abnormality determination process will be executed until it is completed.

(2) Another example of the eleventh gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 7262) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
The confirmation processing of the setting information about the amplification means can be divided into a plurality of confirmation processings (for example, the processing of check status=1, 5), and the plurality of confirmation processings can be performed a plurality of times of the predetermined processing. Setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of steps S4506 to S4507, steps S4522 to S4523, etc.)
A progress degree management unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that manages a check status) that manages the progress degree of the setting information confirmation processing,
Equipped with
The progress management means,
It is possible to determine whether or not one confirmation process of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, the process of check status=1, 5) is completed in one predetermined process,
The setting information confirmation means,
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status=1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process different from the one confirmation process (for example, check status= 5) is performed, and when the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. ..

According to another example of the eleventh gaming machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame) Since this is performed over a plurality of frames, it is possible to perform all the confirmation processing of the setting information of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one confirmation process is performed in the next and subsequent (for example, next frame) predetermined processes. Since it is executed again, any confirmation processing will be executed until it is completed.

As described above, according to the tenth gaming machine and the eleventh gaming machine, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplification device.

[Twelfth Gaming Machine, Thirteenth Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that writes a SAC number in a voice control register to cause a simple access controller to function and output voice data such as a game sound from a voice memory (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-79971).

(Eighth task)
In recent years, variations in game sounds have increased along with an increase in variations in effect images. However, if a plurality of game sounds overlap, the effect of the game sounds may be reduced by half.

In order to solve the eighth problem, a twelfth gaming machine and a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The twelfth gaming machine is
Setting means (for example, host control circuit 7210) capable of assigning and setting sound information (for example, SAC number) relating to game sound data to a channel,
Sound output means (for example, a voice/LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel;
Equipped with
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S4542),
When the plurality of sound information are specific sound information (for example, chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction), one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is at least a predetermined time. A first setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4544) that delays and sets (for example, one frame) or more;
Without delaying the predetermined time or more, provided that the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, NO is determined in the process of step S4543) ( For example, it is characterized by having a second setting means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of steps S4546 and S4547) for setting the plurality of pieces of sound information (in the frame).

According to the twelfth gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, when the plurality of sound information are specific sound information, one of the sound information is Since the delay is set, the sound effect due to the delay (for example, the sound effect due to the muffling) can be enjoyed. On the other hand, if the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific pieces of sound information, the plurality of pieces of sound information are set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the promptness of the processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the twelfth gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific sound information is
It includes at least first sound information reproduced only once (for example, SHOT reproduction) and second sound information reproduced plural times (LOOP reproduction),
The first setting means,
After the first sound information is set, the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more.

According to the twelfth gaming machine of the above (2), after the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set, the second sound information to be reproduced plural times is set with a delay of a predetermined time or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first sound information reproduced only once from becoming difficult to hear.

The thirteenth gaming machine,
Setting means (for example, voice/LED control circuit) capable of assigning and setting sound information (for example, SAC number) relating to game sound data to a channel,
Sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel,
Equipped with
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S4542),
When the plurality of pieces of sound information are specific sound information (for example, SHOT+chain reproduction of loop), one of the pieces of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is at least a predetermined time (for example, A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4544) that delays the setting by one frame or more, and
Without delaying the predetermined time or more, provided that the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, NO is determined in the process of step S4543) ( For example, a second setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the processes of steps S4546 and S4547) that sets the plurality of pieces of sound information (in the frame),
Have
The second setting means,
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S4545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S4546 is performed). On the other hand, when the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, when NO is determined in step S4545), the mute setting is overwritten to set the sound information (for example, step S4547). The processing is performed).

According to the thirteenth gaming machine, when a plurality of sound information is set for one channel, when one of the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is set with a delay. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect due to the delay (for example, the sound effect due to the muffling). On the other hand, if the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific pieces of sound information, the plurality of pieces of sound information are set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the promptness of the processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Furthermore, when a plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, when the mute setting is set for all channels, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting, and the mute setting for all channels is not set. When it is the mute setting for the channel, the sound information is set by overwriting the mute setting, so that it is necessary (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the variable display of the next special symbol is started. ) Can be secured.

As described above, according to the twelfth gaming machine and the thirteenth gaming machine, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably outputting the game sound.

[14th Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites the game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144066).

(9th subject)
However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-144066, the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value, and the volume of the effect sound is controlled by the primary volume, so to increase the variation of the volume of the effect sound. There is a limit.

In order to solve the ninth problem, a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The 14th gaming machine
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Sound data setting means (for example, host control circuit 7210) capable of setting sound data (for example, voice data) relating to the game sound output from the output means,
Volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 for executing a sound request) having a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
Equipped with
The volume control means,
A first volume control unit (for example, a volume control unit) capable of changing information relating to volume for all of the plurality of reproduction channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, a hardware switch operation or a screen operation by a user) being performed. A host control circuit 7210 for executing volume control 7281 by a hardware switch, user volume control 7282 by a volume setting screen, and debug volume control 7283 during debugging,
A second volume control means (for example, a first reproduction channel primary control 7284, a second reproduction channel primary control 7285, and a second reproduction channel primary control 7285, which is capable of changing volume-related information for each reproduction channel of the plurality of reproduction channels. A host control circuit 7210) which executes the volume controls 7286, 7287, 7288 incorporated in the audio data;
And is configured to be able to change the volume output from the output means by multiplying the information relating to the volume by the first volume control means and the information relating to the volume by the second volume control means. ,
The second volume control means,
A volume control (first reproduction channel primary control 7284) that controls so that the information related to the volume is changed for each reproduction channel when the predetermined operation is performed,
A volume that is controlled so that, even if the predetermined operation is performed for each reproduction channel, information relating to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity). The control (second reproduction channel primary control 7285) can be executed.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the above (1), the game sound output from the output means is multiplied by the information relating to the volume by the first volume control means and the information relating to the volume by the second volume control means. It is possible to give variety to the volume of the game sound. Moreover, the second volume control means controls such that, even if a predetermined operation is performed for each reproduction channel, information relating to a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to perform control of outputting information relating to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed only on a specific reproduction channel, not on the entire channel. ..

(2) In the fourteenth gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first volume control means,
It is characterized in that it is possible to control the volume-related information by controlling the debug volume during debugging.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of (2), the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

Further, according to the fourteenth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of providing variations in the volume of the effect sound.

[15th to 19th gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine capable of adjusting a volume of a gaming sound output from a speaker by a player's operation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229766).

(Tenth task)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the game sound, it may affect sounds that you do not want to change, such as error sounds and warning sounds. , Not preferable.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the fifteenth to nineteenth gaming machines having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The fifteenth gaming machine
A plurality of output means (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means,
A sound control unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit;
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The plurality of output means include a dedicated output means (for example, a dedicated speaker) used for outputting a specific sound, and a shared output means (for example, a shared speaker) used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound. Contains at least and
The sound control means,
Regarding the dedicated output means, even if the operation means is operated, a specific sound control means capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed (for example, a step A host control circuit 7210 which executes S4559),
Regarding the shared output means, a non-specific sound control means capable of executing control for outputting the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host executing step S4558). And a control circuit 7210).

According to the fifteenth gaming machine of (1) above, the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound is constant before and after the operation is performed even if the operating hand capable of operating the volume is operated. The volume is controlled to be output. That is, although the volume can be operated, the constant volume is output without the volume changing before and after the operation of the operating means. Further, regarding the common output means used to output a sound other than the specific sound, the second information in which the volume information is changed based on the operation of the operating hand capable of operating the volume is output. It is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(2) In the fifteenth gaming machine described in (1) above,
The dedicated output means is a speaker for vibration.

According to the fifteenth gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound or a warning sound) from the speaker for vibration at a constant volume.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the power is turned on (for example, during various initialization processes in step S4201), a dedicated output setting unit (for example, the process in step S4201 is executed to set which of the plurality of output units is to be the dedicated output unit. Further comprising a host control circuit 7210) for
The data relating to the specific sound (for example, the voice data relating to the specific sound designated by the SAC number) defines that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output means. And

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data relating to the specific sound is defined in the dedicated output means, so it is possible to set which of the output means is the dedicated output means. At the same time, since it is stipulated that audio data relating to a specific sound of which a constant volume is output will be output from the dedicated output means, it is possible to enhance versatility.

(1) The 16th gaming machine
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means,
A sound control unit having a plurality of reproduction channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes a sound request control process);
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The plurality of reproduction channels include at least a dedicated channel used to output a specific sound and a shared channel used to output a sound other than the specific sound,
The sound control means,
For the dedicated channel, even if the operating means is operated, a specific sound control means capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed (for example, step S4580). A host control circuit 7210) for executing
For the shared channel, non-specific sound control means capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, host control executing step S4581). And a circuit 7210).

According to the sixteenth gaming machine of (1) above, even if the operating means is operated for the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. Controlled. That is, although the volume can be operated, the volume is not changed before and after the operation of the operation means, and constant volume information is output. Also, for shared channels used to output sounds other than specific sounds, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operator's hand that can operate the volume, so volume adjustment is preferable. It becomes possible to do it.

(2) In the sixteenth gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the power is turned on, a dedicated channel (for example, CH31, CH32) used for outputting the specific sound and a shared channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) used for outputting the sound other than the specific sound are set. Channel setting means (for example, the host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4201),
Sound information registration means for registering sound information (for example, SAC number) concerning each of the specific sound and the sound other than the specific sound in the dedicated channel or the shared channel (for example, host for registering SAC number) Control circuit 7210),
Is further provided.

According to the sixteenth gaming machine of (2), when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound are set. At the same time, the sound information related to the specific sound and the data of each sound other than the specific sound is registered in each channel, so that versatility can be improved.

The seventeenth gaming machine,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means,
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes a sound request control process);
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The sound control means,
Data discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data of the specific sound (for example, the host control circuit 7210 which executes step S4599),
When the data discrimination means determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. Specific sound control means capable of executing the control for outputting the first information (for example, the host control circuit 7210 executing step S4600),
When the data discrimination means determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific data, the second information is set so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. And a non-specific sound control means capable of executing output control (for example, the host control circuit 7210 executing step S4601).

According to the seventeenth gaming machine, when it is determined that the data of the game sound being reproduced is the specific data, even if the operating means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. At the same time, when it is determined that the data of the game sound being reproduced is non-specific data, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operation means, so that the adjustment of the volume is preferable. It becomes possible to do it.

The eighteenth gaming machine,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means,
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes a sound request control process);
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The sound control means,
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated. As described above, specific sound control means capable of setting the first information to the reproduction channel (for example, the host control circuit 7210 executing step S4621),
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is performed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having non-specific sound control means capable of setting the second information in the channel (for example, the host control circuit 7210 executing step S4623).

According to the eighteenth gaming machine, if the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific sound information, a constant volume is output even if the operation means is operated. When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

The nineteenth gaming machine,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 7011) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means,
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes a sound request control process);
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 7285). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 7284) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operating means, and Third information having volume information included in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, an audio signal output by the volume controls 7286, 7287, 7288 included in the audio data). ) And
The sound control means,
When the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (for example, sound data not affected by the volume adjustment), Identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S4632) that presets identification information that can identify the existence (for example, a flag that indicates whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment). ,
When setting the volume for the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, determined as YES in step S4637). Even if the operating means is operated, a first volume setting means (for example, a step) that can set the first information to the reproduction channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. A host control circuit 7210) capable of executing the processing of S4641;
When setting the volume to the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information unless the sound data is the specific sound data (for example, when NO is determined in step S4637), the operation is performed. Second volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 capable of executing the processing of step S4638) capable of setting the second information to the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the means.
In setting the volume to the reproduction channel, the reproduction channel is provided with a third volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 capable of executing the process of step S4644) for setting the third information to the reproduction channel.

According to the nineteenth gaming machine, the identification information capable of identifying that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is the specific sound data is preset, and the sound information specified from the sound information is set. Is identified as the specific sound data by the identification information, it is set so that a constant volume is output even if the operating means is operated. Also, the volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel. Further, the third information having the volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, it is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

In the above gaming machine, when the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, YES in step S4637). Even if the operation means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed.In this case, the constant volume is always information related to the maximum volume. Is also good. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (first information relating to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, SAC number). ) Is multiplied by the volume incorporated in the sound data specified by the), the output volume may not be a constant volume.

As described above, according to the fifteenth to nineteenth gaming machines, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adjusting the volume.

[Twentieth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game in which a light emitting means including a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and a light emitting effect of lighting or blinking the light emitting means in a predetermined manner is performed. ing.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which the brightness of the light emitting means can be adjusted, for example, by an operation of a player or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(11th subject)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551, the brightness of the light emitting means can be challenged by the operation of the player or the like, but when the light emitting means can emit light in full color, the light emission is achieved by changing the brightness. The color may change significantly.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

The twentieth gaming machine is
A predetermined light emitting means (for example, a lamp (LED) group 7018),
Operation means operable to select the brightness of the light emitting means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 7013),
A storage unit (for example, an attenuation table) storing a brightness information table (for example, an attenuation table) in which the brightness information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as the brightness information (for example, the brightness attenuation rate) related to the brightness of the light emitting unit. Sub-main ROM 7205),
When the brightness is selected by the operation means, a brightness control means (for example, a host control circuit 7210) capable of controlling the brightness of the light emitting means based on the brightness information table,
Equipped with
The storage means is
Corresponding to the brightness selectable by the operating means, stores a brightness information table in which the brightness information is set for each of the plurality of colors,
The brightness control means,
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operating means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the blue attenuation rate and the red attenuation rate of the plurality of colors are the largest. It is characterized in that

According to the twentieth gaming machine, based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors, the light emission of the light emitting means is performed so that the blue attenuation rate is the highest and the red attenuation rate is the lowest among the plurality of colors. Therefore, even if the brightness of the light emitting means is changed by the operation of the player or the like, it is possible to suppress the change of the emission color, that is, maintain the white balance.

As described above, according to the twentieth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the luminance while suppressing the change in the emission color.

[Twenty-first gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body is arranged on a gaming board, and the movable body is operated to give an impact to the player and thereby increase the motivation for the game. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-288694).

(Twelfth task)
For example, in a gaming machine in which a movable body is operated as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-288694, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and the control for operating the movable body has been complicated accordingly. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load while providing a variety of movements of movable bodies.

In order to solve the twenty-first problem, a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

The 21st gaming machine is
A predetermined accessory,
Control means capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory (for example, host control circuit 7210),
An actuation member (for example, a solenoid) capable of actuating a member constituting the accessory,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs),
A plurality of connecting portions (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting means by being connected to any one of the plurality of light emitting means,
A light emission control means (for example, a voice/LED control circuit 7220) capable of controlling the light emission means by transmitting a signal to the light emission means through the connection portion,
Equipped with
The actuating member is
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emission control means,
The control means is
The operating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be operated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

According to the twenty-first gaming machine, even if the number of actuating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control load for operating the accessory is maintained while maintaining the variety of the movement of the accessory. In addition to suppressing, it is possible to synchronize the accessory and the operating member.

As described above, according to the twenty-first gaming machine, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load.

[Twenty-second gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, compressed data is read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on a liquid crystal display, and the read compressed data is expanded and output to a liquid crystal display. There is known a gaming machine that generates a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(Thirteenth task)
However, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-159026, for example, when the compressed data is read from the CGROM and the image data to be output is generated, if the data amount is large, the load process takes time. .. In this case, the watchdog reset may occur even though the loading process is normally proceeding, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The 22nd gaming machine
A read-only storage area (for example, the sub-main 7205 or CGROM 7206) in which game data related to the game is stored,
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 7210b or built-in VRAM 7237) capable of reading and writing game data relating to the game,
A transfer execution unit (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the data load process in FIG. 164) that executes a load process that reads the game data stored in the read-only storage region and writes the game data in the volatile storage region,
A watchdog timer,
Clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 7210 having a CPU processor) for clearing the timekeeping of the watchdog timer when a predetermined time has passed,
Equipped with
The transfer execution means is
When the load processing exceeds a predetermined time, the watchdog timer is reset, and a load reprocessing unit (host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of step S4656) that executes the load processing again is provided.

According to the twenty-second gaming machine of the above (1), when the time required for the load processing by the transfer executing means exceeds the predetermined upper limit value, the load processing is terminated and the load processing is executed again. Even if the loading process takes a long time, it is possible to automatically recover.

As described above, according to the twenty-second gaming machine, it is possible to preferably proceed with the loading process even when the loading process takes time.

(2) In the twenty-second gaming machine described in (1) above,
The clearing means,
When the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the process of step S4655), and the watchdog timer counts only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time. The error process (for example, the process of step S4656) is executed without clearing,
The transfer execution means is
The load process is executed again as the error process.

According to the twenty-second gaming machine of (2) above, the watchdog timer is cleared when the load processing does not exceed the predetermined time, while the watchdog timer is set only when the load processing exceeds the predetermined time. Since error processing is executed without clearing, it is possible to understand that the load processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of an error.

[23rd Gaming Machine, 24th Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying the effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by the lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various scenes, and the lottery is performed by generating and acquiring a random number. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-023629, the number of digits of a newly acquired random number value is determined, a one-digit numerical value is calculated from the determined random number value, and only the determined number of digits is calculated. It describes how to place and get new numbers.

(14th subject)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number, it is required that the acquired random number is unlikely to have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load becomes large, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a random number acquisition process in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in control load.

In order to solve the fourteenth problem, a twenty-third gaming machine and a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configurations are provided.

The 23rd gaming machine
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information,
Random number generation means for generating a random number used in a predetermined lottery (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of FIG. 166 or FIG. 167),
Equipped with
The random number generation means,
An initialization unit that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information (for example, a host control circuit 7210 that executes random number initialization processing);
An unsteady updating unit (a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of FIG. 167) that updates the random number when the generated random number is used in the lottery;
A steady update means (a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of FIG. 166) that regularly updates the random number even if the generated random number is not used in the lottery;
It is characterized by

According to the twenty-third gaming machine, since the initial value of the random number is generated by using the time information acquired from the real-time clock, the acquired random number can be randomized, and the acquired random number is biased. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is related to the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to change the initial value each time.

The 24th gaming machine,
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
Random number table creating means for creating a random number table in which a plurality of random numbers is registered using any one of a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to h) (for example, executes the process of step S4704). A host control circuit 7210),
A random number acquisition unit that acquires a random number used for a predetermined lottery by referring to the random number table created by the random number table creation unit (for example, in the random number acquisition process of step S4706, from the random number table created in step S4704). A host control circuit 7210) for obtaining a random number,
Reference position updating means for updating the reference position of the random number table at a timing different from the timing of creating the random number table (a host control circuit for updating the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table in step S4706). 7210),
Equipped with
The random number acquisition means,
After obtaining the random number by referring to the random number table, it is possible to obtain the random number provided for the predetermined lottery by referring to the same random number table in which the reference position is updated without creating the random number table (for example, The packet reception loop of FIG. 169 can be executed to execute the random number acquisition process of step S4706).

According to the twenty-fourth gaming machine, even if there are multiple chances to acquire a random number, the reference position is only updated by using the same random number table that has already been created and the random number is acquired. It is possible to reduce the control load while providing irregularity.

As described above, according to the twelfth gaming machine and the thirteenth gaming machine, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably outputting the game sound.

As described above, according to the twenty-third gaming machine and the twenty-fourth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in control load.

Further, according to the first to twenty-fourth gaming machines, it is possible to preferably provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. The third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portions to which the description in the first embodiment and the second embodiment applies also in the third embodiment will be omitted.

In this specification, the side (direction) from the pachinko gaming machine 7001 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the pachinko gaming machine 7001, and the side opposite to the front side is the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the pachinko gaming machine 7001, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

<Display device 8000 and lenticular sheet 8010>
FIG. 171(a) is a perspective view of the lenticular sheet. FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the left-eye pixel and the right-eye pixel.

In the second embodiment, it is described that the display device 7013 is attached to the base door 7003 (see FIG. 3). Similarly, in this embodiment, the display device 8000 is attached to the base door 7003.

The display device 7013 in the second embodiment is a liquid crystal display device and has a configuration in which 1280 pixels are arranged in the horizontal direction and 1024 pixels are arranged in the vertical direction, although not shown. In the second embodiment, the display device 7013 is horizontally arranged, with 1280 pixels arranged in the horizontal direction and 1024 pixels arranged in the vertical direction. As a result, in the display area 7013a (see FIG. 4), an image of 1280 horizontal pixels×1024 vertical pixels is displayed as seen from the player.

On the other hand, the display device 8000 according to the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the display device 7013 according to the second embodiment, but the display device 8000 has a configuration similar to that of the second embodiment. It is arranged in a state rotated by 90°. That is, the display device 8000 is arranged vertically, with 1024 pixels arranged in the horizontal direction and 1280 pixels arranged in the vertical direction. As a result, in the display area, an image of 1024 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels is displayed as seen from the player.

A lenticular sheet 8010 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display device 8000. As shown in FIG. 171(a), the lenticular sheet 8010 is configured by arranging a plurality of cylindrical lenses 8010a side by side in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). The cylindrical lens 8010a has a semi-cylindrical shape, and its axial direction coincides with the vertical direction (vertical direction). The width of one cylindrical lens 8010a is a length corresponding to two pixels adjacent in the horizontal direction. Note that FIG. 171(a) shows only a part of the lenticular sheet 8010.

The lenticular sheet 8010 has a function of controlling the traveling direction of light emitted from each pixel. In FIG. 171(b), the light entering the left eye of the player is shown by a solid line, and the light entering the right eye of the player is shown by a broken line. As shown in FIG. 171(b), a pixel through which light incident on the left eye of the player passes (pixel 8020L for the left eye) and a pixel through which light incident on the right eye of the player passes (pixel 8020R for the right eye) , Are alternately arranged in the horizontal direction. In the figure, the left-eye pixel 8020L is indicated by the letter "L", and the right-eye pixel 8020R is indicated by the letter "R".

Due to such optical characteristics of the lenticular sheet 8010, the left-eye pixel 8020L is visible from the player's left eye, whereas the right-eye pixel 8020R is difficult to see. On the other hand, the right eye pixel 8020R is visible from the player's right eye, whereas the left eye pixel 8020L is difficult to see. Therefore, in the display area of the display device 8000, a binocular parallax is formed in each of an area configured by the left-eye pixels 8020L (left-eye area 8030L) and an area configured by the right-eye pixels 8020R (right-eye area 8030R). If the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are displayed so as to cause the above-mentioned problem, the player can stereoscopically recognize the image.

When the i-th pixel from the left and the j-th pixel from the top among 1024 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels are written as P(i,j), i is an odd number (j is an arbitrary number) in the left-eye area 8030L. ), and the right-eye area 8030R is configured by P(i,j) such that i is an even number (j is an arbitrary number). That is, the image for the left eye is displayed in the pixel groups in the odd columns from the left, and the image for the right eye is displayed in the pixel groups in the even columns from the left. In other words, the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are alternately displayed for each adjacent column.

<Drawing process>
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of a drawing process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 173 to 176 are schematic diagrams showing each image generated or used in the process of drawing processing.

The drawing process illustrated in FIG. 172 is performed in the display control circuit 7230 when the drawing request output from the host control circuit 7210 (see FIG. 102) is input to the display control circuit 7230 (see FIG. 102). Is. The host control circuit 7210 generates a drawing request based on the animation request in the drawing control process (see step S4212 in FIG. 132). The animation request is generated in the animation request construction processing (see step S4210 in FIG. 132).

In the drawing process, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether to perform 3D display (parallax display) (step S5001). As described with reference to FIG. 171, the 3D display refers to displaying an image in a manner that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image. In this embodiment, a mode for performing 3D display (3D display mode) and a mode for not performing 3D display (normal display mode) are provided. The player can select to play a game in the 3D display mode by operating a button. Although not shown, the 3D display mode flag is set to ON when the player performs a button operation to play a game in the 3D display mode. In the process of step S5001, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether or not the current mode is the 3D display mode. The display control circuit 7230 can recognize the current mode (3D display mode or normal display mode) by determining whether or not the 3D display mode flag is set to ON.

When it is determined that the 3D display is performed, the display control circuit 7230 draws a parallax-free image in each of the left-eye image region and the right-eye image region (step S5002). The left-eye image area and the right-eye image area are storage areas (left-eye buffer and right-eye buffer) provided in the SDRAM 7250, respectively. The parallax-free image is an image (background material image) that is a material of the background image displayed on the display device 8000. The background image is an image that is two-dimensionally recognized even when observed through the lenticular sheet 8010, and may be a still image or a moving image. As the background material image, a two-dimensional image (for example, one that has been converted so that it looks like the same image from all viewpoints) may be obtained by performing an arithmetic operation in advance on an external computer. An image corresponding to the viewpoint (for example, obtained when the target background is observed from one of the left eye and the right eye) may be used.

The image data corresponding to the background material image (background material image data) is data of 480 horizontal pixels×768 vertical pixels (smaller size than the image displayed on the display device 8000), and the CGROM 7206 in the CGROM board 7204. (Refer to FIG. 102) (refer to FIG. 173(a)). In the process of step S5002, the display control circuit 7230 reads the background material image data from the CGROM 7206, decodes the background material image data, and writes the decoding result to both the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer in the SDRAM 7250. The left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer may be provided in a storage unit other than the SDRAM 7250 (for example, the built-in VRAM 7237).

Next, the display control circuit 7230 draws a parallax image in each of the left-eye image area and the right-eye image area (step S5003). The parallax image is an image (foreground material image) that is a material of the foreground image displayed on the display device 8000. The foreground image is an image (character image) that is stereoscopically recognized when observed through the lenticular sheet 8010, and is an image displayed as a foreground with respect to the background image. The character image is an image composed of characters (people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, or a combination thereof), and may be a still image or a moving image. As the foreground material image, a left foreground material image and a right foreground material image are provided. The left foreground material image is an image with the left eye as a viewpoint, and an image obtained when the character is observed from the left eye can be used. The right foreground material image is an image with the right eye as a viewpoint, and an image obtained when the character is observed from the right eye can be used.

The left foreground material image and the right foreground material image can be created by performing three-dimensional image processing by an external computer in advance. For example, with respect to an object (character) modeled by polygons, the left eye is viewed from the viewpoint. And an image with the right eye as the viewpoint can be obtained respectively by rendering. Alternatively, after preparing an image corresponding to one viewpoint (for example, the left eye or the right eye, or the middle point of the left eye and the right eye), the image is horizontally shifted by a distance corresponding to the position in the depth direction. Thus, the left foreground material image and the right foreground material image may be created. As a result, the character image can be shown to the player in a manner of popping out or retracting from the screen in accordance with the horizontal shift amount between the left foreground material image and the right foreground material image.

The image data corresponding to the left foreground material image (left foreground material image data) and the image data corresponding to the right foreground material image (right foreground material image data) are 480 horizontal pixels x 768 vertical pixels (display The data of a size smaller than the image displayed on the device 8000) is stored in the CGROM 7206 in the CGROM substrate 7204 (see FIG. 173(b)). In the process of step S5003, the display control circuit 7230 reads the left foreground material image data from the CGROM 7206, decodes it, writes the decoding result to the left eye buffer in the SDRAM 7250, and reads the right foreground material image data from the CGROM 7206. Decoding is performed, and the decoding result is written to the right eye buffer in the SDRAM 7250.

At this time, the display control circuit 7230 executes alpha blending for superimposing the left foreground material image on the background material image and alpha blending for superimposing the right foreground material image on the background material image. To do. Specifically, the display control circuit 7230 sets 1 or 0 for each pixel as an alpha value for these alpha blending. As a result, in the left-eye buffer, the left foreground material image is overlaid on the background material image as the foreground, and in the right-eye buffer, the right foreground material image is overlaid on the background material image as the foreground. It In the alpha blending, the calculation represented by g=(1−α)f ₁ +αf ₂ is performed in pixel units. f ₁ is the RGB value (0 to 255) of the original image (background material image) to be overwritten, and f ₂ is the RGB value of the new image (left foreground material image or right foreground material image) to be overwritten. (0 to 255), α is an alpha value (0/255 to 255/255) indicating the opacity corresponding to the new image, and g is an RGB value (0 to 255) of the image obtained by alpha blending. ). Alternatively, when the left foreground material image or the right foreground material image is overlaid on the background material image, one of the background material image and the foreground material image (the left foreground material image or the right foreground material image) is selected. The masking process may be executed by using an image (mask image) in which which one is given priority by 1 or 0 is specified for each pixel.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 scales each image obtained in step S5003 according to the screen size of the display device 8000 (horizontal 1024 pixels×vertical 1280 pixels) (step S5004). Here, the image obtained by superimposing the left foreground material image on the background material image is called a pre-scaling left-eye image, and the image obtained by superimposing the right foreground material image on the background material image. Will be referred to as a pre-scaling right-eye image (see FIG. 174(a)). The unscaled left-eye image and the unscaled right-eye image each include 480 horizontal pixels×768 vertical pixels. In the process of step S5004, the display control circuit 7230 causes the scaled image to be an image of 512 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels (the number of horizontal pixels is half the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size, and The pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image are enlarged in the horizontal and vertical directions, respectively, so that the number of pixels in the direction becomes the same as the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size. The images thus obtained will be referred to as a scaled left-eye image and a scaled right-eye image, respectively (see FIG. 174(b)). The scaled left-eye image and the scaled right-eye image each include 512 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 defines and divides each image (the scaled left-eye image and the scaled right-eye image) obtained in step S5004 (step S5005). Then, the display control circuit 7230 synthesizes the divided images (step S5006). The scaled left-eye image is composed of 512 sub-images including a scaled left-eye image (1), a scaled left-eye image (2),..., And a scaled left-eye image (512) ( See FIG. 175(a)). The scaled left-eye image (K) is an image composed of pixel groups (1 horizontal pixel x 1280 vertical pixels) in the Kth column (K is an integer from 1 to 512) from the left in the scaled left-eye image. .. The scaled right-eye image is composed of 512 sub-images including a scaled right-eye image (1), a scaled right-eye image (2),..., And a scaled right-eye image (512) ( See FIG. 175(b)). The scaled right-eye image (K) is an image composed of pixel groups (1 horizontal pixel x 1280 vertical pixels) in the K-th column (K is an integer from 1 to 512) from the left in the scaled right-eye image. ..

In the processing of steps S5005 and S5006, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled left-eye image (1) from the scaled left-eye image stored in the left-eye buffer, and extracts the scaled left-eye image (1 ) Is stored in the leftmost column in the combining buffer provided in the SDRAM 7250 (or the built-in VRAM 7237). Subsequently, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled right-eye image (1) from the scaled right-eye image stored in the right-eye buffer, and the extracted scaled right-eye image (1) is stored in the synthesis buffer. , The second column from the left is stored. Subsequently, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled left-eye image (2) from the scaled left-eye image stored in the left-eye buffer, and the extracted scaled left-eye image (2) is combined with the synthesis buffer. In, the data is stored in the third column from the left. Then, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled right-eye image (2) from the scaled right-eye image stored in the right-eye buffer, and the extracted scaled right-eye image (2) is combined with the synthesis buffer. , The fourth column from the left is stored.

In this way, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled left-eye image (K) from the scaled left-eye image stored in the left-eye buffer, and uses the extracted scaled left-eye image (K) for synthesis. The process of storing in the (2K-1)th column from the left in the buffer, and the scaled right-eye image (K) is extracted from the scaled right-eye image stored in the right-eye buffer, and the extracted scaled right-eye image is extracted. The image (K) for use is stored in the 2Kth column from the left in the combining buffer repeatedly. As a result, a scaled left-eye image (K) is arranged in the (2K-1)th column from the left, and a composite image in which the scaled right-eye image (K) is arranged in the 2Kth column from the left is obtained. It is generated (see FIG. 176(a)). The composite image will be referred to as a pre-rotation composite image. The pre-rotation composite image is composed of 1024 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels.

If it is determined in step S5001 that 3D display is not performed, the display control circuit 7230 draws a parallax-free image in the left-eye image region (step S5007). In this process, the display control circuit 7230 reads the background material image data described above from the CGROM 7206, decodes it, and writes the decoding result to the left-eye buffer in the SDRAM 7250.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 draws a parallax image in the left-eye image area (step S5008). In this processing, the display control circuit 7230 reads the above-described left foreground material image data from the CGROM 7206, decodes it, and writes the decoding result to the left-eye buffer in the SDRAM 7250. At that time, the display control circuit 7230 executes the above-described alpha blending. As a result, the left foreground material image is superimposed as the foreground on the background material image in the left-eye buffer.

Next, the display control circuit 7230 sets the screen size (horizontal 1024 pixels×vertical 1280 pixels) of the display device 8000 to the image (the image for the left eye before scaling shown in FIG. 174(a)) obtained in step S5008. Accordingly, scaling is performed (step S5009). In this processing, the display control circuit 7230 causes the scaled image to be an image of 1024 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels (the number of pixels in the horizontal direction and the number of pixels in the vertical direction are the same as the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size, respectively). As described above), the left-eye image before scaling is enlarged in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

After executing the process of step S5006 or step S5009, the display control circuit 7230 rotates the image obtained by the process of step S5006 or step S5009 and rotates the image obtained by the process of step S5006 or step S5009. (See FIG. 123) (step S5010). In this process, when performing 3D display, the display control circuit 7230 rotates the pre-rotation combined image (see FIG. 176(a)) stored in the combining buffer 90° to the right and transfers it to the frame buffer. If the 3D display is not performed, the image stored in the left-eye buffer (the image obtained by the scaling in step S5009) is rotated 90° to the right and transferred to the frame buffer. At that time, the display control circuit 7230 performs matrix calculation so that the position of each pixel in the transfer source buffer is rotated 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) in the frame buffer (upper left end point and lower right end point). And then paste it). As a result, in the image stored in the frame buffer, the upper left pixel in the transfer source buffer is arranged in the upper right corner, and the lower right pixel in the transfer source buffer is arranged in the lower left corner.

As a result, in the case of performing 3D display, the image (rotated composite image) obtained in step S5010 has the scaled left-eye image (K) arranged in the (2K−1)th row from the top, and It becomes an image (horizontal 1280 pixels×vertical 1024 pixels) in which the scaled right-eye image (K) is arranged in the 2Kth row (see FIG. 176(b)). In the scaled left-eye image (K) and the scaled right-eye image (K), the pixels arranged from top to bottom before rotation are arranged from right to left after rotation. Here, as described above, the display device 8000 is arranged in a state of being rotated 90° to the left. Therefore, by outputting the rotated combined image to the display device 8000, an image of 1024 horizontal pixels×1280 vertical pixels (see FIG. 176(a)) is displayed as seen from the player. Then, at this time, the scaled left-eye image (K) is displayed in the left-eye area 8030L, and the scaled right-eye image (K) is displayed in the right-eye area 8030R (see FIG. 171(b)). In the post-rotation composite image, scaling and rotation have been completed, so that the display position of the post-scaling left-eye image (K) and the post-scaling right-eye image (K) are set to the left-eye area 8030L and the right-eye area, respectively. In order to correspond to the 8030R, it is not necessary to newly perform processing such as interpolation (for example, bilinear interpolation) at the output stage to the display device 8000. This allows the player's left eye to visually see the scaled left-eye image (K) while allowing the player's right eye to visually see the scaled right-eye image (K). Can be realized.

After outputting the image obtained in step S5010 to the display device 8000, the display control circuit 7230 ends the present subroutine.

The pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
Gaming machines such as pachinko and pachislot machines are generally equipped with a display device, and by displaying a wide variety of images on the display device according to the situation of the game, the progress of the game can be enhanced or the development of the game can be prevented. It also improves the player's expectations.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to cause stereoscopic vision by causing binocular parallax by displaying different images to the left and right eyes of the player (for example, , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-19666).

The present inventor, in the process of earnestly studying a game machine capable of stereoscopic vision as described above, realizes a clear stereoscopic vision by devising a method for generating an image to be stereoscopically visualized. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing clear stereoscopic vision.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) Left-eye area (left-eye area 8030L) capable of displaying a left-eye image visible to the player's left eye, and right-eye area capable of displaying a right-eye image visible to the player's right eye ( A right-eye area 8030R), and display means capable of stereoscopically viewing at least a part of a target image composed of the left-eye image and the right-eye image by parallax to the player ( Display device 8000),
Target image generation for generating the target image based on the left-eye original image corresponding to the left-eye image (pre-scaling left-eye image) and the right-eye original image corresponding to the right-eye image (pre-scaling right-eye image) And means,
The target image generation means,
A pixel number conversion unit that converts the number of pixels of the left-eye original image and the number of pixels of the right-eye original image according to the number of pixels of the target image (display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S5004 in FIG. 172). )When,
An image synthesizing unit (a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S5006 in FIG. 172) that synthesizes the images whose pixel numbers have been converted by the pixel number converting unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, the display means (display device 8000) is an area in which a left-eye image that can be visually recognized by the player's left eye can be displayed (left-eye area (left-eye area 8030L)). And an area capable of displaying a right-eye image that can be visually recognized by the player's right eye (a right-eye area (right-eye area 8030R)), which is composed of a left-eye image and a right-eye image. It is configured so that at least a part of the image can be stereoscopically viewed by the player by parallax. Such a target image is generated based on the left-eye original image corresponding to the left-eye image (pre-scaling left-eye image) and the right-eye original image corresponding to the right-eye image (pre-scaling right-eye image). Specifically, the number of pixels of the left-eye original image (image before left-scaling) and the number of pixels of the right-eye original image (image before right-scaling) are converted according to the number of pixels of the target image, and then, The target image is obtained by synthesizing the images with the converted number of pixels (that is, the enlarged or reduced left-eye original image (pre-scaling left-eye image) and right-eye original image (pre-scaling right-eye image)). Is generated. By generating the target image in this way, the present inventor can appropriately display the left-eye image in the left-eye area (left-eye area 8030L), and can also display the right-eye image in the right-eye area (right-eye area). It has been found that it is possible to properly display in the usage area 8030R), and as a result, the player can recognize a clear stereoscopic image. In this way, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to realize clear stereoscopic vision.

(A-2) The gaming machine of (A-1) above,
The target image generation means,
The left-eye source image is generated by synthesizing the left-eye stereoscopic material image (left foreground material image), which is the material of the left-eye image, and the flat-view material image (background material image). An original image generation unit (display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S5003 in FIG. 172),
The right-eye source image is generated by synthesizing the right-eye stereoscopic material image (right foreground material image) and the flat-view material image (background material image) that are the materials for the right-eye image. Original image generation means (display control circuit 7230 that executes the processing of step S5003 in FIG. 172),
The left-eye stereoscopic material image and the right-eye stereoscopic material image are images having parallax, whereas the two-dimensional original material image and the right-eye original image used in the left-eye original image generating means are used. The planar image material image used in the generating means is an image having no parallax,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, in generating the target image, the left-eye stereoscopic material image (the left foreground material image) and the planar-view material image (the background material) that are the materials of the left-eye image. The original image for the left eye (the image for the left eye before scaling) is generated by combining the image with the image). In addition, by combining the right-eye stereoscopic material image (right foreground material image) that is the material of the right-eye image and the stereoscopic material image (background material image), the right-eye original image (right-eye before scaling) Image) is generated. Here, the left-eye stereoscopic material image (left foreground material image) and the right-eye stereoscopic material image (right foreground material image) are images having parallax, but are left-eye image materials. The two-dimensional material image (background material image) and the two-dimensional material image (background material image) that is a material for the right-eye image are images that do not have parallax. By generating a target image using these images as a material, the player is caused to planarly view a portion of the target image that is derived from the planar-view material image (background material image), while the target image is A part derived from the left-eye stereoscopic material image (left foreground material image) and the right-eye stereoscopic material image (right foreground material image) can be stereoscopically viewed. As a result, it is possible to relatively emphasize the stereoscopic vision, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the effect using the stereoscopic vision.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, a part of the target image is viewed in a plan view, but in the present invention, the entire target image may be viewed in a stereoscopic manner. That is, the stereoscopic view and the planar view may be used together as in the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, or the stereoscopic view may be generated independently. When the stereoscopic view and the planar view are used together, the content of the image viewed in the planar view is of course not limited. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the third embodiment, after the left-eye original image (image before scaling, left-eye image) and the right-eye original image (image before pre-scaling right eye) are generated, it is for planar view. Regardless of whether or not the material image (background material image) is used and the content of the planar image material image (background material image), the target image is converted by the same method (conversion of the number of pixels and composition of the converted image). Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to share a program to be used when both stereoscopic vision and planar vision are used together or when stereoscopic vision is independently generated, when changing the content of an image to be stereoscopically viewed, It is possible to reduce the cost of developing the program.

In the third embodiment, the lenticular sheet 8010 is used for generating stereoscopic vision. In the present invention, the means for generating stereoscopic vision is not particularly limited, and means for giving directivity to the light emitted from the display device can be appropriately adopted. For example, a parallax barrier method may be adopted in addition to the lenticular method adopted in the third embodiment. When the parallax barrier system is adopted, for example, a parallax barrier in which barriers and slits are alternately provided may be arranged on the front surface side (player side) of the display device (see FIG. 198). At that time, the light blocking state of the barrier may be configured to be switchable, and the 3D display mode and the normal display mode may be provided as in the third embodiment. The method is not limited to the naked-eye method (method without glasses) such as the lenticular method or the parallax barrier method, and a method using glasses (for example, an anaglyph method) may be adopted. Further, in the third embodiment, the display device is described as a liquid crystal display device, but the display means in the present invention is not limited to a direct-view display (flat panel display), and a projection display (projector). May be

Further, in the third embodiment, the left-eye image and the right-eye image corresponding to the left eye and the right eye (two viewpoints) are displayed in the left-eye area 8030L and the right-eye area 8030R, respectively. In the present invention, the number of viewpoints assumed is not particularly limited, and N images corresponding to N (N is an integer of 2 or more) viewpoints can be visually recognized from the N viewpoints. It may be displayed in the area of. In this case, for example, for each of the N viewpoints, a lenticular sheet or a parallax barrier may be arranged so that pixels corresponding to the viewpoint are visible only from the viewpoint (see FIG. 198). Similar to the third embodiment, the N images are prepared by preparing N parallax images (for example, images obtained when the object is observed from each of N viewpoints) in advance. It can be generated by performing processing related to scaling and/or rotation by using each parallax image as a material. In the scaling process, each of the N unscaled images has a horizontal pixel count that is 1/N of the pixel count corresponding to the screen size, and a vertical pixel count that corresponds to the screen size. Can be scaled up or down to be the same. In the present specification, the parallax image refers to an image that causes parallax, and the left foreground material image and the right foreground material image described in the third embodiment are parallax images. The number of parallax images to be prepared is equal to the number of assumed viewpoints. By increasing the number of viewpoints, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic view even when the positions of the eyes of the player are displaced. It should be noted that if the relative positional relationship between the displayed image and the lenticular sheet or the parallax barrier is deviated, it may be difficult to realize proper stereoscopic vision. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the present invention, the processing relating to both scaling (see step S5004 in FIG. 172) and rotation (see step S5010 in FIG. 172) may be performed, or only the processing relating to one of scaling and rotation is performed. It may be that. When performing the processing related to scaling, the image may be enlarged or reduced, and the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio is not particularly limited. When performing the process related to rotation, the rotation angle is not particularly limited, and may be a multiple of 90° or an angle less than 90° (for example, 45°). Hereinafter, as a modified example, a case will be described in which only the processing related to scaling is performed (the processing related to rotation is not performed).

[Modification]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of animation control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of scaling & synthesis processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 180 and 181 are schematic diagrams showing each image generated or used in the process of the scaling & synthesizing process. 182 to 185 are schematic diagrams showing a process of generating a composite image in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The drawing control process shown in FIG. 177 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in step S4212 of FIG. The animation control main processing shown in FIG. 178 is processing performed by the display control circuit 7230, and is a modification of the animation control main processing shown in FIG. 147. The scaling & composition process shown in FIG. 179 is a process performed by the display control circuit 7230 in the animation control main process shown in FIG. 178. 182 to 185 show one modification of the first to third modifications, but in any of the modifications, the display device 8000 is the display device in the second embodiment. Like 7013, they are arranged horizontally.

In the drawing control process shown in FIG. 177, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5101 to S5105. These processes are steps S5001 to S5003 of FIG. 172, and the processes of steps S5007 and S5008. Since the processing is the same as, the detailed description is omitted here. In the process of step S5101, the host control circuit 7210 performs 3D based on the input state of the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) detected in the timer interrupt process (see step S4252 of FIG. 133) performed every 1 msec. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform display (whether or not the current mode is the 3D display mode). Alternatively, in this process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether to use the 3D display mode or the normal mode based on the information (operation input information) indicating the input state acquired in the main process (see step S4206 in FIG. 132) performed every 33 msec. An animation request corresponding to the display mode may be generated (see step S4210 in FIG. 132), and it may be determined whether the generated animation request corresponds to the 3D display mode.

Also, the processes of steps S5102 and S5103 are the same as the processes of steps S5003 and S5002 of FIG. 172, respectively. However, in the drawing control process shown in FIG. 177, compared with the drawing process shown in FIG. , The order of these processes is reversed. Also, the processes of steps S5104 and S5105 are the same as the processes of steps S5008 and S5007 of FIG. 172, respectively, but the drawing control process shown in FIG. 177 is different from the drawing process shown in FIG. 172. , The order of these processes is reversed. In the present invention, the background material image can be stored in the left-eye buffer and the left foreground material image can be stored in the left-eye buffer in any order, and the background material image can be stored in the right-eye buffer. And the right foreground material image can be stored in the right eye buffer in any order. In alpha blending, an alpha value according to the order may be used. Alternatively, a background layer and a foreground layer are provided, and a background material image is drawn on the background layer, while a left foreground material image and a right foreground material image are drawn on the foreground layer. Good.

The left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer (buffer for the host control circuit 7210) are provided in a predetermined storage means (for example, the sub-work RAM 7210a shown in FIG. 102). The contents drawn in the buffer for the host control circuit 7210 are input to the display control circuit 7230 as a drawing request. Then, the drawing content is stored in a buffer for the display control circuit 7230 (a left-eye buffer and a right-eye buffer provided in the SDRAM 7250 or the built-in VRAM 7237).

In the animation control main process shown in FIG. 178, the display control circuit 7230 executes the processes of steps S5121 to S5124, but the processes of steps S5122 to S5124 are the same as the processes of steps S4431 to S4433 of FIG. 147. Since it is processing, description thereof is omitted here. The processing (scaling & combining processing) in step S5121 will be described with reference to FIG. 179.

In the scaling & synthesis processing shown in FIG. 179, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether to perform 3D display (parallax display) (step S5141). In this process, the display control circuit 7230 determines whether to perform 3D display (whether the current mode is the 3D display mode) based on the operation input information included in the drawing request.

When it is determined that the 3D display is performed, the display control circuit 7230 causes the screen size of the display device 8000 for each image (the left-eye image before scaling and the right-eye image before scaling) obtained in step S5103 of FIG. 177 ( Scaling is performed according to (1280 pixels horizontally×1024 pixels vertically) (step S5142). This process is basically the same as the process of step S5004 in FIG. 172, but the screen size of the display device 8000 is different. In the process of step S5142, the display control circuit 7230 causes the scaled image to be an image of horizontal 640 pixels×vertical 1024 pixels (the number of horizontal pixels is half the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size, and The pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image are enlarged in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, respectively, so that the number of pixels in the direction becomes the same as the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size. The images thus obtained (the image for the left eye after scaling and the image for the right eye after scaling) are each composed of 640 horizontal pixels×1024 vertical pixels (see FIG. 180(a)).

Next, the display control circuit 7230 defines and divides each image obtained in step S5142 (the image for the left eye after scaling and the image for the right eye after scaling) (step S5143). Then, the display control circuit 7230 synthesizes the divided images (step S5144). These processes are basically the same as the processes of steps S5005 and S5006 of FIG. 172. In the processes of steps S5143 and S5144, the display control circuit 7230 extracts the scaled left-eye image (K) from the scaled left-eye image (see FIG. 180(b)) stored in the left-eye buffer, and extracts the scaled left-eye image (K). The processing for storing the scaled left-eye image (K) in the (2K-1)th column from the left in the frame buffer, and the scaled right-eye image stored in the right-eye buffer (Fig. 180(c)). The image for right eye after scaling (K) is extracted from the reference), and the extracted image for right eye after scaling (K) is stored in the 2Kth column from the left in the frame buffer.

As a result, a scaled left-eye image (K) is arranged in the (2K-1)th column from the left, and a composite image in which the scaled right-eye image (K) is arranged in the 2Kth column from the left is obtained. It is generated (see FIG. 181(a)). The composite image is composed of horizontal 1280 pixels×vertical 1024 pixels. In this modified example, the scaled left-eye image (K) is composed of a pixel group (1 horizontal pixel x 1024 vertical pixels) in the K-th column (K is an integer from 1 to 640) from the left in the scaled left-eye image. It is an image to be displayed. The scaled right-eye image (K) is an image composed of pixel groups (1 horizontal pixel x 1024 vertical pixels) in the K-th column (K is an integer from 1 to 640) from the left in the scaled right-eye image. .. That is, in the processes of steps S5143 and S5144, the scaled left-eye image and the scaled right-eye image are decomposed into 640 sub-images, respectively, and these sub-images are alternately arranged to generate a composite image. can do.

As a method of generating a combined image, there can be mentioned a method of using the left combining image shown in FIG. 181(b) and the right combining image shown in FIG. 181(c). In the left combining image, the scaled left-eye image (K) is arranged in the (2K-1)th column from the left, while the pixel group (horizontal 1 pixel x vertical 1024 pixels) in the 2Kth column from the left is arranged. It is an image in which all pixel values are 0. In the right combining image, the scaled right eye image (K) is arranged in the 2Kth column from the left, while the pixel group (horizontal 1 pixel×vertical 1024 pixels) in the (2K−1)th column from the left is arranged. It is an image in which all pixel values are 0. In this method, the display control circuit 7230 generates a left compositing image in the left-eye buffer, a right compositing image in the right-eye buffer, and then a left-combining image and a right compositing image in the left-eye buffer. Performs alpha blending to overlay. In the alpha blending, the display control circuit 7230 sets the alpha value in the pixel group of the (2K−1)th column from the left to 0, and sets the alpha value in the pixel group of the 2Kth column from the left to 1. .. As a result, the composite image shown in FIG. 181(a) is obtained. In this case, the left-eye buffer may be used as a frame buffer.

Alternatively, as described above, the background layer and the foreground layer are provided, and one image (for example, an image for left synthesis) is drawn on the background layer, while the other image (on the foreground layer is drawn). For example, a right compositing image) may be drawn. Note that the pixel values of the pixel group of the 2Kth column from the left (horizontal 1 pixel×vertical 1024 pixels) in the left compositing image, and the pixel group of the (2K−1)th column from the left of the right compositing image ( The pixel value of (horizontal 1 pixel×vertical 1024 pixels) is not limited to 0, and any pixel value can be appropriately adopted. For example, the image composed of the pixel group in the 2Kth column from the left in the image for left synthesis and the image composed of the pixel group in the (2K-1)th column from the left in the image for right synthesis are 1 It may be an image composed of only one color (monochromatic image), and an image composed of pixel groups in the 2Kth column from the left in the image for left synthesis and (2K-1) from the left in the image for right synthesis. The image composed of the pixel group in the )th column may be an image of the same color.

When it is determined in step S5141 that 3D display is not performed, the display control circuit 7230 compares the screen size (horizontal 1280 pixels) of the image (left-eye image before scaling) obtained in step S5105 of FIG. 177. Scaling is performed according to (vertical 1024 pixels) (step S5145). This process is basically the same as the process of step S5009 in FIG. 172, but the screen size of the display device 8000 is different. In the process of step S5145, the display control circuit 7230 causes the scaled image to be an image of 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 1024 pixels in the vertical direction (the number of pixels in the horizontal direction and the number of pixels in the vertical direction are equal to the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size, respectively). The image for the left eye before scaling is enlarged in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. Then, the display control circuit 7230 transfers the obtained image to the frame buffer.

After executing the processing of step S5144 or step S5145, the display control circuit 7230 displays the image stored in the frame buffer (the composite image obtained in step S5144 or the image obtained by the scaling in step S5145). The data is output to the device 8000, and then this subroutine ends.

As described above, in the modification example (first modification example) illustrated in FIGS. 177 to 181, the host control circuit 7210 performs the process related to the generation of the pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image (see FIG. 177). It has been described that the scaling & synthesizing process (see FIG. 179) is performed by the display control circuit 7230. In the present invention, the processing relating to the generation of the composite image (target image) can be configured so that the host control circuit and the display control circuit cooperate to perform a part of the processing. The display control circuit (second control means) may perform the remaining processing by the first control means).

FIG. 182 shows a flow in which a composite image is generated in the 3D display mode of the first modified example. FIG. 183 shows a flow in which a composite image is generated in the normal display mode of the first modified example. In the present invention, as described above, it is possible to share a program and a buffer (a buffer for the left eye and a buffer for the right eye) between the 3D display mode and the normal display mode, and even in the normal display mode, the hard scaler Scaling can be done without using. Note that, in the normal display mode, the image stored in the left-eye buffer and the image stored in the right-eye buffer are not combined, but as in the 3D display mode, the finally generated image is combined. I call it an image. Further, in the normal display mode, the scaling is performed using the image for the left eye before scaling, but the scaling may be performed using the image for the right eye before scaling. That is, in steps S5104 and S5105 of FIG. 177, the pre-scaling right-eye image may be generated by synthesizing the background material image and the right foreground material image on the right-eye buffer.

The images drawn in the left-eye image region (left-eye buffer) and the right-eye image region (right-eye buffer) are updated (frame by frame) each time the drawing control process (see step S4212 in FIG. 132) is performed. Or if the images used in the previous frame (previous drawing control processing) and the current frame (current drawing control processing) are the same, the left-eye image area (left-eye buffer) Also, the image drawn in the right-eye image area (right-eye buffer) may be controlled not to be updated. Further, only one of the image drawn in the left-eye image area (left-eye buffer) and the image drawn in the right-eye image area (right-eye buffer) may be updated in the current frame (current drawing control processing). (A different image may be used for the previous frame and the current frame).

FIG. 184 shows a flow in which a composite image is generated in the 3D display mode of another modification (second modification). In the second modified example, the left-eye image before scaling and the right-eye image before scaling are configured by 640 horizontal pixels×1024 vertical pixels, and the number of pixels of these images is the left-eye image after scaling and the right-eye image after scaling. It is the same as the number of pixels in the image. Therefore, in step S5142 of FIG. 179, the pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image are neither enlarged nor reduced, and a synthetic image is generated using these images as they are. In the present invention, the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio by scaling can be appropriately designed (including 1 time). Thereby, even if the pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image have different numbers of pixels depending on the model, the same program can be used to generate a composite image.

FIG. 185 shows a flow in which a composite image is generated in the 3D display mode of another modification (third modification). In the third modification, the pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image are configured by 960 horizontal pixels×768 vertical pixels. That is, the number of pixels in the vertical direction in the image for left eye before scaling and the image for right eye before scaling is smaller than the number of pixels in the vertical direction in the image for left eye after scaling and the image for right eye after scaling, while the image for left eye before scaling and The number of pixels in the horizontal direction in the image for right eye before scaling is larger than the number of pixels in the horizontal direction in the image for left eye after scaling and the image for right eye after scaling. Therefore, in the scaling process, the unscaled left-eye image and the unscaled right-eye image are enlarged 1024/768 times in the vertical direction and 640/960 times in the horizontal direction. As described above, in the scaling process of the present invention, one of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction may have an enlargement ratio of 1 or more, while the other enlargement ratio may be 1 or less.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portions applicable to the description of the first to third embodiments also in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Drawing control processing>
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of the drawing control process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

In FIG. 186, the display control circuit 7230 performs the drawing control process (see step S4212 of FIG. 132) performed by the host control circuit 7210 and the input of the drawing request output from the host control circuit 7210. The process is shown.

In the drawing control process, the host control circuit 7210 issues (outputs) the drawing request (see step S5202) generated in the previous frame (previous drawing control process) to the display control circuit 7230 (step S5201). The drawing request generated in the previous frame is stored in the subwork RAM 7210a. After executing the processing of step S5201, the host control circuit 7210 executes the drawing request generation processing (step S5202). In this processing, the host control circuit 7210 draws a pre-scaling left-eye image (and a pre-scaling right-eye image) in the left-eye buffer (and right-eye buffer) provided in the sub-work RAM 7210a (see FIG. 177). Generate a drawing request containing drawing information. The generated drawing request is stored in the sub-work RAM 7210a and is output to the display control circuit 7230 in the next frame (next drawing control process) (see step S5201). The drawing request generation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 189.

When the drawing request is input, the display control circuit 7230 executes the drawing process (step S5301). In this process, the display control circuit 7230 executes the scaling & combining process (see steps S5141 to S5145 in FIG. 179). After executing the process of step S5301, the display control circuit 7230 starts the display process of the rendering result (drawing result) obtained by the drawing process (step S5302). In this process, the display control circuit 7230 switches the function of one frame buffer in the SDRAM 7250 in which the rendering result is stored from the drawing function to the display function, and starts the rendering result display process. Then, the display control circuit 7230 outputs a display start command indicating that the display process of the rendering result (drawing result) has been started to the host control circuit 7210 (step S5303), and ends this subroutine. When the display start command is input, the host control circuit 7210 confirms that the display process of the rendering result has started based on the display start command (step S5203), and ends this subroutine.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 187 is an interrupt process performed in the host control circuit 7210 at a cycle of 1 msec (see FIG. 133). In the timer interrupt process, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5221 to S5225, but since the processes of steps S5221 to S5224 are the same as the processes of steps S4251 to S4254 of FIG. 133, The description here is omitted. The process of step S5225 (3D switching determination process) will be described with reference to FIG. 188.

<3D switching determination process>
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of 3D switching determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

In the 3D switching determination process illustrated in FIG. 188, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether to perform 3D display (parallax display) (step S5241). The 3D display refers to displaying an image in a manner that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image. Similar to the third embodiment, the player operates the operation means (buttons, jog dial, etc.) to perform a 3D display mode (3D display mode) and a 3D non-display mode (normal display mode). It is possible to select one of these modes. In the process of step S5241, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the 3D display mode is selected, based on the input state of the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.). The host control circuit 7210 can detect the input state of the operating means in the input state determination processing (see step S5222 in FIG. 187).

When it is determined in step S5241 that the 3D display mode is selected, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to on (step S5242). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5241 that the 3D display mode is not selected, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to off (step S5243). The 3D flag is a flag indicating that the current mode is the 3D display mode. After executing the processing of step S5242 or step S5243, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine. If the input state of the operating means does not change in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process may be ended without executing the 3D switching determination process.

<Drawing request generation process>
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of a drawing request generation process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The drawing request generation process shown in FIG. 189 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in step S5202 of FIG. 186.

In the drawing request generation process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the 3D flag is set to ON (step S5261). When the host control circuit 7210 determines that the 3D flag is set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5262 and S5263. On the other hand, when determining that the 3D flag is not set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5264 and S5265. The processing of steps S5262, S5263, step S5264, and step S5265 is the same as the processing of steps S5103, S5102, step S5105, and step S5104 of FIG. 177, respectively. Omit it.

When the 3D flag is set to ON (3D display mode) by executing the drawing request generation process, the left-eye buffer and the right-eye image before scaling are drawn in the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer. Then, a drawing request including the drawing information is generated. On the other hand, when the 3D flag is set to OFF (normal display mode), the pre-scaling left-eye image is drawn in the left-eye buffer, and a drawing request including the drawing information is generated. The drawing request also includes information indicating whether the 3D flag is on or off. Such a drawing request is output to the display control circuit 7230, and the display control circuit 7230 executes the drawing process (see step S5301 in FIG. 186). Specifically, when the 3D flag is set to on (3D display mode), the scaling process and the combining process (see steps S5142 to S5144 in FIG. 179) are performed, and the 3D flag is set to off. If it is (normal display mode), only the scaling process (see step S5145 in FIG. 179) is performed.

As described above, when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means and the input state is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 187), the timing of the timer interrupt process is the drawing control in the main process. If it is before the processing (see step S4212 in FIG. 132), a rendering request for 3D display is generated in the rendering control processing (current frame) (see step S5202 in FIG. 186), and the next rendering control processing ( In the next frame), the drawing request is output to the display control circuit 7230 (see step S5201 in FIG. 186). As a result, in the next frame, a stereoscopic image (see step S5144 in FIG. 179) is generated and 3D display is performed.

In the drawing control process shown in FIG. 186, the drawing request generated in the previous frame (previous drawing control process) is output to the display control circuit 7230, but it is generated in the current frame (current drawing control process). The rendered drawing request may be output to the display control circuit 7230. In such a form, when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation means at the above timing, the 3D display is performed in the current frame. Further, the 3D switching determination process (see step S5225 in FIG. 187) and the drawing control process (see step S4212 in FIG. 132) may be executed in the same loop process. For example, the 3D switching determination process may be executed in the main process (for example, the sub device input process shown in step S4206 of FIG. 132), or the entire main process including the drawing control process is executed as the timer interrupt process. It may be that. In a mode in which the drawing control process is executed in the timer interrupt process (after execution of the 3D switching determination process), the 3D display is performed at the same time (current time) as when the input state of the operating means is detected or in the next timer interrupt process. Can be configured to occur. In the timer interrupt process, the 3D switching determination process may be performed after the input state determination process, or may be performed before the input state determination process.

In the form described above, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means, the situation of the game when the instruction is input (for example, whether or not the special symbol is changing) Regardless, 3D display may be performed at a predetermined timing (current frame, next frame, current interrupt, next interrupt, etc.). On the other hand, in the following embodiment, a case will be described in which the timing at which 3D display can be performed (switching to 3D display mode) differs depending on the game situation when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input. To do.

<3D switching determination process>
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of 3D switching determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The 3D switching determination process illustrated in FIG. 190 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in step S5225 of FIG. 187.

In the 3D switching determination process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether to perform 3D display (parallax display) (step S5401). This process is similar to the process of step S5241 of FIG. 188. In the processing of step S5401, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the 3D display mode is selected, based on the input state of the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.).

When determining that the 3D display mode is selected, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current state is the first state (step S5402). The first state is a state where the special symbol is changing (currently, the special symbol is changing). In the process of step S5402, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation effect pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started. The host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command. Further, since the special symbol effect start command includes information indicating the variable effect pattern (see FIG. 121), by receiving the special symbol effect start command, the host control circuit 7210 causes the variable effect pattern to change. It is possible to recognize the variation time of the special symbol. The special symbol effect start command is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210) in the process of step S4044 of FIG. 126.

When determining that the current state is the first state (during special symbol variation), the host control circuit 7210 confirms that the period has passed when the first period has passed (step S5403). The first period is a variation time period (a period from the start to the end of the special symbol variation) corresponding to the variation effect pattern related to the special symbol variation. The host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON when it is confirmed in step S5403 that the first period has elapsed (that the special symbol variation has ended) (step S5406).

On the other hand, when determining that the current state is not the first state (during special symbol variation), the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the current state is the second state (step S5404). The second state is a big hit game state. In the process of step S5404, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is in progress (until the jackpot gaming state starts and ends). The host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the big hit game state is started by receiving the big hit start command, and can recognize that the big hit game state is ended by receiving the big hit end command. it can. The jackpot start command is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210) in step S4059 of FIG. 127, and the jackpot end command is, for example, after the processing of step S4076 of FIG. It is transmitted from the circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210).

When it is determined that the current state is the second state (during the jackpot gaming state), the host control circuit 7210 confirms that the period has passed when the second period has passed (step S5405). The second period is a period during which the big hit game state continues (a period from when the big hit game state starts to when the big hit game state ends). The host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON when it is confirmed in step S5405 that the second period has elapsed (the jackpot gaming state has ended) (step S5406).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current state is not the second state (during the big hit game state), the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON without waiting for the passage of the first period or the second period ( Step S5406). If it is determined in step S5401 that the 3D display mode is not selected, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to off (step S5407).

From the above, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation means, if the special symbol is being changed when the instruction is input, the 3D display mode is set when the special symbol variation is completed Switch to. If the big hit game state is in effect when the instruction is input, the 3D display mode is switched to when the big hit game state ends. If the special symbol is not changing or the big hit game state is entered when the instruction is input, the 3D display mode is switched at the above-described predetermined timing (current frame, next frame, current interrupt, next interrupt, etc.).

As described above, when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation unit (3D switching button), it is detected that the instruction is input (see step S5222 in FIG. 187). If the state when the instruction is input is the first state or the second state, 3D until the first state or the second state ends (it is confirmed that the first period or the second period has elapsed) Since the processing related to the display (see steps S5262 and S5263 in FIG. 189, and steps S5142 to S5144 in FIG. 179) is not performed, the 3D display is performed until it is confirmed that the first period or the second period has passed. Can be controlled so that the switch to Alternatively, even if an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation unit (3D switching button), if the state when the instruction is input is the first state or the second state, the operation unit ( The processing (for example, the 3D switching determination processing itself) based on the detection of the operation of the 3D switching button) may not be performed, or the operation of the operation unit (3D switching button) may not be detected in the first place. Good. Thereby, similarly, it is possible to configure so that the switching to the 3D display is not performed until it is confirmed that the first period and the second period have elapsed.

As will be described below, when switching to the 3D display is requested, the screen display may be changed due to the progress of the game, the operation of the game machine by the player or the administrator, the occurrence of an error, or the like. A case can be envisioned where the priorities switch (between 2D and 3D views). Specifically, in addition to when the operation means (3D switching button) is operated by the player, as an initial setting when an effect capable of 3D display is requested (selected) or when the power is turned on. It is possible to configure to switch to 3D display when 3D display is requested.

The pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix B>
Gaming machines such as pachinko and pachislot machines are generally equipped with a display device, and by displaying a wide variety of images on the display device according to the situation of the game, the progress of the game can be enhanced or the development of the game can be prevented. It also improves the player's expectations.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to cause stereoscopic vision by causing binocular parallax by displaying different images to the left and right eyes of the player (for example, , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-19666).

The present inventor realizes a desired stereoscopic vision by devising a method for generating an image to be stereoscopically visualized in the process of earnestly studying a game machine capable of stereoscopic vision as described above. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a desired stereoscopic vision.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Display means (display device 8000) capable of displaying an image relating to a game,
An operation unit (button, jog dial, etc.) capable of performing an operation related to the display mode of the image on the display unit,
A display control unit (a host control circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of FIG. 186) capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display unit;
An operation state detecting unit (a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of step S5222 of FIG. 187) capable of detecting the operation state of the operating unit;
The display control means,
As the display mode of the image on the display means, any one of a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view and a normal display mode different from the three-dimensional display mode A display mode determining means capable of determining a display mode (host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of FIG. 188 and the process of step S5261 of FIG. 189);
When the three-dimensional display mode is determined by the display mode determination means, a stereoscopic image generation means capable of generating a stereoscopic image (the processing of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179 is executed). Display control circuit 7230),
The display mode determination means,
It is possible to determine the display mode of the image on the display means based on the detection result by the operation state detection means,
The stereoscopic image generation means,
Scaling is performed on each of a plurality of original images (a left-eye image before scaling and a right-eye image before scaling) corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing, and the total number of pixels of each image obtained by scaling is Pixel number conversion means capable of converting the number of pixels of each of the plurality of original images so that the number becomes the number corresponding to the number of pixels of the image displayed on the display means (the processing of step S5142 of FIG. 179 is executed. Display control circuit 7230) to
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode and a normal display mode are provided as a display mode of an image on the display means (display device 8000), and a tertiary display mode is provided. When the original display mode is determined, a stereoscopic image is generated. The stereoscopic image is obtained by performing scaling on a plurality of original images (a left-eye image before scaling and a right-eye image before scaling) that respectively correspond to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic vision, and are obtained by scaling. The plurality of original images (an image for the left eye before scaling and an image for the right eye before scaling) such that the total number of pixels of each image is a number corresponding to the number of pixels of the image displayed on the display unit (display device 8000). It is possible to generate by converting the number of pixels of each. Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) capable of performing an operation relating to a display mode of an image is provided, and the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) is provided. The display mode of the image on the display means (display device 8000) can be determined based on the detection result regarding the operation state of (1). Therefore, when an instruction relating to the three-dimensional display mode is input via the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.), the instruction content can be reflected in the image. With the above-described configuration, the present inventor has found that the player can recognize a stereoscopic image in a mode according to the desire of the player. According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

As described in the third embodiment, when the number of viewpoints is N, in the scaling process, each of the N pre-scaling images has a horizontal pixel count that is 1/n of the pixel count corresponding to the screen size. N can be enlarged or reduced so that the number of pixels in the vertical direction is the same as the number of pixels corresponding to the screen size. In the present invention, the sum of the number of pixels in at least one direction or one side in each of the N scaled images for the N scaled images is the pixel number corresponding to the screen size (displayed image). It is possible to scale so that they are identical.

(B-1′) The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
Equipped with identification information control means that can be stopped and displayed after the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed,
The display control means can perform display control for displaying an image on the display means at a first time interval, while the operation state detection means detects the operation state of the operation means by a first operation. It is possible to do it at 2 time intervals,
The display mode determination means,
Even when the operation means is operated while the identification information control means is performing variable display of the identification information, the display control is performed for the first time after the detection by the operation state detection means. It is possible to determine the display mode based on the detection result,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, the display control for displaying the image on the display unit (display device 8000) is performed at the first time interval, while the operation unit (button, jog dial, etc.). Is detected at the second time interval. Then, even when the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) is operated while the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) is being performed, the display is performed for the first time after the detection regarding the operation state is performed. By the control, the display mode can be determined based on the detection result. Therefore, when an instruction regarding the three-dimensional display mode is input via the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.), the instruction can be detected within the second time. Then, even if the situation when the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) is operated is the variable display of the identification information (special symbol), it is generated at the first time interval without being affected by the situation. The instruction content can be reflected on the displayed image. This allows the player to recognize a stereoscopic image at a timing according to the player's request.

In the present invention, the first time and the second time are not particularly limited, and any time can be appropriately adopted. The length of the first time and the second time is also not particularly limited, and the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time. The first time may be equal to the second time. For example, when the first time is longer than the second time, the second time (for example, 1 msec) is set to T, and the first time (for example, 33 msec) is n times or more T (n> 1). In this example, it is assumed that an instruction relating to the three-dimensional display mode is input through the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.) in a certain cycle (for example, timer interrupt processing). In this case, the flag indicating that the instruction has been input (for example, the 3D flag) may be set in the cycle (current cycle) or may be set in the next cycle (or later). Even when the timing of setting the flag is set to the next (or later) cycle, the larger the value of n (for example, n is 10 or more, 30 or more, 50 or more), the stereoscopic image is generated. The possibility that the display timing (the timing when the rendering request for 3D display is generated) is delayed is low.

(B-2) Display means (display device 8000) capable of displaying an image relating to a game,
An operation unit (button, jog dial, etc.) capable of performing an operation related to the display mode of the image on the display unit,
A display control unit (a host control circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of FIG. 186) capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display unit;
The operating means is
As the display mode of the image on the display means, any one of a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image and a normal display mode different from the three-dimensional display mode It is possible to perform an operation to select the display mode,
The display control means,
When an operation for selecting the three-dimensional display mode is performed by the operation means, scaling is performed on a plurality of original images respectively corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic vision, and the scaling is obtained. A display control circuit 7230 that executes a process of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179, which is capable of generating a stereoscopic image by synthesizing the respective images.
The stereoscopic image generation means,
It is possible to generate the stereoscopic image at a timing according to a game situation when an operation for selecting the three-dimensional display mode is performed in the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode and a normal display mode are provided as the image display mode on the display unit (display device 8000), and the operation is performed. When an operation for selecting the three-dimensional display mode is performed by the means (button, jog dial, or the like), a stereoscopic image is generated. The stereoscopic image can be generated by scaling each of a plurality of original images corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in the stereoscopic vision and synthesizing the images obtained by the scaling. Has become. Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, the stereoscopic image is generated at a timing according to the game situation when the operation of selecting the three-dimensional display mode is performed. Is configured to be possible. Therefore, according to the situation of the game when the operation for selecting the three-dimensional display mode is performed, the display control according to the operation content is performed after the operation is performed (actually for stereoscopic viewing). It is possible to change the time until the image is displayed), and it is possible to display the stereoscopic image at a timing suitable for the game situation. With the above-described configuration, the present inventor has found that the player can recognize a stereoscopic image in a mode according to the player's request and the situation of the game. According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

In the fourth embodiment, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation means, if the game situation when the instruction is input is the first state (during special symbol change), the It has been described that when one period has elapsed (when the special symbol variation ends), a stereoscopic image can be generated (switch to the 3D display mode). Further, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means, if the state of the game at the time of inputting the instruction is the second state (during the jackpot game state), the second period elapses. It has been described that an image for stereoscopic vision can be generated (switch to the 3D display mode) when (when the jackpot gaming state ends). In the present invention, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means, if the game situation at the time the instruction is input is a specific situation, a stereoscopic image is generated after the specific situation ends. It can be configured so that a visual image can be generated (switch to a 3D display mode), and as a specific situation, an arbitrary situation (for example, the first state or the second state) can be appropriately adopted. Is. Further, in that case, the timing at which a stereoscopic image can be generated is not particularly limited. For example, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means, if the special symbol is being changed when the instruction is input, the stereoscopic view is performed when the next special symbol variation is started. The image may be generated. The length of each of the first period and the second period may be a fixed length or may be a length that can be changed according to a game situation. Hereinafter, a modified example in which another situation is adopted as the specific situation will be described.

[Modification]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of the 3D switching determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of 3D switching pending processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of display mode determination processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 191 is an interrupt process performed in the host control circuit 7210 at a cycle of 1 msec (see FIG. 133). In the timer interrupt process, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5501 to S5506, but the processes of steps S5501 to S5504 are the same as the processes of steps S5221 to S5224 of FIG. 187. The description here is omitted. The process of step S5506 (3D switching determination process) and the process of step S5505 (3D switching pending process) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, respectively.

In the 3D switching determination processing shown in FIG. 192, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the 3D display mode is selected (step S5521). This process is the same as the process of step S5401 of FIG. 190, and therefore description thereof will be omitted here.

When determining that the 3D display mode is selected, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current state is the jackpot gaming state (step S5522). This process is the same as the process of step S5404 in FIG. 190, and therefore description thereof will be omitted here.

When it is determined that the current state is the jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the jackpot gaming state is a specific jackpot gaming state (step S5523). The specific jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which a 3D display effect (3D effect) is performed. In this modification, a big hit game state in which 3D effect is performed and a big hit game state in which 3D effect is not performed are provided. As a big hit game state in which 3D effect is performed, for example, a probability variation game state (a big hit game state in which the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes a probability variation game state) or the number of rounds is a specific number (for example, 16). The jackpot gaming state can be adopted. Since the jackpot start command (see step S4059 in FIG. 127) transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 includes information indicating the type of jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 receives the jackpot start command, , It is possible to recognize the type of jackpot gaming state.

When determining that the current state is the specific jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D switching suspension flag (1) to on (step S5524). The 3D switching suspension flag (1) is a flag indicating that the switching to the 3D display mode is suspended, and an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operating means during a specific jackpot gaming state. If set to on. After executing the processing of step S5524, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine.

When it is determined in step S5522 that the current state is not the jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current state is changing the special symbol (step S5525). This process is the same as the process of step S5402 in FIG. 190, and therefore description thereof will be omitted here.

When it is determined that the current state of the special symbol is changing, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change of this time is a specific effect pattern (step S5526). The specific effect pattern is an effect pattern in which an effect (3D effect) is displayed by 3D display. In this modification, an effect pattern in which 3D effect is performed and an effect pattern in which 3D effect is not performed are provided. As the effect pattern in which the 3D effect is performed, for example, a reach effect pattern can be adopted. In the reach effect pattern, the decorative design is displayed in a reach manner (two decorative designs are stopped and displayed in the same design among the decorative design located on the left side, the decorative design located on the right side, and the decorative design located in the center). And the remaining one decorative pattern is variably displayed). When the special symbol effect start command (see step S4044 in FIG. 126) is received, the host control circuit 7210 refers to the variable effect table (see FIG. 122), and performs a lottery based on the random number value, so that the special symbol this time. One effect pattern corresponding to the change is determined. In the variation effect table, a random number value range is defined for each of the plurality of effect patterns. The plurality of effect patterns include a plurality of types of reach effect patterns.

When determining that the effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change this time is the specific effect pattern, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D switching hold flag (2) to ON (step S5527). The 3D switching suspension flag (2) is a flag indicating that switching to the 3D display mode is suspended, and an instruction to select the 3D display mode from the operating means is issued during the change of the special symbol according to a specific effect pattern. Set on when input. After executing the processing of step S5527, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine.

If it is determined in step S5523 that the current state is not a specific jackpot gaming state, if it is determined in step S5525 that the current state is not during special symbol fluctuation, or in step S5526, this time it corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation. When determining that the effect pattern is not the specific effect pattern, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D display mode flag to ON (step S5528). The 3D display mode flag is a flag indicating that the current mode is the 3D display mode. After executing the processing of step S5528, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine.

When determining in step S5521 that the 3D display mode is not selected, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D display mode flag to off (step S5529). After that, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine.

In the 3D switching pending process shown in FIG. 193, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the 3D switching pending flag (1) (see step S5524 in FIG. 192) is set to ON (step S5541). When it is determined that the 3D switching suspension flag (1) is set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state has ended (step S5542). The host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the big hit game state is ended by receiving the big hit end command. When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has not ended, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the jackpot gaming state has ended, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D switching suspension flag (1) to off (step S5543).

When it is determined in step S5541 that the 3D switching suspension flag (1) is not set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the 3D switching suspension flag (2) (see step S5527 of FIG. 192) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S5544). When it is determined that the 3D switching suspension flag (2) is not set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the 3D switching hold flag (2) is set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the special symbol variation has ended (step S5545).

In this process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the special symbol variation timer has become 0. Although not shown, the host control circuit 7210, when receiving the special symbol effect start command (see step S4044 in FIG. 126), sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the special symbol variation timer. To do. The special symbol variation timer is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process is performed, and becomes 0 when the special symbol variation ends. In the process of step S5545, if it is determined that the special symbol variation has not ended, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol variation has ended, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D switching suspension flag (2) to off (step S5546).

After executing the processing of step S5543 or step S5546, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D display mode flag to on (step S5547). After that, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine.

The case where the switching to the 3D display based on the operation of the player is suspended has been described above, but the scene in which the switching to the 3D display is suspended is not particularly limited, and the priority of the screen display is (2D display). It is possible to configure such that switching to the 3D display is suspended in various situations (at various timings) that can be changed (between the 3D display and the 3D display). For example, switching to 3D display based on execution of a specific effect may be suspended, switching to 3D display based on power-on may be suspended, or based on occurrence of an error or the like. The switching to the 3D display in the screen display may be suspended.

The display mode determination process shown in FIG. 194 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in the animation request construction process (see step S4210 in FIG. 132).

In the display mode determination process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current state is the jackpot gaming state (step S5561). This process is the same as the process of step S5522 of FIG. 192, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. When it is determined that the current state is the jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a specific jackpot gaming state (step S5562). This process is the same as the process of step S5523 of FIG. 192, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is not the specific jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine.

When it is determined in step S5561 that the current state is not the jackpot gaming state, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not a special symbol effect start command (see step S4044 in FIG. 126) is received (step S5563). When it is determined that the special symbol effect start command is received, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change this time is a specific effect pattern (step S5564). This process is the same as the process of step S5526 in FIG. 192, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. If it is determined in step S5563 that the special symbol effect start command has not been received, or if it is determined that the effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change this time is not a specific effect pattern, the host control circuit 7210 is the present subroutine. To finish.

If it is determined in step S5562 that the big hit game state is a specific big hit game state, or if it is determined in step S5564 that the effect pattern corresponding to the special symbol change this time is a particular effect pattern, the host control circuit The 7210 determines whether or not the 3D display mode flag (see step S5528 in FIG. 192 and step S5547 in FIG. 193) is set to ON (step S5565). When determining that the 3D display mode flag is not set to ON, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the 3D display mode flag is set to on, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to on (step S5566). After that, the host control circuit 7210 ends this subroutine.

As described above, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 194, when an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input from the operation means, if the game situation when the instruction is input is a specific situation, While configuring so that a stereoscopic image can be generated after the end of the specific situation (switch to the 3D display mode), as a specific situation, a specific jackpot gaming state and a specific special symbol variation (specific effect pattern In the case of adopting the special symbol variation accompanied by the effect by. As described above, as the specific effect pattern, for example, the reach effect pattern can be adopted, but the specific situation may be a part of the period during the special symbol change. For example, the period during which the special symbols are changed is composed of a period until the reach is reached (until the decorative symbols are displayed in the reach mode) (pre-reach period) and a period after the reach is reached (post-reach period). If so, the post-reach period may be adopted as a particular circumstance. In this case, if the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input during the reach period, the 3D display mode may be switched without waiting for the end of the special symbol variation. That is, the image for stereoscopic vision may be generated (3D display is performed) in the post-reach period during the special symbol change. Also, a part of the post-reach period may be adopted as the specific situation. For example, in the case where the special symbol variation accompanied by the production by the reach production pattern is performed such that the 3D display is performed in the latter half of the post-reach period, in the first half of the post-reach period (the period in which the processing relating to the 3D display is not performed). When an instruction to select the 3D display mode is input, the 3D display mode may be switched without waiting for the end of the special symbol variation. That is, if the instruction is input before the process related to 3D display (process for generating a stereoscopic image) is started, during the special symbol change (second half of the post-reach period). An image for stereoscopic viewing may be generated (3D display is performed).

In addition, an effect pattern is provided such that an effect (continuous effect) is performed across a plurality of holding balls, and when 3D effect is performed during the continuous effect, the period (situation) in which the continuous effect is performed. May be adopted as the above specific situation. That is, when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input during the continuous effect while the switching to the 3D display mode cannot be performed during the continuous effect, when the continuous effect ends. The switching to the 3D display mode may be performed. Further, when the 3D effect is performed during the pseudo-relation, the period (situation) in which the pseudo-relation is performed may be adopted as the specific situation. Further, in the above-described modified example, it is described that the switching to the 3D display mode is suspended when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input in the specific situation. Similarly, when the instruction to select is input, the switching to the normal display mode may be suspended (switch to the normal display mode after the end of the specific situation). For example, during a specific big hit game state (big hit game state in which 3D effect is performed), it is impossible to switch to the normal display mode, and the normal display mode is selected during the specific big hit game state. When an instruction is input, switching to the normal display mode may be performed when the specific jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, during the big hit game state where the 3D effect is performed, it is possible to switch to the 3D display mode or the normal display mode while the big hit game state where the 3D effect is not performed is set to the 3D display mode or the normal display mode. It may be configured such that the switching cannot be performed.

Further, in the above modification, when the instruction to select the 3D display mode is input, the 3D display mode flag is set to ON (see step S5528 in FIG. 192 and step S5547 in FIG. 193), and the 3D effect is In a situation that can be executed (a situation in which the determination in step S5562 in FIG. 194 or the determination in step S5564 is YES), the 3D display mode flag is set to on, and the 3D flag is set to on. (See step S5566 in FIG. 194). Accordingly, the determination in step S5261 in FIG. 189 and the determination in step S5141 in FIG. 179 are YES, and a stereoscopic image is generated (steps S5262 and step S5263 in FIG. 189, and steps S5142 to S5142 in FIG. 179). (See S5144), 3D display is performed.

In the present specification, in the case of performing 3D display (parallax display), if the 3D display mode is selected by the player operating the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.), 3D display can be performed. Is selected, the operation means (buttons, jog dial, etc.) is operated in the effect that can be displayed in 3D (when the effect and the operation are linked), the demo screen is displayed, and the player is Various factors can be assumed, such as when the handle is operated. For example, a stereoscopic image corresponding to the movement of the accessory may be displayed on the demo screen, or a stereoscopic image in which the accessory returns to the original position when the player's hand touches the firing handle. May be displayed. Further, when the 3D display (parallax display) is not performed, when the normal display mode is selected by the player operating the operation means (button, jog dial, etc.), or an error display is performed (error is displayed). If it occurs), a power interruption process is performed, or a hall menu is displayed, various factors can be assumed.

Further, in the above modification, the 3D switching determination process (see FIG. 192) and the 3D switching pending process (see FIG. 193) are described as being executed in the timer interrupt process, but these processes are executed in the main process. It may be done. For example, the 3D switching pending processing and the 3D switching determination processing may be executed before the packet reception loop in the main loop (for example, after the sub device input processing shown in step S4206 of FIG. 132 is executed). ..

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portions to which the description in the first to fourth embodiments applies also in the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<3D display initial setting processing>
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of a 3D display initial setting process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The 3D display initialization process shown in FIG. 195 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in various initialization processes (see step S4201 in FIG. 132).

In the 3D display initial setting process, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (step S5601). In the first embodiment, a plurality of setting values (six stages of "1" to "6") in which various data related to the pachinko game are different from each other are provided, and an operation (setting change) for changing the set setting value. Also, it has been described that the operation (confirmation of setting) for confirming the set value that has been set can be performed. Specifically, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 (see FIG. 9) is turned on, the backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9) is pressed, and the power switch 35 (see FIG. 9) is turned on. By performing both operations, the setting is changed (see FIG. 22). By pressing the setting switch 332 (see FIG. 9) in the setting change state, the set value can be changed. Further, when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and the power switch 35 is turned on without pressing the backup clear switch 330 to enter the setting confirmation state (FIG. 22). reference). In the setting confirmation state, information indicating the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 (see FIG. 9), and the set value can be confirmed. The setting change state and the setting confirmation state are ended by turning off the setting key 328.

Also in the present embodiment, the setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed by the same method. In the process of step S5601, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the current state is one of the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Similar to the first embodiment, when the setting change process (see FIG. 23) is started, the main control circuit 7070 transmits a setting change start command to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). Upon receiving the setting change start command, the host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the setting change state is controlled. Further, when the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 25) is started, a setting confirmation start command is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). By receiving the setting confirmation start command, the host control circuit 7210 can recognize that it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Therefore, the host control circuit 7210 is in the process of setting change or setting confirmation by determining whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command or setting confirmation start command) is received (the current state is the setting change). It is possible to determine whether the state is one of the state and the setting confirmation state).

When it is determined in step S5601 that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (the current state is either the setting changed state or the setting confirmed state), the host control circuit 7210 turns off the 3D flag. Is set (step S5602). As a result, for example, the determination in step S5261 of FIG. 189 and the determination of step S5141 of FIG. 179 become NO, and a stereoscopic image is not generated (steps S5262 and S5263 of FIG. 189, and step S5142 of FIG. 179). (See step S5144) 3D display is not performed. For example, while the hall menu screen is displayed during the setting change and the setting confirmation (see step S302 in FIG. 50), 3D display is not performed on the hall menu screen.

Next, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the setting change (setting change state) or the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) is completed (step S5603). Similar to the first embodiment, when the setting change process ends, the main control circuit 7070 sends an initialization command to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210) (see step S41 in FIG. 26). By receiving the initialization command, the host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the setting change state has ended. Further, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the main control circuit 7070 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210) (see step S37 in FIG. 26). By receiving the power recovery command, the host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the setting confirmation state has ended. Until the host control circuit 7210 determines that the setting change (setting change state) or the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) is completed (until receiving either the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command), The process of S5603 is repeatedly executed.

If it is determined in step S5603 that the setting change (setting change state) or the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) has ended, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the setting change (setting change state) has ended this time. It is determined (step S5604). The host control circuit 7210 determines which of the initialization command and the power failure recovery command is the received command, thereby ending either of the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. You can recognize what you did.

If it is determined in step S5601 that neither the setting is being changed nor the setting is being confirmed (the current state is neither the setting change state nor the setting confirmation state), the current power-on is the RAM. It is determined whether or not clearing is involved (step S5605). The RAM clear is a process similar to the backup clear process (see FIG. 24) described in the first embodiment, and is a process for clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM. Similar to the first embodiment, when the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control). The command is transmitted to the circuit 7210). By receiving the command, the host control circuit 7210 can recognize that the RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed. As described in the first embodiment, in the RAM clear (backup clear processing), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle. ..

When it is determined in step S5604 that the setting ended this time is a setting change (setting change state), or when it is determined in step S5605 that the current power-on is accompanied by RAM clear, the host control circuit 7210 The 3D flag is set to on or off according to the initial setting (step S5606). In the initial setting, one of the 3D display mode and the normal display mode is set. When the 3D display mode is initially set, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON. Accordingly, for example, the determination in step S5261 in FIG. 189 and the determination in step S5141 in FIG. 179 become YES, and a stereoscopic image is generated (steps S5262 and S5263 in FIG. 189, and step S5142 in FIG. 179). (See step S5144) 3D display is performed. On the other hand, when the normal display mode is initially set, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to off. In this case, 3D display is not performed unless switching to the 3D display mode (see FIG. 188) is performed.

If the host control circuit 7210 determines in step S5604 that the current setting is not a setting change (setting change state) or that the current power-on is not accompanied by RAM clear in step S5605, The 3D flag is set to ON or OFF according to the setting before the power interruption (step S5607). In this processing, the host control circuit 7210 reads information indicating the mode (3D display mode or normal display mode) before the power failure from the SRAM 7210b, and when the mode is the 3D display mode, turns on the 3D flag. If the mode is the normal display mode, the 3D flag is set to off. As a result, if the setting before power failure is set to play the game in the 3D display mode, the game is played in the 3D display mode even after the power is turned on, and the setting before the power failure is played in the normal display mode. If the effect is set, the game is played in the normal display mode even after the power is turned on.

After executing the processing of step S5606 or step S5607, the host control circuit 7210 ends the present subroutine.

<Drawing control processing>
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The drawing control process shown in FIG. 196 is a process performed by the host control circuit 7210 in step S4212 of FIG.

In the drawing control process, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processes of steps S5701 to S5709. The processes of steps S5701, S5702, S5705, S5706, and S5709, respectively, are step S5261 of FIG. Since the processing is the same as the processing of step S5265, the description here is basically omitted. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S5703 and S5704, and the processes of steps S5707 and S5708 will be mainly described.

After executing the processing of step S5702, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not to display an error (step S5703). The error display means that an image (error image) indicating that an error (abnormality) has occurred is displayed on the display device 8000. An error refers to a phenomenon that cannot occur (very unlikely) as long as a game is normally played, or a phenomenon that hinders the progress of the game. A situation that should be reported. As a phenomenon that cannot occur (very unlikely to occur) as long as a game is normally played, a phenomenon that occurs during fraudulent activity can be assumed, and for example, a magnetic detection error ( A magnet is present near the gaming machine), vibration detection error (vibration with a strength higher than a predetermined threshold occurs), radio wave detection error (predetermined radio wave reaches the game machine), abnormal prize winning error (Even though the special winning opening and the starting opening are not open, winnings to these are detected). Examples of the phenomenon that hinders the progress of the game include a plate full tank error (the game ball overflows from the plate), a ball-less error (the game mechanism has no game ball), and the like.

Such an error can be detected by conventionally known means (eg, sensor, switch, circuit, etc.). When an error is detected in the main control circuit 7070, an error detection command is transmitted from the main control circuit 7070 to the sub control circuit 7200 (host control circuit 7210). The error detection command includes information indicating that an error has occurred and the type of the error. By receiving the error detection command, the host control circuit 7210 causes the host control circuit 7210 to generate the error and the type of the error. Can be recognized. In the processing of step S5703, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not an error detection command has been received.

When it is determined in step S5703 that the error detection command is received (error display is performed), the host control circuit 7210 adds the error display to the parallax-free image (step S5704). As described in the third embodiment, the parallax-free image is an image (background material image) that is a material of the background image displayed on the display device 8000. By the process of step S5702, the background material image is drawn in each of the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer. In the process of step S5704, the host control circuit 7210 draws the error material images in the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer, respectively. The error material image is an image that is a material of the error image displayed on the display device 8000. The error image is an image that is two-dimensionally recognized even when observed through the lenticular sheet 8010, and a character image corresponding to the occurrence of the error and the type of the error (for example, "the plate is full") It is an image corresponding to a character, the image shown in FIG. 55).

The image data corresponding to the error material image (error material image data) is stored in the CGROM 7206 as data having the same or a smaller number of pixels as the background material image data. In the processing of step S5704, the host control circuit 7210 reads out the error material image data from the CGROM 7206 and writes it in both the left eye buffer and the right eye buffer. At that time, the host control circuit 7210 executes alpha blending for superimposing the error material image on the background material image. As a result, in the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer, the error material image is superimposed on the background material image as the foreground. The image obtained by this is called a background/error composite material image.

If it is determined in step S5703 that the error detection command has not been received (error display is not performed), or after executing the processing of step S5704, the host control circuit 7210, in step S5705, the background material image or background. -Alpha blending for overlaying the left foreground material image on the error composite material image, and alpha blending for overlaying the right foreground material image on the background material image or the background/error composite material image Execute. As a result, the left foreground material image is superimposed on the background material image or the background/error composite material image as the foreground in the left eye buffer, and the right eye buffer also contains the background material image or the background/error image. The right foreground material image is superimposed on the composite material image as the foreground.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an error is displayed, the image obtained by superimposing the left foreground material image on the background/error composite material image becomes the pre-scaling left-eye image, and the background/error composite material image. On the other hand, the image obtained by superimposing the right foreground material images is the pre-scaling right eye image. On the other hand, when the error display is not performed, as in the third embodiment, the image obtained by superimposing the left foreground material image on the background material image becomes the pre-scaling left-eye image and the background image. An image obtained by superimposing the right foreground material image on the material image is the pre-scaling right eye image.

After executing the processing of step S5706, the host control circuit 7210 executes the processing of steps S5707 and S5708. The processes of steps S5707 and S5708 are basically the same as the processes of steps S5703 and S5704. When it is determined in step S5707 that the error detection command has been received (error display is performed), the host control circuit 7210 overlaps the background material image with the error material image as the foreground only in the left-eye buffer, A background/error composite material image is generated (step S5708). Then, in step S5709, when displaying an error, the host control circuit 7210 generates a pre-scaling left-eye image by superimposing the left foreground material image as the foreground on the background/error composite material image. When the error display is not performed, the left-foreground material image is superimposed on the background material image as the foreground to generate a pre-scaling left-eye image.

After that, the scaling & combining process (see FIG. 179) is performed using the pre-scaling left-eye image (and pre-scaling right-eye image) generated as described above. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error is displayed, the image (background/error composite material image) obtained by superimposing the error material image on the background material image is used as the background image in the third embodiment. Processing related to image generation is performed by handling the material image in the same manner. As a result, the error image can be combined with the background image and the character image in the third embodiment and displayed on the display device 8000.

Note that the background material image is stored in the left-eye buffer (see steps S5702 and S5706), the error material image is stored in the left-eye buffer (see steps S5704 and S5708), and the left foreground material image is stored. The storage in the left-eye buffer (see steps S5705 and S5709) can be performed in any order. The background material image is stored in the right-eye buffer (see step S5702), and the right-eye image of the error material image is stored. The storage in the image buffer (see step S5704) and the storage of the right foreground material image in the right eye buffer (see step S5705) can be performed in any order. For example, as in the case of FIG. 177, the left foreground material image may be stored in the left eye buffer and the right foreground material image may be stored in the right eye buffer first (for example, the processing and step of step S5702). The processing of S5705 may be reversed, and the processing of step S5706 and the processing of step S5709 may be reversed). In this case, in the buffer different from the left-eye buffer and the right-eye buffer, by combining the background material image and the error material image to generate a background/error composite material image, and then in the left-eye buffer, The background/error composite material image may be superimposed on the left foreground material image, and the background/error composite material image may be superimposed on the right foreground material image in the right-eye buffer.

The pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix C>
Gaming machines such as pachinko and pachislot machines are generally equipped with a display device, and by displaying a wide variety of images on the display device according to the situation of the game, the progress of the game can be enhanced or the development of the game can be prevented. It also improves the player's expectations.

As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to cause stereoscopic vision by causing binocular parallax by displaying different images to the left and right eyes of the player (for example, , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-19666).

The present inventor realizes a desired stereoscopic vision by devising a method for generating an image to be stereoscopically visualized in the process of earnestly studying a game machine capable of stereoscopic vision as described above. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a desired stereoscopic vision.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) Display means (display device 8000) capable of displaying an image relating to a game,
A display control unit (a host control circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of FIG. 186) capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display unit;
As the display mode of the image on the display means, any one of a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image and a normal display mode different from the three-dimensional display mode A display mode setting unit capable of setting a display mode (a host control circuit 7210 that executes the process of FIG. 188 and the process of step S5607 of FIG. 195);
The display control means,
When the three-dimensional display mode is set by the display mode setting means, scaling is performed on a plurality of original images respectively corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic vision, and each image obtained by the scaling is performed. By providing a stereoscopic image generation unit (a display control circuit 7230 that executes the processes of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179) capable of generating a stereoscopic image.
The display mode setting means,
If an electric power failure occurs when the three-dimensional display mode is set, a setting takeover means capable of setting the three-dimensional display mode even when the three-dimensional display mode is restored,
The stereoscopic image generation means,
When an electric power interruption occurs when it is possible to generate the stereoscopic image based on the setting of the three-dimensional display mode, the three-dimensional display mode is set by the setting transfer means. Based on this, it is possible to generate the stereoscopic image even after the recovery from the power interruption.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, a plurality of display modes including a three-dimensional display mode and a normal display mode are provided as the image display mode on the display unit (display device 8000), and the tertiary When the original display mode is set, a stereoscopic image is generated. The stereoscopic image can be generated by scaling each of a plurality of original images corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in the stereoscopic vision and synthesizing the images obtained by the scaling. Has become. Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, when the power failure occurs when the three-dimensional display mode is set, the three-dimensional display mode is displayed even when the power failure is restored. It can be set, and is configured to be capable of generating a stereoscopic image both before the occurrence of the power failure and after the recovery from the power failure. With the above configuration, the present inventor has found that the player can recognize a stereoscopic image in a mode according to the setting regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

(C-2) Game control means (main control circuit 7070) capable of performing control relating to execution of a game based on one set value of a plurality of set values,
Setting operation means (setting key 328 and setting switch 332) capable of performing setting operation for setting one setting value from the plurality of setting values;
Display means (display device 8000) capable of displaying an image relating to the game,
A display control unit (a host control circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of FIG. 186) capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display unit;
The display control means,
First display control means capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display means in a three-dimensional display mode that allows a player to stereoscopically view (the processing of steps S5262 and S5263 of FIG. 189 is executed. A host control circuit 7210, and a display control circuit 7230 which executes the processing of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179,
Second display control means capable of performing control for displaying an image on the display means in a normal display mode different from the three-dimensional display mode (host control for executing the processing of steps S5264 and S5265 of FIG. 189). A circuit 7210 and a display control circuit 7230 that executes the process of step S5145 in FIG. 179).
The first display control means,
Scaling is performed on a plurality of original images respectively corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints envisioned in stereoscopic viewing, and the images obtained by scaling are combined to create a three-dimensional display corresponding to the three-dimensional display mode. It is possible to generate images,
The second display control means is capable of generating an image for normal display corresponding to the normal display mode,
While the setting operation is being performed by the setting operation unit, the second display control unit generates the image for normal display, and after the setting operation is completed, the first display control unit causes the three-dimensional image to be displayed. It is possible to generate images for display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, as a display mode of an image on the display unit (display device 8000), a three-dimensional display mode that allows a player to stereoscopically view and a three-dimensional display mode are different. A normal display mode is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to control the execution of the game based on one of the plurality of setting values, and perform the setting operation for setting the one setting value from the plurality of setting values. You can do it. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, while the setting operation is being performed, an image for normal display corresponding to the normal display mode is generated, and after the setting operation is completed. It is possible to generate an image for three-dimensional display corresponding to the three-dimensional display mode. Then, the image for three-dimensional display is generated by performing scaling on a plurality of original images respectively corresponding to a plurality of viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic vision and synthesizing the images obtained by the scaling. Is configured to be possible. With the above configuration, the present inventor can change the display mode of the image before and after the completion of the setting operation, and the game executed based on the set value set by the setting operation. Among them, it was found that the player can recognize a stereoscopic image. According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

In the fifth embodiment, the 3D display is not performed on the hole menu screen. In the present invention, the 3D display is turned OFF (the 3D flag is set to OFF) while the hole menu screen is displayed in this way, and the 3D display is turned ON when the display of the hole menu screen is completed ( 3D flag may be set to ON). Alternatively, an item relating to the 3D display mode may be provided as the hole menu item, and either the 3D display mode or the normal display mode may be selected as the default state. At that time, whether or not to perform 3D display may be set for each of the various factors described above (factors or scenes related to whether or not to perform 3D display). For example, the 3D display may be performed in the production, while the 3D display may be set not to be performed in a scene other than the production (for example, when the demo screen is displayed). Further, it may be possible to set whether or not to perform 3D display for each type of effect. For example, the 3D display may be performed in the first effect, and the 3D display may not be performed in the second effect. Further, as a hole menu item, an item regarding a test display of a 3D image (stereoscopic image) may be provided, and when the item is selected, the test display may be performed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, if the setting before the power interruption is set to play the game in the 3D display mode, the game is played in the 3D display mode even after the power is turned on. In the present invention, even when the setting before the power interruption is the setting to play the game in the 3D display mode, the game may be played in the normal display mode within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Good. For example, when the game situation when a power failure occurs is a particular situation, when the game in the particular situation is resumed after the power failure is restored, while the game in the particular situation is performed, It is also possible to turn off the 3D display (set the 3D flag off), and turn on the 3D display (set the 3D flag on) when the game in the particular situation is completed. As the specific situation, the specific situation described in the fourth embodiment can be appropriately adopted. Below, the modification which adopted the special symbol fluctuation as a specific situation is demonstrated.

[Modification]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of 3D display initial setting processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

In the 3D display initial setting process shown in FIG. 197, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current power-on is normal power-on (step S5651). Normal power-on is power-on without any setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clear. In the processing of step S5651, the host control circuit 7210 performs the same processing as the processing of step Sstep S5601 and step S5605 of FIG. 195.

When it is determined that the power-on this time is normal power-on, the host control circuit 7210 loads the setting before the power failure (step S5652), and performs 3D display (parallax display) based on the loaded setting. It is determined whether or not (step S5655). The host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON when it is determined that the 3D display (parallax display) is performed (step S5656), and the 3D display is performed when the 3D display (parallax display) is not performed. The flag is set to off (step S5658). These processes are the same as the process of step S5607 of FIG. 195.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current power-on is not the normal power-on, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the current power-on involves clearing the RAM (step S5653). This process is similar to the process of step S5605 in FIG. 195. When it is determined that the power-on this time involves clearing the RAM, the host control circuit 7210 reads information indicating the mode of the initial setting (3D display mode or normal display mode) (step S5654), and performs the initial setting. It is determined whether or not to perform 3D display (parallax display) based on (step S5655). The host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to ON when it is determined that the 3D display (parallax display) is performed (step S5656), and the 3D display is performed when the 3D display (parallax display) is not performed. The flag is set to off (step S5658). These processes are the same as the process of step S5606 of FIG. 195.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-on this time does not involve clearing the RAM, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (step S5657). This process is similar to the process of step S5601 in FIG. When it is determined that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to off (step S5658). This process is similar to the process of step S5602 in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the setting is being changed nor the setting is being confirmed, the host control circuit 7210 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S5659). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to on (step S5660). On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol is changing, the host control circuit 7210 sets the 3D flag to off (step S5658). Here, in step S5660, the same process as the process of step S5607 of FIG. 195 may be performed. Further, after executing the process of step S5658, the 3D flag may be set to ON when the special symbol variation ends (for example, when the power interruption recovery command is received). Also in this case, the same process as the process of step S5607 of FIG. 195 may be performed. That is, if the mode before the power interruption is the 3D display mode, the 3D flag is set to ON when the special symbol variation ends, and if the mode is the normal display mode, the special symbol variation ends. At that time, the 3D flag may be set to OFF (the 3D flag remains in the OFF state).

Note that the process of step S5659 and the subsequent process of setting the 3D flag on or off (see steps S5658 and S5660) are performed when the current power-on is normal power-on (see step S5651). It may be that. Further, the process of setting the 3D flag on when the special symbol variation ends may be performed after the 3D display initial setting process shown in FIG. 197 ends (in the main loop). In the above example, the 3D display initialization process has been described as being executed in various initialization processes (see step S4201 in FIG. 132), but the 3D display initialization process is performed in the main loop (for example, the packet reception loop). Prior to the above). In the above example, the 3D display initialization process is described as setting the 3D flag on or off, but the 3D display mode flag (see step S5528 in FIG. 192 and step S5547 in FIG. 193) is turned on or off. It may be set to.

(C-3) An image related to the game is displayed, and a part of the image is displayed in a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view the image, while the other part of the image is referred to as the three-dimensional display mode. Display means (display device 8000) capable of displaying in different normal display modes;
Image generation means capable of generating an image displayed on the display means (host control circuit 7210 and display control circuit 7230 for executing the processing of FIG. 186),
The image generation means,
Of the images displayed on the display means, the images that are the material of the portion that can be displayed in the three-dimensional display mode, and are each viewed in N (N is an integer of 2 or more) viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing. Each of the corresponding N stereoscopic material images (a material image for the left foreground and a material image for the right foreground) and a background that is a material of a portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode among the images displayed on the display unit. First image generation capable of generating N original images (images for left eye before scaling and image for right eye before scaling) by synthesizing image material image and specific material image (material image for error) Means (host control circuit 7210 that executes the processing of steps S5702 to S5705 of FIG. 196),
An image to be displayed on the display unit may be generated by performing scaling on each of the N original images generated by the first image generation unit and synthesizing each image obtained by the scaling. Possible second image generation means (a display control circuit 7230 that executes the processing of steps S5142 to S5144 of FIG. 179).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, the display means (display device 8000) displays an image relating to the game, and is a three-dimensional display mode in which a part of the image can be stereoscopically viewed by the player. While displaying, the other part of the image can be displayed in the normal display mode. In generating an image to be displayed on such a display means (display device 8000), N pieces of materials that are parts of the image displayed on the display means (display device 8000) that can be displayed in a three-dimensional display mode are displayed. Each of the stereoscopic material images (left foreground material image and right foreground material image) and the background material that is the material of the portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode among the images displayed on the display unit (display device 8000). By combining the material image and the specific material image (material image for error), N original images (an image for the left eye before scaling and an image for the right eye before scaling) are generated. The N stereoscopic material images (the left foreground material image and the right foreground material image) respectively correspond to N viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing. Then, when N original images (an image for the left eye before scaling and an image for the right eye before scaling) are generated, scaling is performed on each of the N original images (an image for the left eye before scaling and an image for the right eye before scaling). And the images obtained by scaling are combined to generate an image to be displayed on the display unit (display device 8000). By thus generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (display device 8000), the present inventor stereoscopically views a part of the display mode of the image displayed on the display unit (display device 8000). It has been found that a display mode suitable for the above can be provided, and as a result, a player can recognize a desired stereoscopic image. In this way, according to the pachinko gaming machine 7001 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to realize a desired stereoscopic vision.

[Modification]
FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram for explaining a case where four viewpoints are assumed in stereoscopic vision. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachi-slot.

Although the case where N=2 has been described in the fifth embodiment, the value of N is not particularly limited in the present invention. This point is as described in the third embodiment. FIG. 198 shows the case where N=4. As shown in FIG. 198, in the display device 8000, the first pixel (“1” in the drawing) corresponding to the viewpoint 1, the second pixel (“2” in the drawing) corresponding to the viewpoint 2, and the viewpoint 3 are displayed. The corresponding third pixel (“3” in the figure) and the fourth pixel (“4” in the figure) corresponding to the viewpoint 4 are arranged in order. From the viewpoint K (K is 1 to 4), the Kth pixel is visible, but other pixels are difficult to view. Therefore, in the display area of the display device 8000, an area composed of the first pixel (first area), an area composed of the second pixel (second area), and an area composed of the third pixel (third area). If a parallax image (first parallax image, second parallax image, third parallax image, and fourth parallax image) is displayed in each of the region) and the region (fourth region) configured by the fourth pixel, The player can be made to recognize the image three-dimensionally. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 198, the parallax barrier method described in the third embodiment is adopted, and the parallax barrier 8011 is used as a means for giving directivity to the light emitted from the display device 8000. ing.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachi-slot gaming machine.

In the pachi-slot shown in FIG. 199, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens or the like can be applied in addition to medals.

When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line is determined. In addition, as the type of the combination of symbols, there are provided those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals and operation of re-play are given to the player, and those related to so-called "miss" There is.

Subsequently, when the player presses the stop button after the plurality of reels (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) are rotated, the reel stop control means causes the internal winning combination and the stop button to operate. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing.

Here, in the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”, and the maximum number is set to four symbols.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel combinations are displayed along the winning determination line as much as possible by using the above specified time. To stop the reel from spinning. On the other hand, with respect to the symbol combination whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the symbol combination is not displayed along the winning determination line by using the specified time.

In this way, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot.

In the present specification, the reel stop operation (stop button operation) that is first performed when all reels (the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) are rotating is referred to as a first stop operation. , The stop operation performed after the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

In addition, in the pachi-slot, in the series of flows described above, various effects are performed using the image display performed by the display unit, the light output performed by various LEDs, the sound output performed by the speaker, or a combination thereof. Be seen.

When the player operates the start lever, a random number value for production (hereinafter, a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines, from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the effect content to be executed this time.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect execution means is interlocked with each trigger such as when the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when the presence or absence of the winning is determined. And execute the performance. In this way, the pachi-slot provides the player with an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed for) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, N stereoscopic material images (a left foreground material image and a right foreground image) that are materials of a portion that can be displayed in a three-dimensional display mode among the images displayed on the display unit (display device 8000). Material image) and a background material image and a specific material image (error material image) which are materials of a portion that can be displayed in a normal display mode among the images displayed on the display unit (display device 8000) By doing so, it has been described that N original images (an image for the left eye before scaling and an image for the right eye before scaling) are generated. The material image for error is an image that is a material of an error image (image indicating that an error has occurred) displayed on the display device 8000. In the fifth embodiment, as an example of the error, a pachinko game machine is used. I explained about possible errors in. When the present invention is applied to a pachi-slot gaming machine, an error peculiar to the pachi-slot gaming machine (for example, an error relating to medal accommodation or payout) may be adopted as the error. Examples of such an error include, for example, a selector error that prevents normal detection in a selector that guides a medal that is determined to be proper to the hopper, a hopper error that prevents normal payout in the hopper, and a hopper to be stored in the hopper. An example is a medal auxiliary store error in which the medals are full in the medal supplement store that stores the surplus medals that could not be cut.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when an error detection command is transmitted from the first control unit (main control circuit 7070) to the second control unit (sub control circuit 7200), N pieces of stereoscopic material images (left image) are displayed. The foreground material image and the right foreground material image) and the background material image have been described as being combined with the specific material image (error material image). The error material image corresponds to the specific material image (the image serving as the material of the specific image) in the present invention. As the specific material image in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately employ an image (for example, a character image) that is planarly recognized even when observed through a lenticular sheet or a parallax barrier. Further, in the present invention, the case where the command is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit can be adopted as a trigger for overlapping the specific material images in this way. Such a command is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the player operates the operation means. For example, in the mode in which the player can switch the effect mode by operating the operation means and the image corresponding to the effect mode of the switching destination is displayed when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode The image corresponding to may be adopted as the specific image. In addition, an image related to the item (for example, an image related to the character) is displayed when the operation related to the item in the guide menu (for example, the operation related to the customization of the character shown in FIG. 76) is performed on the guide menu screen (see FIG. 75). In the displayed form, an image related to the item may be adopted as the specific image. Further, the volume of the speaker and the brightness of the display device can be adjusted by operating the operation means, and an image for adjustment (an image showing the volume and the brightness is displayed when the operation to the effect of the adjustment is performed. ) Is displayed, the adjustment image may be adopted as the specific image. The adjustment may be performed during the change of the special symbol.

In the fifth embodiment, the display position on the display device 8000 is different between the character in the character image and the character in the error image, and they do not overlap. As described in the third embodiment, the character image is an image composed of characters (persons, animals, characters, figures, symbols, combinations thereof, or the like). In the fifth embodiment, as the image to be superimposed with the left foreground material image and the right foreground material image, the error material image is used in addition to the background material image. In the present invention, when it is determined that the 3D display and the error display are performed at the same timing, the stereoscopic viewing can be realized by performing the processing using the error image as the background image. Further, in the present invention, an error material image may be used instead of the background material image. For example, when displaying an error image accompanied by full-screen display (when the error image is displayed in the entire display area), a left foreground material image and a right foreground material image are used without using the background material image. The pre-scaling left-eye image and the pre-scaling right-eye image may be generated by superimposing the error material image. In this case, the error material image corresponds to the planar-view material image in the third embodiment. In addition, when it is determined that the 3D display and the error display are performed at the same timing and the error display is performed as the full-screen display, the 3D display is turned off (the 3D flag is set to off) and only the error display is performed. May be performed.

<Appendix (Other)>
Conventionally, the identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball has passed a starting area provided in a game area in which a shot game ball can be rolled. Variable display control means is provided for performing control to perform variable display and control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variability display is performed, which is advantageous to the player when the derived and displayed identification information is in a predetermined combination. There is known a pachinko gaming machine which is adapted to shift to a large jackpot gaming state (so-called "big hit").

Further, conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, Of the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reels and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. A stop switch that outputs a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and that transmits each driving force to each reel, and a signal that is output by the start switch and the stop switch based on the signal output by the stepping motor. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls the operation and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it performs a lottery based on a random value, and the result of this lottery (“the internal winning combination )) and a timing at which it is detected that the stop button is operated, a gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot is known, which stops the rotation of the reel.

However, the conventional pachinko gaming machine and pachislot gaming machine do not have the structure and function as the gaming machine of the present invention, so that the interest of the game cannot be effectively improved. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
When the present invention is applied to a pachi-slot gaming machine, the player inserts medals (ie, inserts a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot, or credits medals to the maximum BET button or 1-BET). When the game is started by operating the button and inserting the medals when the game ends, the hopper mechanism is driven and the medals are paid out from the medal payout opening or credited. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a player inserts a game medium required for a game, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is provided (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player, in addition to the form in which the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical action of the player and the game medium is paid out. It may be one that enables games without medals. That is, the game value in the present invention is not limited to the physically existing game medium, and any tangible or intangible object that can be used for playing a game can be appropriately adopted. Such an intangible object may be game medium data (for example, medal data) equivalent to a tangible object (game medium physically existing) such as a medal. Further, the mode of giving the game value to the player is not limited to the mode in which the physically existing game medium actually moves under the possession of the player, and may be a simple data transfer that does not involve the movement of a tangible object. Alternatively, a tangible object (card or the like) in which game medium data is stored may be given to the player. Further, the game medium managed by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and managing the game medium.

In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is a two-way communication with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected as much as possible and wins a role relating to the lending operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the payout of the game medium ( A payout operation of a game medium (that is, an operation of causing a player to acquire a necessary game medium when paying out the game medium) when the combination is established), or a game medium used for a game. It is sufficient that the recording operation can be performed electromagnetically. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, the retained game medium that displays the number of retained game media on the front of the game machine based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and In addition to the case where the player directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player on the game machine or the game medium handling device side is transmitted, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or a cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be stored by the image pickup means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

It should be noted that this game medium management device may be one that allows a game only without medals, as described above, or the game medium is loaded (hanged) by a physical player operation, It may be possible to play the game in both modes, that is, the mode in which the game is paid out, and the mode in which the game can be played without medals. In this case, the game medium management device can also adopt a method of directly controlling the selector or the hopper mechanism, and these are controlled by the main control circuit, and the control result is transmitted. It is also possible to employ a method in which the total number of game media available to the player for use in the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and the control is performed so that it can be displayed.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot gaming machine has been described, but the game medium management device is similarly provided in the slot machine or the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned gaming balls, The player's game medium may be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the selector, hopper mechanism, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost of the game machine In addition to reducing the manufacturing cost, it is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improving the game environment, reducing noise, and reducing the consumption of the game machine by reducing the number of devices. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Further, the set value may be only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be added or may be omitted. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be reset, so that the RAM is substantially cleared. Even when the setting value is only one level, a mode for lottery (first hit and/or addition, etc.) in an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a certain probability is counted. However, when the number of times reaches a specified value, by switching this mode, it is possible to cause undulation in the payout.

In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of a predetermined probability by a specified value becomes one output ball. If the value is regulated to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one stage, it can be compared with a plurality of gaming machines. For example, if the business hours of one day is 11 hours, then 11h=39600 sec. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rule, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1=about 9659 times. Since it is not realistic that no break (meal or toilet) is sandwiched, the number of games played per day is considered to be about 8,000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32×256=8192, so that the output wave can be switched in approximately one day.

Further, if the number of times the predetermined winning combination reaches the specified value, the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is unfavorable to the player are alternately switched. Can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the setting value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if it is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the wave of payout balls more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Further, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the set values decrease and become monotonous.

If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the setting value of 6 steps can be changed to the setting value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. Also, the development cost for designing the desired payout rate at each stage is 1/6. Furthermore, only the gaming machines that are suitable for the test are permitted to be used for sales, and thus the time required for the test can be shortened.

The first embodiment to the fifth embodiment have been described above. In the embodiment described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, a pachi-slot gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.).

Although the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention. Specific configurations of each means and the like are appropriately changed in design. It is possible. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable effects that occur from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic portions are mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and its applicable range is various. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used for accurately explaining the present invention and are not used for limiting the interpretation of the present invention. Further, it seems that those skilled in the art can easily infer from the concept of the invention described in the present specification, other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the invention. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims should be considered to include an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and the essence of this application by the Patent Office and general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. Therefore, it is possible to make a quick decision by conducting a detailed survey. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the description of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the effects peculiar to the present invention, it is desired that the literatures already disclosed are sufficiently taken into consideration for interpretation.

The above detailed description includes the processes executed by the computer. The above description and expressions are provided for the purpose of making the understanding by a person skilled in the art most efficient. As used herein, each process used to derive a result of 1 should be understood as a process that is self-consistent. Further, in each process, transmission or reception of an electrical or magnetic signal, recording, etc. are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are represented by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of description. There is a need. Further, although the processing in each processing may be described in the same expression as that of a human action, the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing will be obvious from the above description.

16 liquid crystal display 24 speaker 35 power switch 101 main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
201 Sub CPU
203 Work RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 662 Main button 664 Select button 7001 Pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine)
7002 Main body 7003 Base door 7004 Glass door 7011 Speaker 7011a Speaker box 7011b Connection terminal group 7012 Gaming board 7013 Display device 7015 Launching device 7016 Dispensing device 7018 Lamp (LED) group 7020 Actor 7043 Ball passage detector 7044 First starting opening 7045 2 Starting port 7046 Ordinary electric accessory 7051, 7052 General winning a prize mouth 7053 1st big winning a prize mouth 7054 2nd award winning mouth 7055 Out a mouth 7056 Game nail 7061 Special symbol display device 7062 Normal symbol display device 7063 Normal symbol hold display device 7064 1 special symbol hold display device 7065 second special symbol hold display device 7070 main control circuit 7071 main CPU
7072 Main ROM
7073 Main RAM
7077 One-chip microcomputer 7123 Delivery/launch control circuit 7200 Sub-control circuit 7201 Relay board 7202 Sub-board 7203 Control ROM board 7204, 204a, 204b CGROM board 7205 Sub-main ROM
7206, 7206a, 7206b CGROM
7210 Host control circuit 7210a Sub-work RAM
7210b SRAM
7220 Audio/LED control circuit 7230 Display control circuit 7262 Digital audio power amplifier

Claims (1)

An image relating to the game is displayed, and a part of the image is displayed in a three-dimensional display mode that allows the player to stereoscopically view it, while the other part of the image is displayed in a normal display mode different from the three-dimensional display mode. Display means capable of displaying,
Image generating means capable of generating an image displayed on the display means,
The image generation means,
Of the images displayed on the display means, the images are the materials of the part that can be displayed in the three-dimensional display mode, and are each viewed in N (N is an integer of 2 or more) viewpoints assumed in stereoscopic viewing. Combining each of N corresponding stereoscopic material images with a background material image and a specific material image that are materials of a portion that can be displayed in the normal display mode among the images displayed on the display unit. The first image generating means capable of generating N original images,
An image to be displayed on the display unit may be generated by performing scaling on each of the N original images generated by the first image generation unit and synthesizing each image obtained by the scaling. A possible second image generating means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images